Project Report 3

Environmental Impact Assessment (Draft)
February 2016
IND: Bihar New Ganga Bridge Project
Prepared by Bihar State Road Development Corporation Limited, Government of Bihar for the
Asian Development Bank.
CURRENCY EQUIVALENTS
(as of 29 February 2016)
Currency unit – Indian rupees (INR/Rs)
Rs1.00 = $ 0.01454
$1.00 = Rs 68.7525
ABBREVIATIONS
AADT - Annual Average Daily Traffic
AAQ - Ambient air quality
AAQM - Ambient air quality monitoring
ADB - Asian Development Bank
AH - Asian Highway
ASI - Archaeological Survey of India
BDL - Below detectable limit
BGL - Below ground level
BOD - Biochemical oxygen demand
BSRDCL - Bihar State Road Development Corporation Limited
BOQ - Bill of quantity
CCE - Chief Controller of Explosives
CGWA - Central Ground Water Authority
CITES - Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species
CO - Carbon monoxide
COD - Chemical oxygen demand
CPCB - Central Pollution Control Board
CSC - Construction Supervision Consultant
DFO - Divisional Forest Officer
DG - Diesel generating set
DO - Dissolved oxygen
DPR - Detailed project report
E&S - Environment and social
EA - Executing agency
EAC - Expert Appraisal Committee
EFP - Environmental Focal Person
EHS - Environment Health and Safety
EIA - Environmental impact assessment
EMOP - Environmental monitoring plan
EMP - Environmental management plan
ESCAP - United Nations Economic and Social Commission for Asia and
Pacific
GHG - Greenhouse gas
GIS - Geographical information system
GOI - Government of India
GRC - Grievance redress committee
GRM - Grievance redress mechanism
HFL - Highest flood level
IA - Implementing Agency
IMD - Indian Meteorological Department
IRC - Indian Road Congress
IUCN - International Union for Conservation of Nature
IVI - Important value index
IWTA - Inland Waterways Authority of India
LHS - Left hand side
LPG - Liquefied petroleum gas
Max - Maximum
Min - Minimum
MJB - Major bridge
MNB - Minor bridge
MOEFCC - Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change
MORSTH/ - Ministry of Road Surface Transport and Highways
MORTH
N, S, E, W, - Wind Directions (North, South, East, West or combination of
NE, SW, Two directions like South West, North West)
NW
NGO - Non-governmental organization
NH - National Highway
NOC - No Objection Certificate
NOx - Oxides of nitrogen
NPL - National Physical Laboratory, U.K.
NBWL - National Board for Wildlife
PAH - Project Affected Household
PAP - Project Affected Persons
PAS - Protected Areas
PCC - Portland Cement Concrete
PCR - Public Community Resources
PCU - Passenger Car Units
PD - Project Director
PM - Particulate Matter
PIU - Project Implementation Unit
PPE - Personal protective equipment
PMAE - Project Management and Authority Engineer
PPT - Parts per trillion
PPTA - Project Preparatory Technical Assistance
PUC - Pollution Under Control
PWD - Public Works Department
R&R - Rehabilitation and Resettlement
RCC - Reinforced cement concrete
RHS - Right hand side
ROB - Road Over Bridge
ROW - Right of way
RSPM - Respirable suspended particulate matter
SAARC - South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation
SC - Scheduled Cast – Name of a community in India
SEIAA - State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority
SEMU - Social and Environmental Management Unit
SH - State highway
SIA - Social Impact Assessment
SO2 - Sulphur Dioxide
SOI - Survey of India
SPCB - State Pollution Control Board
SPL - Sound Pressure Level
SPM - Suspended Particulate Matter
SPS - ADB Safeguard Policy Statement, 2009
ST - Scheduled Tribes – Name of a community in India
TA - Technical assistance
TDS - Total dissolved solids
TSS - Total Suspended Solids
UA - Urban Agglomeration
UIDSSMT - Urban Infrastructure Development Scheme for Small and
Medium Towns
UNESCO - United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural
Organization
USEPA - United States Environmental Protection Agency
UT - Union Territories
WHC - Water holding capacity
WWF - World Wildlife Fund
ZSI - Zoological survey of India
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES

dB(A) – A-weighted decibel
ha – hectare
km – kilometre
km2 – square kilometre
KWA – kilowatt ampere
Leq – equivalent continuous noise level
µg – microgram
m – meter
MW (megawatt) – megawatt
PM 2.5 or 10 – Particulate Matter of 2.5 micron or 10 micron size
NOTE
In this report, "$" refers to US dollars.
This environmental impact assessment is a document of the borrower. The views expressed
herein do not necessarily represent those of ADB's Board of Directors, Management, or staff,
and may be preliminary in nature.
In preparing any country program or strategy, financing any project, or by making any
designation of or reference to a particular territory or geographic area in this document, the
Asian Development Bank does not intend to make any judgments as to the legal or other status
of any territory or area.
CONTENTS
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .................................................................................. I

A. Introduction i
B. Description of the Project i
C. Description of the Environment ii
D. Consultation, Disclosure and Grievance Mechanism iv
E. Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures iv
F. Conclusions and Recommendations v
I. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................. 1
A. Background 1
B. Project Rationale 2
C. Environment Category and Scope of the EIA Study 4
D. Methodology Adopted for the EIA Study 7
E. Structure of the Report 8
II. POLICY, LEGAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORKS ..............................................10
A. National (India) Environmental Policy Framework 10
B. Social Regulatory Requirements of India and State 13
C. International Treaties and Relevance to the Project 13
D. ADB Safeguard Policy Statement Requirements 15
III. PROJECT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................19
A. Type of Project 19
B. Location and Features of the Proposed Project 19
C. Engineering Surveys and Investigations 21
D. Projected Traffic for the Design 21
E. Components of the Project 21
F. Proposed Alignment and Conceptual Plan of Project Components 25
G. Cost of the Project and Implementation Arrangement 31
IV. DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT...........................................................................32
A. Physical Environment 32
B. Ecological Environment 64
C. Socio-Economic Environment 86
D. Socio-Economic Profile of Project Affected Person 92
V. IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES..................................................96
A. Construction Activities and Rating of Impacts 96
B. Anticipated Environmental Impacts 98
C. Key operational stage impacts 123
D. Cumulative and Induced Environmental Impacts 141
E. Environmental Enhancement Measures 148
VI. CLIMATE CHANGE RISK AND ADAPTATION FOR GANGA BRIDGE ..........................151
A. Review of Related Literature 151
B. Predicted High Flood Level 153
C. Testing for Non-Stationarity 155
D. Return Periods vs. Return Levels 157
E. Design Flood for River Ganga at Patna 158
F. Adaptation Measure 159
G. Greenhouse Gas Emissions 160
VII. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES ..............................................................................162
A. Introduction 162
B. ‘With Project’ and ‘Without Project’ Scenario 162
C. Alternative Alignments/Locations 166
D. Engineering / Technological Alternatives 169
VIII. PUBLIC CONSULTATIONS, INFORMATION DISCLOSURE AND GRIEVANCE
REDRESS MECHANISM ..............................................................................174
A. Public Consultations 174
B. Public Disclosure 191
C. Grievance Redress Mechanism 191
IX. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN AND INSTITUTIONAL ARRANGEMENT ....194
A. Introduction 194
B. Impacts and Mitigation Measures 194
C. Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Program 195
D. Environmental Reporting System 197
E. Institutional Arrangement 198
A. Roles and Responsibilities 199
B. Environmental Safeguards Budget 206
X. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................209
LIST OF ANNEXES
ANNEX 1: RAPID ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT (REA) CHECKLIST ............................211
ANNEX 2: COMPARISON OF WB AND GOI AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS............216
ANNEX 3: COMPARISON OF WB EHS AND GOI AMBIENT NOISE LEVEL STANDARDS ..217
ANNEX 3A. INDIAN STANDARD DRINKING WATER SPECIFICATION: IS 10500:1991 .......218
ANNEX 4: DETAILS OF TREES TO BE CUT .........................................................................219
ANNEX 5: RECORD OF PUBLIC CONSULTATIONS.............................................................229
ANNEX 6: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ............................................................254
ANNEX 7: ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION AND
OPERATION PHASES ..............................................................................295
ANNEX 8 : TREE PLANTATION AND MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES ....................................299
ANNEX 9: GUIDELINES FOR BORROW AREA MANAGEMENT...........................................301
ANNEX 10: GUIDELINES FOR EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .............................303
ANNEX 11: GUIDELINES FOR WASTE DISPOSAL AND MANAGEMENT ............................306
ANNEX 12: DETAILS OF TRANSECT WALKS CONDUCTED IN THE PROJECT INFLUENCE
AREA ..............................................................................308
ANNEX 13: SOIL, WATER, AIR, AND NOISE QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS ALONG THE
PROJECT ALIGNMENT ..............................................................................312
ANNEX 14: COPY OF ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE FOR THE PROJECT .....................313
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1: Project Components ....................................................................................................... i
Table 2: Project Categorization .................................................................................................. 4
Table 3: Applicable Environmental National and State Requirements .......................................11
Table 4: Key Steps in Tree Cutting Permission Process: ..........................................................18
Table 5: Details of the Project ...................................................................................................19
Table 6. Projected Traffic for the Project ...................................................................................21
Table 7: Soil Quality in the Project Area (Dry Season) ..............................................................41
Table 8: Soil Quality in the Project Area (Wet Season) .............................................................42
Table 9: Land use classification of Bihar State ..........................................................................45
Table 10: classification within Project Influence Area based on Satellite Imagery .....................46
Table 11: Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations ..................................................47
Table 12: Techniques Used for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring .................................................48
Table 13: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to PM10 (24 hour average) Dry season ........48
Table 14: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to PM10 (24 hour average) Wet season .......48
Table 15: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to PM2.5 (24 hour average) Dry season ........48
Table 16: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to PM2.5 (24 hour average) wet season ........49
Table 17: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to SO2 (24 hour average) Dry season ..........49
Table 18: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to SO2 (24 hour average) wet season ..........49
Table 19: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to NO2 (24 hour average) Dry season .........49
Table 20: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to NO2 (24 hour average) wet season .........49
Table 21: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to CO (24 hour average) Dry season ...........50
Table 22: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to CO (24 hour average) wet season ...........50
Table 23: Details of Noise Level Monitoring Locations ..............................................................51
Table 24: Ambient Noise Levels Monitored in Dry/winter Season .............................................52
Table 25: Ambient Noise Levels Monitored in Dry/winter Season .............................................53
Table 26: Surface Water Quality in the Project Area (dry/winter season) ..................................56
Table 27: Ground Water Quality in the Project area (dry/winter season) ...................................58
Table 28: Surface Water Quality in the Project Area (wet season) ............................................60
Table 29: Ground Water Quality in the Project area (wet season) .............................................62
Table 30: Forest Cover of Bihar and Project Districts ................................................................67
Table 31: Forest Classification in Bihar .....................................................................................68
Table 32: List of Trees in the Project Influence Area and It’s Status ..........................................69
Table 33: Protected Area Network in the State of Bihar ............................................................70
Table 34: Faunal Species in Project Influence Area ..................................................................73
Table 35: Fish Species in the River Section under Project Area ................................................74
Table 36: Land Use Pattern based on Satellite Imagery (Year 2013) ........................................87
Table 37: The Demography of Villages in project area of Core Zone of Vaishali district ............88
Table 38: The Demography of Villages in project area of Core Sone of Patna district ...............89
Table 39: List of Sensitive Receptors along the Project Road ...................................................92
Table 40: Social Categories of the DPs .....................................................................................92
Table 41: Number of DPs ..........................................................................................................93
Table 42: Vulnerable Households being affected ......................................................................93
Table 43: Annual Income Level of the Affected Households......................................................94
Table 44: Number of DPs considered as Separate family as per LA Act ...................................94
Table 45: Educational Status of DPs .........................................................................................94
Table 46: Occupational Status of DPs .......................................................................................95
Table 47: Stage wise construction activities ..............................................................................96
Table 48: Rating of Impacts ......................................................................................................98
Table 49: Calculation of PM-10 Emissions from Sand Piles ....................................................107
Table 50: Calculation of PM-10 Emissions from Sand Piles ....................................................107
Table 51: Construction Equipment Noise Emission Levels ......................................................107
Table 52: Vibration Levels due to Construction Equipment and Traffic at 30 m (99 ft) .............108
Table 53: Noise Level Prediction during Construction .............................................................109
Table 54: Annual average daily motorized traffic data .............................................................124
Table 55: Emission factors for different types of Vehicle (ARAI, 2007) ....................................125
Table 56: Weighted Emission Factor for proposed traffic ........................................................126
Table 57: CO Predicted Concentrations (ppm) for peak traffic hour ........................................127
Table 58: PM2.5 predicted concentrations (µg/m3) for peak traffic hour ....................................127
Table 59: PM10 predicted concentrations (µg/m3) for peak traffic hour .....................................127
Table 60: Baseline pollutant concentration at different locations .............................................129
Table 61: Annual average daily motorized traffic data .............................................................136
Table 62: Noise prediction in dB (A) along the road corridor ...................................................136
Table 63: List of Sensitive Receptors along the Project Road .................................................136
Table 64: Predicted Noise Levels along the Project Road with and without mitigation measures
...............................................................................................................................................138
Table 65: Assessment of Induced Impacts from Proposed 6-lane Bridge Construction ...........144
Table 66: Modeling Annual Maximum Flood at Gandhighat Station, Patna .............................153
Table 67: % Change for Estimated Maximum Discharge .......................................................158
Table 68: Projected Traffic for the New Patna Bridge .............................................................160
Table 69:. Projected growth rates % .......................................................................................160
Table 70:CO2 Emission Factors .............................................................................................161
Table 71: Comparison of ‘With’ and ‘Without’ Project Scenario ...............................................164
Table 72: Comparison of Alternative Alignments for Proposed 6-lane Ganga Bridge ..............167
Table 73: Cost Comparison of 6-lane Bridge with Three Superstructure Options ....................171
Table 74: Details of Stakeholder Consultations & Issues Discussed .......................................177
Table 75: Summary of Public Consultations ............................................................................184
Table 76: Summary findings of Public Consultation and Actions Taken ..................................187
Table 78: Peoples’ Perception about Environment Parameter in the Project Area ..................190
Table 78: Stage-wise Reporting System of PIU.......................................................................198
Table 79: List of Partner Organizations in Implementing the EMP ...........................................206
Table 80: Summary of Environment Safeguards Budget .........................................................207
Table 81: Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan Cost Estimates...........................208
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1: Map of the Project Site ................................................................................................ 2
Figure 2: Connectivity of Proposed Bridge to the Regional Road Network ................................. 3
Figure 3: EIA Study Area ........................................................................................................... 6
Figure 4: Environmental Legal Administrative Framework in India ............................................16
Figure 5: Environmental Clearance Process in India .................................................................17
Figure 6: Location Map of the Project Site on Google earth Image............................................20
Figure 7: Location of the Project Site on SOI Topographic Map ................................................20
Figure 8: General Arrangement Drawing of Proposed Bridge....................................................23
Figure 9: Cross Section Detail of Proposed bridge and Foundation ..........................................24
Figure 10: Proposed Road Alignment of the Bihar New Ganga Bridge and Approach Roads....25
Figure 11: Section 1: Conceptual Plan of the Project Start Point Intersection of Patna-
Bakhtiyarpur(diverted NH-30)....................................................................................................25
Figure 12. Section 2: Conceptual Plan of the Rail-Over-Bridge across Patna - Mokama Main line
.................................................................................................................................................26
Figure 13. Section 3: Conceptual Plan of the Old NH-30/Loknayak Ganga Path Interchange ...26
Figure 14. Section 4: Conceptual Plan of the Bakhtiyarpur-Patna Toll Post ..............................27
Figure 15. Section 5: Conceptual Plan of the Bihar New Ganga Main Bridge ............................28
Figure 16. Section 6: Conceptual Plan of the Raghopur Diara Access Ramps ..........................28
Figure 17. Section 8: Conceptual Plan of the Junction Arrangement at Mehnar Road ..............29
Figure 18. Section 10: Conceptual Plan of the Arrangement of 6-lane facility across Hajipur to
Samastipur Main line (ROB)......................................................................................................30
Figure 19. Section 11: Conceptual Plan of the Arrangement between Chak Sikander Railway
Station, NH-103 & Gazipur Chowk (End Point) ........................................................................30
Figure 20: Average Temperature (0C) Graph for Patna based on 2000 to 2012 Data ...............32
Figure 21: Five year Average Rainfall Data of Patna .................................................................33
Figure 22: Wind rose Diagram of the Project Area. June, 2013 .................................................33
Figure 23: Topography of Project Area – Section 1 ...................................................................34
Figure 28: Geological Map of Bihar and Project Area ................................................................37
Figure 29: Physiographic Map of Project Area ..........................................................................38
Figure 30: Soil Map of the State and Project Area.....................................................................39
Figure 31: Seismic Zonation Map of India and Project Region ..................................................43
Figure 32: Drainage Pattern and River Basin Map of Bihar and Project Region ........................44
Figure 33: Land use pattern in Bihar State ................................................................................45
Figure 34: Distribution of Land use Pattern in Project Influence Area ........................................46
Figure 35: Average Ambient Air Quality in the Project Area (Dry Season).................................50
Figure 36: Average Ambient Air Quality in the Project Area (wet Season).................................51
Figure 37: Average Noise Level (Leq) in the Project Area in January 2015 ...............................52
Figure 38: Average Noise Level (Leq) in the Project Area in February 2015 .............................53
Figure 39: Average Noise Level (Leq) in the Project Area in July 2015 .....................................53
Figure 40: Average Noise Level (Leq) in the Project Area in August 2015 ................................54
Figure 41: Coverage of Ecological Study ..................................................................................66
Figure 42: Forest Cover Distribution of Bihar ............................................................................67
Figure 43: Forest Cover Map of Bihar and Project Area ............................................................68
Figure 44: Protected Area Map of Bihar and Project Area (Source: Wildlife Institute of India,
Dehradun) .................................................................................................................................71
Figure 45: Distribution Map of Gangatic Dolphin (Source: IUCN Red List) ................................75
Figure 46: Habitats and Movement Path of Dolphins, Turtles and Gariyals in Ganga near Project
Area ..........................................................................................................................................80
Figure 47: Location of Vikramshila Gangetic Dolphins Sanctuary with respect to project site ....81
Figure 48: Gharial habitat range ................................................................................................83
Figure 49: Distribution Map of Nilssonia Gangetica (Source: IUCN Red List) ............................86
Figure 50: Contours of normalized surface windspeeds, us/ur (source: USEPA AP-42)..........107
Figure 51. Erosion and Deposition Along the Proposed Bridge Axis, 2010 (S. Dayal and D. S.
Pattanik)..................................................................................................................................115
Figure 52. Bridge alignment alternatives (BSRDC, 2013). ......................................................116
Figure 53. Showing superimposed courses of river Ganga from the year 1922 to 2013 (BSRDC,
2013). .....................................................................................................................................117
Figure 54. Channel reflection observed in river Ganga at Patna (BRSDC, 2013) ....................118
Figure 55: Traffic Fleet on the bridge ......................................................................................124
Figure 56: CO predicted concentrations (ppm) along the proposed Bridge .............................128
Figure 57: PM2.5 predicted concentrations (µg/m3) along the proposed Bridge ........................128
Figure 58: PM10 predicted concentrations (µg/m3) along the proposed Bridge.........................128
Figure 59: Spatial distribution of CO concentrations ................................................................129
Figure 60: Spatial distribution of PM2.5 concentrations .............................................................131
Figure 61: Spatial distribution of PM10 concentrations..............................................................133
Figure 62: Noise contour for 1st Year.......................................................................................139
Figure 63: Noise contour for 5th year .......................................................................................139
Figure 64: Noise contour for 10th year .....................................................................................139
Figure 67: Conceptual Drawing of the Noise Barrier ...............................................................141
Figure 68: Indicative location of Proposed Six-Lane Bridge and future road network ..............142
Figure 69: Annual Maximum Discharge Series of River Ganga (1965-2012) at Gandhighat
Station, Patna .........................................................................................................................154
Figure 70: Probability Density Function ...................................................................................154
Figure 71: Observed Trends in ganga River Annual Maximum Discharge...............................155
Figure 72: GEV Fit, Non-Stationary, Ganga River at Patna .....................................................157
Figure 73: return Level versus Return Period ..........................................................................158
Figure 74: Project Alignment Options ......................................................................................166
Figure 75: General Arrangement Drawing of Preferred Option ................................................172
Figure 76: Cross Section Detail of Preferred Option ................................................................173
Figure 77: Photographs of Road Side Interviews with Affected People ...................................175
Figure 78: Photographs of Consultations with Stakeholders....................................................186
Figure 79: Grievance Redress Mechanism .............................................................................193
Figure 80: Institutional Arrangements for Environment Safeguards .........................................200
i
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
A. Introduction
1. This report documents the findings and results of the Environmental Impact Assessment
(EIA) for the proposed greenfield Bihar New Ganga Bridge Project at Patna. The scope of the
EIA study covered the immediate project area and a buffer radius of 10km surrounding the
project area which is referred as the “project influence area” in the rest of the report. This area
includes 10km upstream and downstream of the bridge location.
2. The project is classified as environment Category A Project as per ADB SPS

requirements due to: i) potential adverse impacts expected on the Gangetic Dolphin (Platanista
gangetica), Gharial (Gavialis gangetica) and the Ganges soft shell turtle (Nilssonia gangetica)
which are listed under the IUCN red list as endangered, critically endanged and vulnerable
respectively and under schedule 1 of the Wildlife Protection Act of India; ii) the large scale of
physical works involving huge quantities of construction material; and iii) the creation of long
term new traffic over the bridge.
3. Under the EIA Notification, 2006 of the Environmental Protection Act of India, though
bridges are not specifally mentioned, the project bridge is being considered as “Building and
Construction Projects with an area bigger than 20,000 square meters and hence falls under
category B requiring an environmental clearance from the State Environmental Impact
Assessment Authority. The environmental clearance for the project has been secured in
January 2016 (see annex 14).
B. Description of the Project
4. The total project cost is estimated to be approximately $832 million of which ADB will
finance $500 million from its Ordinary Capital Resources (ORC).
5. The proposed bridge will take off from Kacchi Dargah (from NH-30) on the south and
terminate at Bidupur (at NH-103) in Vaishali on the north to provide an alternative to the existing
Mahatma Gandhi Setu bridge locaed aboutbn 10km upstream. This existing bridge is the only
connection between north and south Bihar near Patna and is currently in poor condition causing
traffic jams, safety issues and air pollution. Table 1 shows the key components of the Project.
Table 1: Project Components

Project Total
Name of the Project Districts State
Components Length (km)
Construction of a new six-lane  Main bridge
suspension type bridge across  Approach Roads
Patna and
Ganges River from Deedargunj  Toll gates 22.76 Bihar
Vaishali
on NH-30 to Chak Sikandar in  3 km Widening
Vaishali district on NH-103 of NH103
6. The alignment of the proposed bridge is located at an area where the river divides into a
north and south channel with an island called Raghopur diara in the middle. The bridge is
proposed to be a bank to bank bridge running from the south (Kachhi Dargah) over the diara
and to the north side (Bidurpur). Raghopur diara consists mainly of alluvial soil and parts of it
get submerged annually during the monsoon season.
ii
7. The project engineering team as part of feasibility study has studied various alternatives
for: i) location of the alignment, ii) type of structures, and iii) type of bridge. After considering
various factors such as technical feasibility, costs, resettlement impacts, environmental impacts,
hydrological risks and traffic scenarios the bank to bank concrete extra dosed bridge was
recommended as the most suitable option.
C. Description of the Environment
1. Physical Environment
8. The project area forms a part of the Ganga river basin which covers an area of over 1
million sq. km forming one of the largest drainage basins in the world. The project area is made
up of flat alluvial plains with an average elevation of approximately 53 m above msl. The project
area has humid subtropical climate with extremely hot summers from March to mid-June,
monsoons from mid-July to late September and chilly winter nights, foggy or sunny days from
November to February. Soil in the project area is characterized by calcareous alluvial (slightly
alkaline). The site of proposed 6-lane bridge is situated in moderately stable zone which falls
under seismic zone IV (as per IS 1893 (Part-I): 2002) category.
9. The land use pattern within the corridor of influence of the proposed project is mostly
water bodies (river Ganges) followed by agricultural land. The project area mostly falls under the
river basin of Ganga and sub basins of Punpun, Gandhak and Burhi-Gandak-Bagmati river
basins. The water level varies between 45m and 50m (High Flow Level) above msl between the
dry winter season and monsoon season. The pre-monsoon ground water levels were found to
be generally in the range of 3m – 9m bgl (below ground level) and post-monsoon ground water
levels mostly in the range of 1m – 3m bgl in the project area of Patna and Vaishali districts.
10. Sampling of water quality show that all parameters of water quality are within the
IS:10500 drinking water standard except for the higher levels of total coliform and fecal coliform.
Ground water samples were found to be within the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB)
standards. Sampling of air quality show that the ambient air quality levels of all pollutants are
within the NAAQS. However, the PM10 and PM2.5 levels are above the World Bank
Environment Health and Safety (WB EHS) guideline values of 50 µg/m3 and 25 µg/m3
respectively. The source of the PM10 and PM2.5 is the brick kilns located in Didarganj and
along the banks on southern side of the project side i.e. Kacchi Dargah end.
11. Noise levels monitored at four locations along the project road show that both daytime
and night time noise level exceed the National Ambient Air Quality Standard (NAAQS) and the
WB-EHS guidelines in one location (Kalyanpur village) of four sampling locations. The source of
noise in Kalyanpur village is operation of the brick factories and local domestic/commercial
activities.
2. Ecological Environment
12. Majority of the land use in the project area of influence is water bodies and agricultural
land comprising riparian habitat and terrestrial habitat. The dominant type of habitat in the
project area is “modified habitat” in the area of the approach roads. However the area inside the
Ganga river serves as natural habitat for the Gangetic Dolphin (Platanista Gangetica) which is
listed as “endangered” under the IUCN red list, under schedule I of the Wildlife Conservation Act
of India and also listed under CITES annex 1. Gharials (Gavialis gangeticus) a critically
endangered species has also been reported to use the river in the project influence area as a
iii
migratory route. However according to local wildlife experts (Professor R.K Sinha of Patna
University and Dr. Gopal Sharma of Zoological Survey of India, Patna) it is mainly the
confluence of the Gandak river located about 14 km upstream of the project bridge site which is
the main habitat for the gharial. The Raghopur diara serves as natural habitat for the Ganges
soft shell turtle (Nilssonia gangetica) which is listed as “vulnerable” under IUCN and is also
listed schedule I of the Wildlife Conservation Act of India. In addition the diara serves as habitat
to a number of migratory bird species. However, none of the bird species are IUCN endangered
or critically endangered.
13. Other mammal species seen in the project influence area are smooth coated otters
(Lutra perspicillata), Black Buck (Antilope cervicapra), Blue Bulls (Boselaphus tragocamelus),
Jackals (Canis aureus), Indian mongoose (Herpestes edwardsii) and five stripped squirrel (F. p.
chhattisgarhi). Other than these wild animals, domesticated mammals like goat, sheep, dog,
cow, ox, donkey etc. are also present in the project influence area. Other reptile species seen in
the project influence area are monitor Lizards (Varanus bengalensis), hard-shell turtles
(Kachuga tecta), soft-shell turtles (Aspideretes gangeticus), water snakes
(Xenochrophispiscator), rat Snakes (Ptyas mucosus), common Kraits (Bungarus caerulens) and
Indian cobra (Naja Naja). Avian fauna in and along the Ganga river are rich and highly diverse.
Species recorded along the Ganga river in the project area are Caspian Tern (Sterna caspia),
Black-tailed Godwit (Limosa limosa), Peregrine Falcon (Falco peregrinus), Greater Spotted
Eagle (Aquila clanga), Brahminy Kite (Haliastur indus), Common Shelduck (Tadorna tadorna),
Pied Harrier (Circus melanoleucos), Indian Cormorant (Phalacrocorax fuscicellis), Great White
Pelican (Pelicanus onecrotalus). Through field surveys the following birds were sighted in the
project influence area: Common crow, Myna, Eagle, Sparrow, Babbler, Pigeon, Cattle Egrets,
Red Vented bulbul, Drongo, Sparrow and Indian Roller. The species of fishes noticed from
study are Rohu, Catla, Hilsa, Mystus sp, Cirrhinus Sp, etc. The species of fishes given in Table
35 are commonly reported in the fresh water bodies like river, streams, lakes, pond and
estuaries. They are cosmopolitan in distribution and are reported all over India and Indian Sub
continents. These species of fishes are commonly used in aqua culture practice and had good
commercial importance
14. There are three faunal species that are listed as endangered under IUCN and included
in schedule I and II of the Wildlife Protection Act of India in the project influence area are:
i) Gangetic dolphin (Platanista gangetica)

ii) Ganges softshell turtle (Nilssonia gangetica)
iii) Gharial (Gavialis gangeticus)
15. Literature reviews, primary field surveys and consutlations with local wildlife experts
showed that the project area does not seve as “critical habitat” according to the ADB SPS and
IFC PF 6 for any of these three species mainly because the population proportion found in the
project area is less than 10% of the total population and the project influence area is not a
discrete management unit for any of the species.
3. Socio-economic Environment
16. In 2011, Vaishali district had a population of 3,495,021 with a population density of 1,717
people per sq. km. Of the total 1,844,535 were male and 1,650,486 female. In 2011, Patna
district had population of 5,838,465 with a population density of 1,823 people per sq. km. Of the
total 3,078,512 were male and 2,759,953 were female. The sex ratio in Vaishali was 895
females per 1000 and that of in Patna was 897 females per 1000 male under the census of
iv
2011. The average literacy rate of Vaishali was 66.60% that of Patna was 70.68% compared to
62.92% of 2001.
17. Transportation system is a key factor in the socio-economic development of any state. In
comparison with other Indian states, Bihar is poorly served with transport and communications
facilities. State has about 21.77 km of roads per 100 sq. km, as against the national average of
38.33 km per 100 sq. km. The state is well endowed with potential hydroelectric power. Installed
power capacity of Bihar is 540 MW, of which 320 MW is produced from Barauni Thermal Power
Station and 220 MW from Muzaffarpur Thermal Power Station. The state is known to be one of
the popular tourist destinations of country with Bodhgaya, the most important Buddhist site in
the world located in it.
D. Consultation, Disclosure and Grievance Mechanism
18. A total of 13 focus group discussions and 24 one on one key person interviews involving
362 participates from affected people, landowners, and village authorities, were carried out in
May-June 2013, November – December 2014 and October 2015. Specific emphasis was given
to the participants from vulnerable groups and women groups to ensure that gender concerns
are addressed in the project. Out of total participants, 54 participants were from women group.
19. In addition wildlife experts from local government agencies such as the Forestry
department, Zoolgical Survey of India (ZSI), Patna University, State Environmental Impact
Assessment Authority and Inland Waterways Authority were consulted. A number of non-
government organizations at local, regional as well as international levels were also consulted
including World Wide Fund for Nature (WWF), India; Dolphin Foundation, Guwahati, Assam;
Aaranyak, Guwahati; Centre for Environment Education (CEE), Delhi; and Mandar Nature Club
of Bhagalpur (Bihar).
20. The draft Environmental Impact Assessment Report will be disclosed in the office of
BSRDCL. The report will also made available to interested parties on request from the office of
the BSRDCL. This draft final EIA report will be disclosed to the public through the ADB website,
120 days before the approval of the project by ADB Board. The updated EIA report to be
prepared during the detailed design stage will be disclosed on ADB website as well.
21. A grievance and redress mechanism (GRM) for environment safeguards has been
established for the project. Depending on the seriousness of the grievences, they will be
addressed at three levels including the Project Implementation Unit (PIU) level, management
level (BSRDCL) and at the grievance redress committee (GRC) level. The GRC will comprise of
members from the PIU, BSRDCL, contractor, Project Management and Authority Engineer
(PMAE), and relevant experts from the Forestry Department or ZSI and others depending on the
nature of the issue. The duration for responding to the complainant will range from 7 days to a
maximum of 30 days depending on the seriousness of the complaint.
E. Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures
22. Construction activities for pre-construction, construction and post-construction and

operation stages were identified. An analysis of interactions of the construction activities with
the environment identified two broad types of impacts. First: impacts that are low – severe,
temporary and localized and second: impacts that are low, permanent and regional.
v
23. Amongst the first type severe impacts are expected on the local biodiversity and the
three protected species; air quality through generation of dust and fugitive emissions and the
local hydrological regime. To address impacts on biodiversity and the protected species several
measures have been recommended for avoidance; mitigation, minimization and enhancement.
It includes implementation of a Biodiversity Conservation Plan (BCP) to ensure no “net loss” of
biodiversity. For mitigating and minimizing impacts of dust and fugitive emissions mitigation
measures such as water sprinkling, maintenance of minimum distances from existing
communities, proper maintenance of construction equipment and vehicles are proposed.
Additional hydrological studies have been recommended and further design of erosion
protection measures particularly in Raghopur diara will need to be carried out. Implementationof
recommended measures are expected to maintain the level of impacts to average – low,
temporary and localized.
24. Amongst the second type key impacts are air pollution, increase in GHG emissions and
noise levels due to generation of new traffic over the bridge. The bridge runs mainly over the
river and there are only 3 settlements along the approach roads and only 4 sensitive receptors
within 10m of the road edge. Projections made show that PM2.5 and PM10 exceeds WB-EHS
standards only in year 15 at 10m from the road edge. There will be no exceedances of GOI and
WB-EHS standards for noise levels due to construction of noise barrier, difference in height of
the elevated road and location of the sensitive receptors. Given these factors, the impacts are
expected to be low and minimal.
25. Further the following measures will be taken to ensure that the project will remain
complaint to the ADB SPS: declaration of key biodiversity areas as no-go zones; prohibition of
piling for construction of piers; prohibition of dredging; implementation of good practice
guidelines; sourcing of construction material only from existing licensed quarries.
26. An environmental management budget of US$ 1, 324, 413 or INR 83,438,000 has been
estimated for implementation of the environmental safeguards under the project. This budget
also includes cost of implementing the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and
Environmental Monitoring Plan (EMOP), Biodiversity Conservation Plan. The EMP has been
prepared for avoidance, mitigation and minimization of potential adverse impacts and
enhancement of various environmental components along the project road. For each mitigation
measures to be carried out its location, timeframe, implementation and overseeing/ supervising
responsibilities has been identified. Monitoring plan for construction and operation phase has
been framed to ensure effective implementation of EMP.
F. Conclusions and Recommendations
27. Conclusions. In light of the technical, institutional and budgetary measures

recommended it is expected that the project will avoid severe, permanent and regional impacts.
There will be no net loss in biodiversity. Tremendous social and economic benefits will be
generated in Bihar by the bridge creating a reliable, sustainable and safe access to Patna city
and connection between south and the lesser developed north Bihar.
28. The EPC modality will be followed under the project. Therefore the detailed design of the
bridge and approach roads will be prepared by the contractor. Project components that will be
identified during the detailed design stage are: identification of camp sites; quarries; haul routes;
all season access routes to the diara; borrow areas; disposal sites and others. Considering
these factors this EIA report and EMP will updated and revised during the detailed design stage.
Physical construction works for the main bridge and approach roads will be allowed on site upon
vi
approval of the revised EIA report and EMP. The contractor will be required to allocate enough
budget to implement all items under the EMP.
1
I. INTRODUCTION
A. Background
1. The Ganges River bisects Bihar into northern and southern regions, flowing through the
middle from west to east. Patna the capital city of Bihar is located on the southern bank of the
river Ganga and also straddles the rivers Sone, Gandak and Punpun. At an elevation of 53m
above mean sea level (msl) the city is approximately 35 km long and 16-18 km wide and
houses most of the important institutions i.e. administrative, health, and higher learning
education. In the northern bank lies Vaishali district with population of about 3.5 million, one of
the most backward districts in the entire country.
2. The state of Bihar has the huge potential of industrial growth, which needs better
connectivity of villages, towns with adjoining areas. The economy of Bihar state is mainly based
on agricultural and trading activities. The industrial and agricultural developments have led to
higher transport demand. With the higher transport demand and the expansion of the existing
business, there is a growing mismatch between the vehicular population and availability of road
infrastructure, which has resulted in traffic congestions, deteriorated level of traffic efficiency
and road safety in existing bridges such as Mahatma Gandhi Setu. As a result of the aforesaid
growth and need to fulfill the mismatch various new infrastructure development projects has
been planned across the state. The Government of Bihar acting through Bihar State Road
Development Corporation Limited (BSRDCL) has taken the needful action. BSRDCL has
ideated the urgent need of a road bridge over Ganges connecting Patna and Vaishali district.
3. Subsequently BSRDCL had planned a conceptual scheme for linking NH-30 (Kacchi
Dargah) to NH-103 (Bidupur in Vaishali district) through a six lane iconic or similar type road
suspension cable bridge over river Ganges. BSRDCL had engaged a technical advisor for
preparation of feasibility study and preliminary project report of road bridge over river Ganges.
4. Based on the feasibility study it is proposed to construct a new six-lane suspension type
bridge across Ganges River from Deedargunj on NH-30 to Chak Sikandar in Vaishali district on
NH-103, consisting of six lane bridge structures of 9.760 kilometers, approach viaduct and
roads of 1.5 kilometers from south and 8.5 kilometers from north, tolling and service facilities,
and widening 3 kilometers of NH-103. The proposed location of the bridge is about 10 km
downstream of existing Mahatma Gandhi Setu in Patna. Figure 1 show the location of the
proposed bridge over river Ganges.
2
Figure 1: Map of the Project Site
B. Project Rationale
5. The existing Mahatma Gandhi Setu bridge over Ganges River which connects Patna to
Vaishali district and Northern Bihar was constructed and opened in 1982 with 4 traffic lanes and
sidewalks. However, this bridge is in deteriorating condition due to rapidly increasing traffic
volume and vehicle weights. At present, it is restricted to 2-lanes, leading to severe traffic
3
congestion, and is closed for heavy commercial vehicles. The travel time over the 5.6 kilometer
bridge can often exceed 1 hour or more, and the alternate crossing is about 120 kilometers
away. Hence, the urgent need for another bridge for transporting passengers and goods
between Patna and northern Bihar.
6. Besides the project will also provide connectivity to Raghopur Island. Raghopur is
surrounded by ganges river from all sides connected Island. Every year this area gets
submerged by water due to flood by the ganges. The Island is currently connected with a small
link road through pantoon bridge that connects island with Patna city.
7. Along the proposed six-lane bridge over river ganges will also provide connectivity to the
wide regional road network which BSRDCL is currently developing. Figure 2 show the overall
regional connectivity drawn on google-earth image.
Figure 2: Connectivity of Proposed Bridge to the Regional Road Network
8. A road map and policy framework to develop and sustain a good road network in the
state is provided in the Bihar Road Sector Development-New Dimensions, which calls for the
state to address network capacity and quality deficiencies, strengthen its road agencies, adopt
best practices to improve project implementation capacity, introduce long-term performance-
based maintenance contracts, and encourage private sector to participate in road financing.
Also, a strategic master plan for 20 years is being prepared under the ongoing CDTA 8170
(Road Master Plan for Bihar’s State Highway Development) to include long term vision and
goals, action program, and financing plan. The strategic context is clear as India’s Twelfth Five
Year Plan seeks faster, more inclusive and sustainable growth. The government’s objectives in
the transport sector include improving connectivity and developing state core network. This is
supported by the ADB’s country partnership strategy with emphasis on infrastructure
4
development for increased movement of people and goods. The proposed project is consistent
with plans for improving traffic movement across Bihar, and is integral to the overall road sector
improvements that ADB is already financing.
9. The proposed financing modality for the project is a stand alone Project loan. The
project is estimated to cost $832 million, of which ADB will finance $500 million from its
Ordinary Capital Resources (OCR). The overall impact of the project will be improved transport
network in Bihar. The immediate outcome will be improved connectivity between Patna and
Northern Bihar. The specific project outputs will be: (i) a new bridge across Ganges River from
Deedargunj on NH-30 to Chak Sikandar in Vaishali district on NH-103, consisting of six lane
bridge structures of 9.760 kilometers, approach viaduct and roads of 1.5 kilometers from south
and 8.5 kilometers from north, tolling and service facilities, and widening 3 kilometers of NH-
103, and (ii) enhanced capacity of bridge operation and management. The project construction
period will span 4 years approximately from 2016 to 2019. This will be followed by a
performance based maintenance period of 5 years.
C. Environment Category and Scope of the EIA Study
10. Details on the project category under ADB SPS and GOI environmental policies are
provided in Table 2.
Table 2: Project Categorization

Project Category according to ADB SPS
1. Category A
2. Reason for proposed i) There are risks for large scale - short term impacts and
category long term irreversible impacts due to the large scale of the
project requiring significant quantities of civil works; and
ii) There is risk of short term and long term impacts on the
Ganges river dolphin (Platanista gangetica) a globally
endangered species under Integrated Union for
Conservation of Nature (IUCN) which is found in the
Ganges river including the section over which the bridge
will be built.
Rapid Environmental Assessment (REA) Checklist is
attached as Annex 1.
3. Type if assessment iii) Detailed Environmental Impact Assessment
required
Project Category/Environmental Assessment requirements under national /local
policies
4. Name/names of The Environmental (Protection) Act 1986
applicable national The Wildlife (Protection) Act 1972
acts, regulations EIA Notification, 2006
5. Environmental B. Paperwork to confirm categorization as B1 or B2 is under
category process.
6. Reason for category or Construction of the bridge and approach roads (considered as
environmental bypasses) connecting to NH on either side is considered as
assessment or N/A “Building and Construction” greater than 20,000 square meters
under the EIA Notification, 2006. Hence it is categorized as B.
7. Type of assessment EIA report in accordance with TOR approved by the State
required Environmental Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA).
5
11. The objective of this EIA study is to identify potential environmental impacts of the
proposed bridge and approach road development, and to formulate strategies to avoid and
minimize adverse impacts. The scope of work to accomplish the above objective, comprise the
following:
 understanding the baseline environmental conditions of the project area,
 identifying the potential environmental impacts of the proposed project,
 recommending appropriate mitigation measures to avoid/minimize the
environmental impacts,
 recommending environmental enhancement measures to help improve the local
environment, and
 preparing an environmental management plan for achieving the above two
recommended measures.
12. The area covered in this EIA study includes the location of the bridge (running over the
river and the Raghopur diara) and approach roads. A 2 km buffer area is considered as the core
area of impact or area of direct impact and the surrounding area of upto 10 km surrounding the
bridge and approach roads including upstream and downstream of the bridge location
considered as the buffer area or area of indirect impact as shown in Figure 3.
6
Figure 3: EIA Study Area

7
D. Methodology Adopted for the EIA Study
13. The Environmental Impact Assessment has been carried out, in accordance with the
requirements of the ADB’s Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS 2009). The study methodology
has been adopted in such a manner to ensure that environmental concerns are given adequate
weightage in the selection of alignment and design of the bridge and approach roads.
14. The Environmental assessment is based on information acquired through primary data
collection, secondary sources, consultations and modeling exercises. An overview of the key
methods adopted for data collection and analysis is provided below.
1. Primary data collection

15. Ecological surveys were carried out in and around the project area to collect information
on the flora and fauna with special emphasis on the habitat of the Gangetic Dolphin, a globally
endangered species known to exist in the Ganga river. Primary data on the baseline conditions
of air quality, quality of surface and ground water, noise levels, soil conditions were also carried
out. Primary data collection has been carried out only for both the seasons i.e. the dry season
data over December 2014 – January 2015 period and wet season data over July – August 2015
period. Further details on the methodology used for primary data collection is provided in
Chapter 3.
2. Secondary data collection

16. A host of literature exists on the Gangetic Dolphin and ongoing Dolphin conservation
projects. These documents were reviewed to understand the ecological habitat range of the
dolphin, its seasonal activities of breeding and feeding, migration routes etc. In addition
literature on the Gangetic river basin, the hydrological and ecological systems were also
reviewed. While many documents were reviewed from which most information was sought from
are:
 The Conservation Action Plan for The Gangatic Dolphin (2010-2020) by National
Ganga River Basin Authority, MoEFCC, Government of India;
 The Gangatic Dolphin and Action Plan for its Conservation in Bihar (2013)
prepared by Dr. R.K. Sinha for Department of Environment & Forest,
Government of Bihar;
 Protection of Endangered Ganges River Dolphin in Brahmaputra River, Assam,
India (2009) prepared by Dr. Abdul Wakid, Programme Leader, Gangatic Dolphin
Research and Conservation Programme for IUCN.
 Smith, B.D. & Braulik, G.T. 2012. Platanista gangetica1. The IUCN Red List of
Threatened Species. Version 2015.2. <www.iucnredlist.org>. Downloaded on 28
July 2015.
17. Data on the hydrology of the Ganga river and past flood levels were sourced from the
Central Water Commission (CWC) of Patna. Data on monthly temperature and wind speed
were sourced from the India Meteorological Department (IMD) of Patna. This was used for
studying the climatic conditions and projection of future climate in the project area.
3. Consultations
1
Source: http://www.iucnredlist.org/details/full/41758/0
8
18. Consultations were carried out with local communities to get information on the baseline
environmental conditions in the project area, seek the local people’s views on the project and
find opportunities to modify the location and design of the project to meet their needs.
Consultations were also carried out with key government agencies such as the local
Department of Environment and Forest, State Level Environmental Impact Assessment
Authority, Bihar State Pollution Control Board, Zoology Department of Patna University, State
Biodiversity Board and Zoological Survey of India. Local, regional and international NGO’s
consulted on their views and recommendations on the project are WWF-India, Centre for
Environment Education (CEE), Dolphin Foundation, Guwahati, Aaranyak, Guwahati, and
Mandar Nature Club of Bhagalpur. Further details on the people and agencies consulted are
provided in Chapter 8 of this report on Information Disclosure, Consultation, and Participation.
4. Modelling
19. The CALINE model was used to predict future air quality and FHWA TNM Noise model
was used to predict noise levels and the Transport Emissions Evaluation Model for Projects
(TEEMP) to project future greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions with the future projected traffic.
5. Analysis of information
20. The information collected through the methods described above was analysed to help
identify key project impacts and provide recommendations for avoiding, minimizing, mitigating
impacts and providing compensatory measures. Recommendations have also been made to
enhance the local environmental conditions with the intention of having no net loss of
biodiversity due to the project and maintaining the environmental conditions within baseline
conditions or improving the environmental conditions in comparison to baseline conditions.
E. Structure of the Report
21. This EIA report has been presented as per requirements of the ADB’s Safeguard Policy
Statement (SPS) 2009. The report is organised into following ten Chapters, a brief of each
chapter is described below. An executive summary is also provided at the beginning of the
report.
 Chapter 1 - Introduction: This section describes the background information
about the project and EIA study.
 Chapter 2 - Policy, Legal, and Administrative Frameworks: This section
summarizing the national and local legal and institutional frameworks that guided
the conduct of the assessment.
 Chapter 3 - Project Description: This section presents the key features and
components of the proposed project.
 Chapter 4 - Description of the Environment: This section discussing the
relevant physical, biological, and socioeconomic features that may be affected by
the proposed project.
 Chapter 5 - Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures:
This section presents the environmental assessment of likely positive and
adverse impacts attributed to the proposed project and concomitant mitigation
measures.
 Chapter 6 - Climate Change Risk Assessment: This section provides an
analysis of climate change impacts and risks due to the implementation of
proposed project.
9
 Chapter 7 - Analysis of Alternatives: This section covers analysis of various

alternatives considered to minimise the overall impacts of proposed development
and suggest most appropriate alternatives based of detailed analysis of impact
and risk associated with each alternative.
 Chapter 8 – Consultation, Information Disclosure, and Grievance Redress
Mechanism: This section describes the consultation process undertaken during
the environmental examination and its results, their consideration in the project
design, and manner of compliance to the ADB’s Publication Policy and related
national laws. It is also describing the formal and informal redress procedures for
registering, resolving, and reporting complaints.
 Chapter 9 - Environmental Management Plan and Institutional
Arrangement: This section discussing the lessons from the impact assessment
and translated into action plans to avoid, reduce, mitigate or compensate
adverse impacts and reinforces beneficial impacts. This plan is divided into three
sub-sections; mitigation, monitoring, and implementation arrangements.
 Chapter 10 - Conclusion and Recommendation: This section stating whether
there is a need for any further detailed specific studies/assessments and
highlights key findings and recommendations to be implemented by the borrower.
10
II. POLICY, LEGAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORKS
22. India has well defined institutional and legislative framework. The legislation covers all
components of environment including air, water, soil, terrestrial and aquatic flora and fauna,
natural resources, and sensitive habitats. India is also a signatory to various international
conventions and protocols. The environmental legislations in India are framed to protect the
valued environmental components and comply with its commitment to international community
under relevant conventions and protocols. Asian Development Bank has also defined its
Environmental and Social Safeguard policies under the Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS),
2009. This section summaries the following:
 National (India) Environmental Legislation and Legal Administrative Framework,
 Social Safeguard Regulatory Requirements,
 ADB safeguard policies and categorisation of the project,
 Summary of international treaties and applicability to the project
A. National (India) Environmental Policy Framework
23. The legal framework of the country consists of several acts, notifications, rules and
regulations to protect environment and wildlife. In 1976, the 42nd Constitutional Amendment
created Article 48A and 51A, placing an obligation on every citizen of the country to attempt to
conserve the environment. The national legislations are broadly divided under following
categories:
 Environmental Protection,
 Forests Conservation, and
 Wild Life Protection.
24. The umbrella legislation under each of above category is highlighted below:
 The Environment (Protection) Act 1986 was enacted with the objective of
providing for the protection and improvement of the environment. It empowers
the Central Government to establish authorities charged with the mandate of
preventing environmental pollution in all its forms and to tackle specific
environmental problems that are peculiar to different parts of the country. Various
rules are framed under this Act for grant of environmental clearance for any
developmental project, resources conservation and waste management.
 The Forest (Conservation) Act 1980 was enacted to help conserve the
country's forests. It strictly restricts and regulates the de-reservation of forests or
use of forest land for non-forest purposes without the prior approval of Central
Government. To this end the Act lays down the pre-requisites for the diversion of
forest land for non-forest purposes.
 The Wildlife (Protection) Act 1972 amended 2003 was enacted with the
objective of effectively protecting the wildlife of the country and to control
poaching, smuggling and illegal trade of wildlife and its derivatives. It defines
rules for the protection of wildlife and ecologically important protected areas.
25. State Pollution Control Boards (SPCBs) together form the regulatory and administrative
core of the part. Other Ministries / Statutory Bodies / Departments responsible for ensuring
environmental compliance and granting various clearances includes state ministry/department
of environment, regional offices of MOEFCC and state forests/wildlife departments. Their key
roles and responsibilities and interface among them have been concisely depicted through the
flow diagram. The administrative framework defines the roles and responsibility of various
11
ministries and government departments at Central Level and State Level. The administrative
framework for environmental protection, forests conservation and wildlife protection is given at
Figure 4.
26. The environmental impact assessment requirement in India is based on the Environment
(Protection) Act, 1986, the Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2006 (amended
2009), all its related circulars; MOEFCC’s Environmental Impact Assessment Guidance Manual
for Highways 2010, and IRC Guidelines for Environmental Impacts Assessment (IRC:104-1988)
of highway projects. In addition to road and transport infrastructure development including
establishment of temporary workshops, construction camps, hot mix plants, and opening of
quarries for road/bridge construction work require to comply with provisions of The Forest
(Conservation) Act 1980 (Amended 1988) and Rules 1981 (Amended 2003): The Wildlife
(Protection) Act, 1972 (Amended 1993); The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
1972 (Amended 1988) and Rules 1974; The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981
(Amended 1987) and Rules 1982; The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000
(Amended 2002) and Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Trans-boundary
Movement) Rules 2008 (Amended 2009).
27. A review is undertaken for all the environmental rules and regulation which might be
applicable to the proposed bridge project. These legislations with applicability to this bridge
development project are summarized below in Table 3 and approval and monitoring framework
is depicted in Figure 5. There is no separate state level legislation. However various acts like
Water and Air are enforced through state level authority which is the State Pollution Control
Board (SPCB).
28. Specifically for the proposed Ganga bridge project, the following (Table 3) environmental
laws and regulations are applicable.
Table 3: Applicable Environmental National and State Requirements

Sl. Activity Statute Requirement Competent Responsible Time
No. Authority Agency for Required
Obtaining
Clearance
Planning Stage: Before start of Civil Works Construction (Responsibility: Executing
Agency)
1. Implementing Environment Environment State Level BSRDCL 6
Project Protection Act of al Clearance EIA months
1986, EIA Authority of
Notification 2006 Bihar
and amendments
2. Implementing Environment Tree cutting Conservator BSRDCL 6
Project in Protection Act of permit of Forest, months
Forest Area 1986, Forest Government
Conservation Act of Bihar
Construction Stage (Responsibility: Contractor)
3. Establishing Water Act of Consent-for- State The 2-3
stone 1974, Air Act of establishmen Pollution Contractor months
crusher, hot 1981, Noise t Control
mix plant, wet Rules of 2000 Board,
mix plant and and Environment Bihar
12

Obtaining
Clearance
Diesel Protection Act of
Generator 1986 and as
Sets amended
4. Operating Water Act of Consent-for- State The 2-3
stone 1974, Air Act of operation Pollution Contractor months
crusher, hot 1981, Noise Control
mix plant, wet Rules of 2000 Board,
mix plant and and Environment Bihar
Diesel Protection Act of
Generator 1986 and as
Sets amended
5. Use and India Explosive Explosive Chief The 2-3
storage of Act 1984 license for Controller of Contractor months
explosive for use and Explosives
quarry storage
blasting work
6. Storage of Manufacture Permission State The 2-3
fuel oil, storage and for storage of Pollution Contractor months
lubricants, Import of hazardous Control
diesel etc. at Hazardous chemical Board or
construction Chemical Rules Local
camp 1989 Authority
(DM/DC)
7. Quarry State Minor Quarry State The 2-3
operation Mineral Lease Deed Department Contractor months
Concession and Quarry of Mines
Rules, The License and
Mines Act of Geology
1952, Indian
Explosive Act of
1984, Air Act of
1981 and Water
Act of 1974
8. Extraction of Ground Water Permission State The 2-3
ground water Rules of 2002 for extraction Ground Contractor months
of ground Water
water for use Board
in road
construction
activities
9. Use of - Permission Irrigation The 2-3
surface water for use of Department Contractor months
for water for
construction construction
purpose
13

Obtaining
Clearance
10. Engagement Labour Act Labour Labour The 2-3
of labor license Commissioner Contractor months
29. In addition to the acts and regulations listed above the Environmental Impact
Assessment Guidance Manual for Highways 2010 issued by MOEFCC and the IRC Guidelines
for Environmental Impacts Assessment (IRC:104-1988) of highway projects issued by MORTH,
were referred in the process of preparing this EIA. The following requirements are particularly
important and need special attention in order to avoid any delays for a project:
i) Although bridges are exclusively not included in the list of projects requiring an
EIA as per EIA Notification 2006). However with recent judgment passed by
National Green Tribunal (NGT), bridges with built up area ≥ 20000 sq.m. would
be considered as building projects and would fall under Schedule 8(b) of
Environment Impact Assessment Notification, 2006, relating to buildings,
construction and development projects which are mandated to get prior
environmental clearance. Since the built up area of proposed 6-lane bridge is ≥
20000 sq.m. an environmental clearance was required from SEIAA. BSRDCL
recived the environmental clearance in January 2016 (see annex 14).
ii) Placement of hot-mix plants, quarrying and crushers, batch mixing Cutting of
trees from non-forest land require a tree cutting permit from the local forestry
department. All trees cut under a project must be compensated by compensatory
afforestation as required by the State Forest Department.
iii) Plants, discharge of sewage from construction camps requires No Objection

Certificate (Consent to Establish and Consent to Operate) from State Pollution
Control Board prior to establishment.
30. Before the start of civil works for the any part of the project, BSRDCL (as project
proponent) must obtain necessary permits/clearances from the respective statutory authorities.
Procedures and steps to be followed to obtain various permits/ clearances under the project are
presented in Table 3.
B. Social Regulatory Requirements of India and State
31. There are many rules and regulations framed by the Government of India for the
protection of workers. Most of these legislations will be applicable to contractors in charge of
construction. BSRDCL will ensure compliance to these social legislations through contractual
obligation and regular checks & penalties. These legislations include The Building and Other
Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1996; Child
Labour (prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986; Minimum Wages Act, 1948; Workmen
Compensation Act, 1923; Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972; Employee State Insurance Act;
Employees P.F. and Miscellaneous Provision Act, 1952; Maternity Benefit Act, 1951; Payment
of Wages Act, 1936; Equal Remuneration Act, 1979; Inter-State Migrant Workmen’s (Regulation
of Employment & Conditions of Service) Act, 1979; Equal Remuneration Act, 1979 etc.
C. International Treaties and Relevance to the Project

14
32. Government of India has signed many international treaties. GOI has also framed
various laws, regulations and guidelines to meet country’s obligations under these treaties. The
projects of this magnitude may contribute in meeting country’s obligation directly or indirectly. A
screening was carried out of these treaties regarding its applicability to this project. Outcome of
these treaties. The relevant International Treaties are:
 Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate

Change (Rectified by India in 1997): The Kyoto Protocol is an international
agreement linked to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate
Change. The major feature of the Kyoto Protocol is that it sets binding targets for
37 industrialized countries and the European community for reducing
greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. This amount to an average of five per cent
against 1990 levels over the five-year period 2008-2012.
 Convention Concerning the Protection of the World Cultural and Natural

Heritage (Rectified by India in 1972): The most significant feature of the 1972
World Heritage Convention is that it links together in a single document the
concepts of nature conservation and the preservation of cultural properties. The
Convention recognizes the way in which people interact with nature, and the
fundamental need to preserve the balance between the two.
 Convention on Biological Diversity (Rectified by India in 1994): It is an

international treaty which considered as a key document for “sustainable
development”. This entered into force in 1993 to develop national strategies for
the conservation and sustainable use of biological diversity. It has 3 major goals
i.e. (1) conservation of biodiversity (2) sustainable use of its components; and (3)
fair and equitable sharing of benefits arising from genetic resources. As an
impact of this convention, the year “2010” was considered as “International Year
of Biodiversity”.
 Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna

and Flora (CITES) (Rectified by India in 1976) - It is a multilateral treaty to
protect endangered plants and animals which is also known as “Washington
Convention”. It was opened for signature in 1973, and entered into force in 1975,
in order to ensure that international trade in specimens of wild animals and plants
does not threaten the survival of the species in the wild. This treaty protects
about 5,000 species of animals and 29,000 species of plants by listing them in 3
specific “appendices” namely “Appendix I”, “Appendix II” and “Appendix III”.
 Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals

(CMS) (India is signatory since 1983): This treaty is also known as “Bonn
convention”. It aims to conserve terrestrial, marine and avian migratory species
throughout their range. This having 119 parties and the depository is the
government of the Federal Republic of Germany. This treaty facilitates the
cooperation of different countries to protect the migratory species. There are 176
threatened migratory species are conserved under this treaty.
 Ramsar Convention on Wetlands of International Importance (Ratified by

India in 1982): It is an international treaty for the conservation and sustainable
utilization of wetlands by recognizing the fundamental ecological functions of
15
wetlands and their economic, cultural, scientific, and recreational value. It was
signed in 1971 and came into force in 1975. Currently, The Ramsar List of
Wetlands of International Importance (Ramsar Sites) includes 2,122 sites having
an area of 507,470,800 acres.
D. ADB Safeguard Policy Statement Requirements
33. The Asian Development Bank has defined its Safeguard requirements under its
‘Safeguard Policy Statement 2009 (SPS 2009). The prime objectives of safeguard policy are to:
(i) avoid adverse impacts of projects on the environment and affected people, where possible;
and (ii) minimize, mitigate, and/or compensate for adverse project impacts on the environment
and affected people when avoidance is not possible. This policy requires assessment,
mitigation and commitment towards environmental protection. The extent of assessment
depends on the category of the project. ADB’s SPS 2009 classify a project depending on
following three categories.
 Category A: A proposed project is classified as category A if it is likely to have
significant adverse environmental impacts that are irreversible, diverse, or
unprecedented. These impacts may affect an area larger than the sites or
facilities subject to physical works. An environmental impact assessment is
required.
 Category B: A proposed project is classified as category B if its potential
adverse environmental impacts are less adverse than those of category A
projects. These impacts are site-specific, none or very few of them are
irreversible, and in most cases mitigation measures can be designed more
readily than for category A projects. An initial environmental examination is
required.
 Category C: A proposed project is classified as category C if it is likely to have
minimal or no adverse environmental impacts. No environmental assessment is
required although environmental implications need to be reviewed.
16
MOEFCC
(Nodal agency at central lelvel for developing legislation and granting environmental clearance for the projects
categorized as Category "A" as per EIA Notification)
STATE MINISTRY
/DEPT. OF
ENVIRONMENT State Dept. of
Regional Office
(State level CPCB Forest/Wildlife
implementation (Monitoring body to
(Technical advisory (Monitoring body to
agency for reveiw the
bofy of MOEF and reveiw the
environmental compliance of the
Watch Dog for SPCB compliance of the
project approved by
legislations and activities ) project approved by
formulation of MOEF/SEIAA)
MOEF/SEIAA)
legislation at State
Level )
SPCB
SEIAA
(State level (Enforcing body
for environmental Protected Area
agency for Office/Divisional
granting rules and
regulations of Consents/ Forest Office
Environmental
Clearance for centrl and state Approvals
category 'B' level & also

Projects) advisory body for Compliance
State Ministry) Reporting
Compliance
Consents Reporting
Compliance
Reporting
Approvals Project
Proponent
Figure 4: Environmental Legal Administrative Framework in India

17
Figure 5: Environmental Clearance Process in India
34. Key Steps in EC Process:
1) Submission of application along with Form-I, Pre-feasibility report and other

necessary documents to Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change
(MOEFCC) or State Environmental Appraisal Committee (SEAC)
2) Presentation of Terms of Reference (TOR) to MOEFCC or SEAC
3) Obtaining TOR from MOEFCC or SEAC
4) Preparation & submission of Draft Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)/
Environmental Management Plan (EMP)
5) Conducting Public Hearing
6) Preparation of revised EIA/EMP (as per comment of Public Hearing)
7) Preparation & submission of Final EIA to MOEFCC or SEAC along with Stage 1
forest clearance.
8) Final presentation to MOEFCC or SEAC.
9) Obtaining Environmental Clearance.
18
Table 4: Key Steps in Tree Cutting Permission Process:

Step No. Activity No. of Days
Preparation of case / application letter to the Revenue and Forest
1 7
Department for felling of trees falling within the Right of Way
Area to be cleared of trees is verified on the ground with the help of
2
Revenue Department
30
Joint visit by Executive Engineer, DFO and Revenue Department staff for
3
the verification of the land and trees falling within the ROW
Enumeration of trees by Forest Department after the visit of Forest Guard
and Range Officer (both from Forest Department). The details cover
4 7
number of trees to be cut along with chainage, species and girth
information.
List of trees to be cut is forwarded by the Range Officer to the concerned
5 15
DFO for approval
The combined case paper is prepared by enclosing the documents
6 received from Revenue and Forest Department (as prepared in the steps 7
mentioned above).
Case is submitted to the concerned DFO – the DFO Office examines the
7 case and if there are no observations, sends it to the Conservator of 7
Forests (CF)
The CF office will examine the case and if there are no observations, will
8 7
approve the felling proposal.
The approval from CF office is conveyed to the concerned DFO, who
9 2
further conveys the final sanction (in writing) to Executive Engineer.
DFO further directs the concerned Range Officer (Forest Department) to
10 1
mark (process is formally known as ‘hammering’) the trees for cutting.
Range Officer hammers/ marks the trees in presence of Executive
11 10
Engineer or his field representative.
The Range Officer sends the final list of trees to the concerned DFO for
12 1
information.
DFO forwards the case to Forest Corporation to call ‘tender’ for cutting the
13 3
marked trees.
DM Forest Corporation calls for bids and fixes date/s to receive the
14 30
tenders.
After opening of the tenders and their evaluation, tree cutting work is
15 15
awarded to the selected contractor.
16 Contractor mobilizes the required labor and machinery at site. 15
17 Contractor cuts the trees 30
Total Number of Days (numbers indicate ideal situations) 187
19
III. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. Type of Project
35. The proposed project is a greenfield project aimed at development of connectivity

between Patna and Vaishali district through construction of a 6-lane road bridge across river
Ganges. The proposed bridge will take off from Kacchi Dargah (from NH-30) at a distance of
about 18 kilometers from Patna Railway station and it will terminate at Bidupur (at NH-103) in
Vaishali to provide an alternative to the Mahatma Gandhi Setu and reduce the travel time,
overcome traffic congestion, provide smooth connectivity. The rational for the proposed project
is provided Section B of Chapter 1. Summary of project is provided in Table 5.
Table 5: Details of the Project

Project Total Road
Name of the Project Districts State
Components Length (km)
Construction of a new six-lane  Main bridge 22.76 Patna Bihar
suspension type bridge across  Viaducts and
Ganges River from Deedargunj  Approach Roads Vaishali
on NH-30 to Chak Sikandar in  Toll gates and
Vaishali district on NH-103 service facilities.
B. Location and Features of the Proposed Project
36. The site chosen for the proposed 6-lane facility, situated east of the Patna city in the
State of Bihar. It lies between NH-30 (near Kacchi Dargah in Patna District) and NH-103 (near
Bidupur in Vaishali district). The proposed bridge travers between 25034’2.24” N, 85015’7.86” E
(Kachhi Dargah) to 25041’17.82” N, 85022’49.65” E (Bidupur) at an elevation of approximate 53
meter above mean sea level. The new bridge will be located about 10 kilometers downstream
(east) from the existing bridge (Mahatma Gandhi Setu) to help decongest Patna and to provide
all weather connectivity for communities living in Raghopur Diara (river island) situated between
two streams of the Ganges river. The Raghopur diara, has a very high potential for
development as a futuristic satellite town of Patna. However, the diara is prone to seasonal
flooding but remains inhabited and cultivated during most part of the year. There is only one
seasonal road link (pontoon bridge) connecting it to Patna apart from boats.
37. The alignment of the proposed bridge spans over the entire width of the Ganges River
including the river island, and connect with national highways on both sides of banks, improving
connectivity and substantially reducing travel time between Patna and its surrounding areas.
The approved alignment of the proposed project is shown in Figure 6 (on Google earth image)
and Figure 7 (on Survey of India Topographic Map).
38. Surrounded by the Ganges on all sides, Raghopur consists mainly of alluvial soil. Every
year this area gets submerged by water due to flood by the Ganges. This has been helpful to
Raghopur in way that flood also brings new layer of soil that makes this area fertile. Nearest
town to Raghopur is Patna and Hajipur. There is only one road link through a pontoon bridge
that connects it to Patna city. Apart from that Boat is majorly used to reach here.
20
Figure 6: Location Map of the Project Site on Google earth Image
Figure 7: Location of the Project Site on SOI Topographic Map

21
C. Engineering Surveys and Investigations
39. Following surveys and investigations had been carried out (as part of feasibility study)
for collection of data and evolve the design for main bridge, approach roads and associated
project facilities:
 topographic surveys;
 traffic surveys;
 hydrological studies;
 geotechnical and geomorphological investigations; and
 existing utilities surveys.
40. These surveys had been carried out in accordance with the guidelines in IRC:SP:19 to
fulfil requirement in the TOR. Findings of these surveys / investigations are incorporated in the
feasibility report.
D. Projected Traffic for the Design
41. Projected traffic on the proposed bridge is presented in Table 6. It can be seen from the
table that the projected average daily traffic (ADT) and passenger car unit (PCU) traffic is
expected to increase from 22,392 and 38,975 in 2013 to 151,660 and 274,872 by 2037,
respectively. About 30% of total traffic is 2 and 3 wheel vehicles and another 30% for trucks.
42. Seasonal traffic variation across the bridge range from 78% to 113% of the annual
average with lowest in the month of September and highest in month of April. Daily pattern
reveals traffic starts to increase as early as 3 AM and peaks between 7 to 8 AM, slightly dips
between 10-1 PM. And then peaks again from 2-4 PM. Traffic then starts to ebb and reaches
lowest level between 6 PM-10 PM.
Table 6. Projected Traffic for the Project

Year 2-W 3-W Car/ Bus LCV Truck Tractor Fast All Slow Total
Taxi/ (Car+ Fast Vehi
Jeep Bus+ Vehicl cles
Truck) es
Mini Full No. PCU
2022 12100 6592 12428 117 3008 4310 15801 425 35664 54782 254 55035 96625
2027 17779 9686 18260 172 4420 6632 24312 425 53796 81686 254 81940 145222
2032 23792 12962 24437 230 5915 9302 34098 425 73982 111161 254 111415 199641
2037 31839 17346 32702 308 7915 13046 47825 425 101796 151407 254 151660 274872
E. Components of the Project
43. The project consists of the following key components:

a) Main 6-Lane Bridge (9.76km long) over river Ganga and transition structures
(Bridge End Viaducts) traverses between Kachhi Dargah (NH-30) to Bidupur
(NH-103) in Vaishali district of Bihar. The project length will be about 22.76 km.
b) Roadways-
i) Main Bridge Approach Embankments and Viaducts with 6 lane divided
carriageway, configuration as per IRC Standard.
ii) Connecting road to Diara portion is a 4-lane divided carriageway
configuration as per IRC standard.
22
c) Approach Roads including viaducts (about 1.5km at Kachhi Dargah – South Side
and 8.5 km at Bidupur – North Side) and associated structures,
d) Widening of 3km of existing road NH103 on the southern side
e) Two ROB,
f) Eight underpasses and bridges,
g) Two junctions;
h) Two Toll Plazas;
i) Associated service facilities.
44. Detail of each component along with conceptual plans is presented in subsequent
sections. General arrangement drawing (GAD) of the proposed bridge and foundations is
shown in Figure 8 and 9 respectively.
23
Figure 8: General Arrangement Drawing of Proposed Bridge

24
Figure 9: Cross Section Detail of Proposed bridge and Foundation

25
F. Proposed Alignment and Conceptual Plan of Project Components
45. The proposed alignment and conceptual plan of the project including approach road is
shown in Figure 10.
Figure 10: Proposed Road Alignment of the Bihar New Ganga Bridge and Approach
Roads
46. The entire alignment can be divided into eleven sections as discussed in following
sections:
a. Section 1: take-off at the intersection of Patna-Bakhtiyarpur (diverted NH-30)
roads (see Figure 11). This will require the modification and widening of the
Patna-Bakhtiyarpur and allow traffic to join and exit the western carriageway of
the project going towards Bidupur. The modifications include approach ramps
and an underpass.
Figure 11: Section 1: Conceptual Plan of the Project Start Point Intersection of
Patna-Bakhtiyarpur(diverted NH-30)
26
b. Section 2: Rail-over-Bridge, 6-lane facility across the Patna - Mokama Main line
(see Figure 12) with a with a minimum span of 36m covering the railway's right of
way and having vertical clearance 6.25m between Rail top level and bottom of
ROB.
Figure 12. Section 2: Conceptual Plan of the Rail-Over-Bridge across Patna -

Mokama Main line
c. Section 3: Old NH-30/Loknayak Ganga Path interchange - A 6-lane divided

facility arrangement at the existing NH-30 and proposed Ganga Path and will
continue to a viaduct towards Bidupur crossing over the old NH-30 through a 2-
lane road-over-bridge span approximately (Figure 13).
Figure 13. Section 3: Conceptual Plan of the Old NH-30/Loknayak Ganga Path
Interchange
27
d. Section 4: Bakhtiyarpur-Patna Toll Post – a 12-lane toll facility with 6 lane truck
posts equipped with weight bridges has been proposed as shown in Figure 14.
Figure 14. Section 4: Conceptual Plan of the Bakhtiyarpur-Patna Toll Post
e. Section 5: Ganga Main Bridge – The proposed 6-lane facility across Ganga
(Main Bridge) starts from Chainage km 1/530 (tentative) at Kacchi Dargah near
Sabalpur village and ends at Chainage km11/030 (tentative) on Bidupur end near
Gopalpur ghat, with total length of almost 9,500m (Figure 15). The proposed
bridge alignment crosses the south channel of Ganga and passes over
Rustampur, Himmatpur diara, Jamalpur, Jafrabad dih, Saifabad, Karampur
villages on Raghopur Diara and again crosses the north channel of river Ganga.
Two small channels are spanned across on the diara at ch. Km 2/740 and Km
5/725. The alignment and bridging design were selected considering the
vulnerability of the diara to flooding, erosion and scouring. The two independent
main bridges over South bank and North bank with high level embankment in
the diara with openings for cross drainage, vehicular, pedestrian, cattle crossings
and minor streams. Navigational requirement of about 125m complies with the
IWAI (Class VII type river) minimum requirement of 100m for horizontal
clearance between piers and vertical clearance of 10m above HFL. Three types
of structural configurations will be evaluated by the EPC Contractor: i) Steel truss
super structure of 2 nos. 3-lane divided carriageway over RCC pier and deep
foundations, ii) Pre-stressed concrete super structure (balanced cantilever type)
2 nos. 3-lane divided carriageway over the RCC pier and deep foundations, iii)
An Extra-dosed type (PSC super structure) of six lane carriageway over the RCC
pier and deep foundations.
28
Figure 15. Section 5: Conceptual Plan of the Bihar New Ganga Main Bridge
f. Section 6: Connection with Raghopur Diara - Four lane ramps (viaduct) in each
direction connecting the diara to the 6-lane facility have been proposed as shown
in Figure 16.
Figure 16. Section 6: Conceptual Plan of the Raghopur Diara Access Ramps
g. Section 7: Beyond the North abutment – A 6-lane facility road structure will be
partially on viaduct above 6m height and thereafter on earthen
embankment/Retaining wall , with grade separation at crossing with Mehnar
Road.
29
h. Section 8: Junction Arrangement at Mehnar Road - Mehnar road intersection will

be raised to over pass the 6-lane facility. Existing Mehnar road will be
connected through two loops and four slip roads with the 6-lane facility to
provide free movement of traffic at the junction. Ramps will provided to for
vehicles going to Hajipur, Mehnar, and NH-103. The conceptual plan of
proposed arrangement is show in Figure 17.
Figure 17. Section 8: Conceptual Plan of the Junction Arrangement at

Mehnar Road
i. Section 9: Arrangement between Mehnar Junction and Chak Sikander Railway

Station- 6-lane facility shall be taken on embankment/retaining wall between
Mehnar Junction and Chak Sikander Railway Station with provisions of
openings for cross drainage, vehicular, pedestrian, cattle crossings, minor
streams and major bridge across Ganga River.
j. Section 10: Arrangement of 6-lane facility across Hajipur to Samastipur Main

line (ROB) - The 6-lane facility shall cross the Hajipur to Samastipur Main
through a 6-lane Road Over Bridge (ROB) with a minimum span of 36m covering
the Railway's right of way and having vertical clearance 6.25m between Rail top
level and bottom of ROB. The conceptual plan of proposed arrangement is show
in Figure 18.
30
Figure 18. Section 10: Conceptual Plan of the Arrangement of 6-lane facility
across Hajipur to Samastipur Main line (ROB)
k. Section 11: Arrangement between Chak Sikander Railway Station, NH-103 &
Gazipur Chowk (End Point) - The 6-lane facility will finally join NH-103 near Chak
Sikander on embankment. From this point onwards to its junction with the
proposed Tazpur-Vaishali road, the NH-103 will be widened to 6 lane width
including at grade junction arrangement at Chak Sikander and Gazipur Chowk
(end point). Figure 19 show the conceptual plan of proposed arrangement.
Figure 19. Section 11: Conceptual Plan of the Arrangement between Chak
Sikander Railway Station, NH-103 & Gazipur Chowk (End Point)
31
l. Other Associated Facilities: Some more road widening and road diversion
works will be needed to disperse the traffic. The road from junction of 6-lane
facility on NH-103 to Paswan Chowk (on NH-19) will require to be widened to 4
lane width over a length of nearly16 km. A bypass to Paswan Chowk and
Ramashish Chowk may be provided for dissipating traffic coming from 6-
lane facility on NH-103. This will also facilitate free flow of traffic between Patna
and Muzaffarpur avoiding congested Ramashish Chowk. These improvements
will take place outside the project’s scope but will be considered as associated
facilities.
G. Cost of the Project and Implementation Arrangement
47. The total cost of the project including main bridge, approaches (viaduct, embankments),
ramps and connections to diara connection, along with ROBs near Banka Ghat and Chak
Sikander Railway stations have been worked out under different heads as shown in Table 6.
The total cost of the project works out to INR 5000 crores (USD 832 million). This cost does not
include: i) planning, detailed design, administration, PMC; ii) protection works/guide bunds; iii)
geological and geo-technical investigations prior to construction; iv) environmental mitigation
measures; v) land acquisition; vi) toll plaza and road furniture; and vii) taxes.
48. The project will be implemented under EPC contract modality.

32
IV. DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
49. In order to assess the impacts of the proposed improvement to the project road, field
visits were made undertaken by the Consultants to understand environmental profile of the
project influence area. This involved field inspections at all the sensitive locations, collection of
secondary information for all the environmental components and discussions with the officials,
NGO’s and local populace. The profile presented below comprises of the following:
 Physical environmental components such as meteorology, geology, topography,

soil characteristics, air quality, surface and sub-surface water quality;
 Biological environmental components such as aquatic, biotic and marine flora,
fauna and mammals, and
 Land environment in terms of land use, soil composition.
A. Physical Environment
A. Climate and Meteorology
50. Seasons and temperature range. The project area has humid subtropical climate with
extremely hot summers from March to mid-June, monsoons from mid-July to late September
and chilly winter nights, foggy or sunny days from November to February. The highest recorded
temperature is 46.6 degree celsius (°C) and the lowest is 2.3°C. The temperature during the
summer season ranges between 18°C and 32°C and between 9°C and 29°C during the winter
season. The average annual rainfall is 1130 mm. There is heavy rainfall in the months of July,
August and September. During the other months of the year there is little or no rainfall. (Source:
Indian Meteorology Department, Patna).
51. Meteorological data of the study area was collected for the winter months of December
2014 and January 2015. The minimum average temperature recorded during the study period
was 17°C and 8°C in December 2014 and January 2015. The maximum temperatures recorded
were 29°C and 18°C in December 2014 and January 2015 and December 2014 respectively.
The overall average ambient temperature during the period was 18°C. Figure 20 show the
average maximum and minimum temperature in Patna.
Figure 20: Average Temperature (0C) Graph for Patna based on 2000 to 2012 Data
33
52. Relative humidity. The minimum average relative humidity recorded during the study
period was 84% and the maximum was 100%. The overall average relative humidity was 83%
during the study period.
53. Rainfall. The recorded annual average rainfall in the Patna district during 2009 – 2013
was 922 ± 150mm. Most of the rainfall was observed in August-September and least in
November-December. During the last five years, the highest rainfall recorded was 1162mm in
2011. The district level rainfall data of last five year of Patna district is presented in Figure 21.
(Source: Indian Meteorology Department (IMD) Patna).

Figure 21: Five year Average Rainfall Data of Patna
54. Atmospheric Pressure. The daily averaged atmospheric pressure level during study
period was 1016hPa ± 3hPa.
55. Wind Speed and Pattern. The daily averaged wind speed was 5 km/hr ± 3 km/hr. The
winds were predominantly observed blowing from W followed by WNE and NW. The calm hours
observed were 35%. The wind rose diagram of the project area is presented in Figure 22.
Figure 22: Wind rose Diagram of the Project Area. June, 2013
34
B. Topography and Geology
56. Topography. The project is located in the state of Bihar in Northern India near the city
of Patna, which is the capital city of the state. The proposed bridge site lies between
20032’53.99” N, 85016’41.89” E (Kachhi Dargah) to 25041’17.82” N, 85022’49.65” E (Bidupur).
The new bridge will be located about 10 kilometers downstream (east) from the existing bridge
(Mahatma Gandhi Setu). The topography in the proposed project area in mainly plain as shown
in Figure 23 to Figure 27 sectionwise. The project area forms a part of the Ganga river basin
which covers an area of over 1 million sq. km forming one of the largest drainage basins in the
world. The project area is made up of flat alluvial plains with an average elevation of
approximately 53 m above m.s.l.
57. The topography of the region can be sub-divided into two prominent natural features
comprising: i) a narrow strip of somewhat high land about 8 km in width along the Southern
bank of the Ganges having very fertile soil & alluvial fertile plains in the remaining portions.
Patna does not contain any hilly region. It has an entirely alluvial and flat region; and ii) Patna is
located on the south bank of the Ganga River. The town is situated at an altitude of 48 -51 m
above mean sea level. A characteristic of the geography of Patna is its confluence of five rivers
in its vicinity. The Ganga River being the largest and the other being Ghaghara, Gandak,
Punpun and Sone. Patna is unique in having.
Figure 23: Topography of Project Area – Section 1

35

36

37
58. The land in the project area is highly fertile. The district is devoid of any forest wealth of
consequence. The alluvial text of land yields rice, sugarcane and other food grains. The Ganga
river which is about 2,525 km long originates from the Himalayan mountains (at an elevation of
7010m) and glaciers in the north Indian state of Uttarakhand. The river passes through 4 states
in India and flows into Bangladesh. The river crosses over from West Bengal state of India into
Bangladesh where it is then called the Padma river. In Bangladesh as the river flows in a south
– easterly direction it is joined by the Jamuna river. Ultimately it becomes the Meghna river
which flows into the Bay of Bengal.
59. Geology. The project area is underlain by unconsolidated formation, which is

quarternary to upper quarternary of age group. (Figure 28). Lithologically, the project area is
made up of recent alluvium, clay, silt, sand, and gravel pebbles with concentration of calcareous
materials.
60. The project area is part of the Indo-Gangetic alluvium, one of the three main
physiographic divisions of India, which separates Extra-Peninsular regions on the north from the
peninsular region on the south. The level plain is known to be the outcome of a granular filling
of a great depression with alluvial sediments since Middle Pleistocene times. This forming a
part of the flood plains of the Ganga has a monotonously flat relief. The area under study is
underlain by alluvial sediments of quaternary age. The quaternary sediments are deposited
unconformable on the Achaean basement. Quaternary Alluvial deposit consisting of alternate
layers of sand, silt, clay and gravel forms prolific unconfined and confined aquifer system. The
unconfined aquifer system consists of sand layers with parting of thin clay layers upto a depth of
60-70 m. The clay layers at shallow depth are not regionally extensive as such the entire
sequence behaves as unconfined aquifer system. The transmissivity of the aquifer varies from
1000 to 5000 m2/day. The specific yield varies between 8-12%. The movement of ground water
is in south-east direction towards the river Ganga. The aquifer is highly potential with an
estimated yield of 50- 100 m3.
Source: State of Environment Report for Bihar, 2007

Figure 28: Geological Map of Bihar and Project Area
38
C. Physiography and Soil
61. Physiography: Physiographically, India is divided into seven major divisions: (1)
Northern Mountains, (2) Great Plains (3) Central Highlands (4) Peninsular Plateaus, (5) East
Coast, (6) West Coast and (7) Islands.
62. The Ganga basin falls entirely within the first three divisions (Figure 29). Northern
Mountains comprises the Himalayan ranges including their foothills. The Gangetic plains,
situated between the Himalayas and the Deccan plateau, constitute the most fertile plains of the
sub-basin ideally suited for intensive cultivation. The Central highlands lying to the south of the
Great plains consists of mountains, hills and plateaus intersected by valleys and river plains.
They are largely covered by forests. Aravali uplands, Bundelkhand upland, Malwa plateau,
Vindhyan ranges and Narmada valley lie in this region.
63. The project area for proposed 6-lane bridge near Patna falls under active alluvial plain
i.e. landform created by deposition of sediment over a long period of time by river coming from
highland regions.
Figure 29: Physiographic Map of Project Area
64. Soils: Predominant soil types found in the gangatic sub-basin are sandy, loamy, clay
and their combinations such as sandy loam, loam, silty clay loam and loamy sand soils. Soils in
the project area are mostly active alluvial plain i.e. landform created by deposition of sediment
over a long period of time by river coming from highland regions. Among the soil types within
Ganga basin, the alluvial soil covers more than 52 per cent of the basin. The Patna district has
mainly four types of soils ranging from moderately well drained to poorly drained, acidic to
slightly alkaline and medium to heavy textured.
39
65. The project areas within Patna river basin is characterized by calcareous alluvial (slightly
alkaline). This shows that the alluvium deposit in this region is old alluvium deposit. In general
the calcareous alluvium has higher potential of binding of molecules than the newer alluvium or
acidic alluvium and hence the chance of erosion in calcareous alluvium is comparatively lesser
than acidic alluvium. The deltaic fill material ranges in size from clays to medium sands, all of
which are susceptible to erosion. The percentage of phosphorus is higher in this region. This
soil is richer in lime content and kanker than Balsundari soil. This forms the typical paddy land
of the project region.
66. Figure 30 present the soil profile of the region and project area in particular.
Figure 30: Soil Map of the State and Project Area2
67. Soil Quality: Four soil samples (each during dry and wet seasons) were collected from
the project area (see annex 13) and analyzed for its physical and chemical properties.
Characterizations of soil samples was performed by adopting methods prescribed under
relevant parts of IS: 2720, “Indian Standard Methods of Test for Soils”. The results of the
analysis are presented in Table 7 (dry season) and Table 8 (wet season).
68. It can be seen from the table that soils in the project are in slightly alkaline in nature with
pH value ranging from 7.0 to 8.1. Maximum Potassium content found was 300 mg/kg in
2
Source: State of Environment Report (2007) for Bihar published by the Bihar State Pollution Control
Board.
40
Didargang area whereas maximum phosphorous content of 36.08 mg/kg was also recorded at
Didargang area. Maximum calcium content of 2823 mg/kg was found in Kalyanpur area. The
sand and clay contents of the soils in the region is ranging from 35.85 to 51.15 to 34.35 to 51.20
respectively during dry season. There are no significant changes observed in the soil quality of
study area during dry and wet seasons except minor changes in sand - silt clay ratio which may
be due to soil erosion during wet season.
41
Table 7: Soil Quality in the Project Area (Dry Season)

Sl. Kalyanpur Madhurpur Saifabad (Diara Area) Didarganj
Parameter Unit
No. 5/1/2015 14/2/2015 7/2/2015 12/1/2015 18/1/2015 19/2/2015 25/1/2015 21/2/2015
1. pH (1:5 suspension) - 7.29 7.55 7.25 7.98 6.97 7.1 7.96 8.1
2. Electrical Conductivity at
O µmhos/cm 150 115 155 109 150.0 155.00 128.0 125.0
25 C (1:5suspension.)
3
3. Bulk Density gm /cm 1.28 1.35 1.26 1.32 1.19 1.05 1.16 1.23
4. Magnesium(as Mg) mg/kg 369.0 140.50 370 149.01 503.10 510 796.0 800
5. Sodium(as Na) mg/kg 246.14 125 250 127.0 168.86 170.65 192.0 198
6. Sand % by mass 50.48 42.50 51.15 41.27 39.49 40.09 36.78 35.85
7. Clay % by mass 34.25 48.32 35.20 49.41 47.81 49.20 50.35 51.20
8. Silt % by mass 15.27 9.18 13.65 10.32 12.7 10.71 12.87 12.95
9. Nitrogen mg/1000g 0.076 0.080 0.073 0.072 0.067 0.062 0.071 0.075
10. Potassium (as K) mg/1000g 123.0 168.0 125.0 170.0 232.00 250.00 286.0 300.0
11. Phosphorus mg/1000g 30.41 27.40 31.55 28.07 31.84 32.20 34.02 36.04
12. Organic Matter %by mass 0.57 0.72 0.60 0.70 0.82 0.79 0.72 0.69
13. Water Holding Capacity %by mass 31.68 30.2 30.25 28.70 32.85 35.23 35.10 33.26
14. Infiltration Rate mm/hr 20.8 23.0 22.1 19.0 15.0 16.1 19.0 18.25
15. Calcium mg/1000g 2725.0 2500 2823 2413.0 2589.0 2525 2024.0 2127
16. Sodium Absorption
Meq/100gm 0.23 0.19 0.20 0.21 0.24 0.298 0.23 0.22
ratio(SAR)
17. Exchangeable Sodium
- 3.24 4.21 3.29 4.28 5.04 5.12 3.58 3.64
Percentage
18. Porosity %by mass 28.57 26.30 30.25 28.70 32.00 30.25 32.02 33.10
19. Available Sulphur (as S) mg/1000g 217.0 225 220.13 228 196 201 185.00 190
20. Available Manganese as
mg/1000g 3.30 4.36 3.42 4.34 5.02 5.10 2.46 2.52
(Mn)
21. Available Iron as (Fe) mg/1000g 5.00 7.1 5.1 6.96 5.67 6.2 4.86 4.95
Source: Field testing and analysis carried out as part of EIA study.
42
Table 8: Soil Quality in the Project Area (Wet Season)

Sl. Kalyanpur Madhurpur Saifabad (Diara Area) Didarganj
Parameter Unit
No. 24/7/2015 12/8/2015 24/7/2015 12/8/2015 26/7/2015 14/8/2015 26/7/2015 14/8/2015
1. pH (1:5 suspension) - 7.10 7.15 7.60 7.44 7.10 7.34 7.46 7.52
2. Electrical Conductivity at
O µmhos/cm 146 148 104 112 136.00 142.00 124.00 121.00
25 C (1:5suspension.)
3
3. Bulk Density gm /cm 1.15 1.20 1.26 1.30 1.21 1.22 1.17 1.20
4. Magnesium(as Mg) mg/kg 324.0 344 146.70 134.40 482.10 480.70 768.0 792.70
5. Sodium(as Na) mg/kg 242.10 236.18 124.80 123.60 165.11 168.23 184.37 192.10
6. Sand % by mass 52.40 54.30 44.50 45.60 42.22 43.12 37.91 36.22
7. Clay % by mass 35.10 36.20 48.30 47.35 45.22 48.10 47.25 48.30
8. Silt % by mass 12.50 9.5 7.2 7.05 12.56 8.78 14.84 15.48
9. Nitrogen mg/1000g 0.051 0.061 0.052 0.065 0.062 0.065 0.051 0.060
10. Potassium (as K) mg/1000g 99.10 121.0 160.0 164.0 221.00 220.00 236.0 285.0
11. Phosphorus mg/1000g 20.51 28.22 26.10 25.40 30.22 31.41 32.21 34.22
12. Organic Matter %by mass 0.70 0.68 0.76 0.79 0.91 0.84 0.76 0.84
13. Water Holding Capacity %by mass 28.56 29.20 27.30 29.50 30.10 32.44 31.40 30.22
14. Infiltration Rate mm/hr 20.10 24.50 21.30 24.50 16.50 18.20 20.10 19.20
15. Calcium mg/1000g 2670.0 2956 2376.0 2588 2476.0 2471 1976.0 2215
16. Sodium Absorption
Meq/100gm 0.24 0.26 0.20 0.18 0.22 0.31 0.20 0.21
ratio(SAR)
17. Exchangeable Sodium
- 3.44 3.50 4.21 4.20 4.89 4.55 3.41 3.55
Percentage
18. Porosity %by mass 30.50 32.30 30.10 28.50 34.10 32.76 35.02 34.21
19. Available Sulphur (as S) mg/1000g 212.0 218.0 224.10 221.0 174 195 167.00 181
20. Available Manganese as
mg/1000g 3.10 3.22 4.24 4.15 4.89 4.80 2.51 2.30
(Mn)
21. Available Iron as (Fe) mg/1000g 4.99 4.98 5.36 6.22 5.11 5.89 4.72 4.77
Source: Field testing and analysis carried out as part of EIA study.
43
D. Seismicity
69. The seismic zonation map of India (Bureau of Indian Standards map) is shown in Figure
31. It can be seen from the map that the entire Bihar state falls in Zones III, IV and V. The
project site of proposed 6-lane Ganga Bridge is situated in moderately stable zone which falls
under seismic zone IV (as per IS 1893 (Part-I): 2002) category.
Figure 31: Seismic Zonation Map of India and Project Region
E. Hydrology and Drainage
70. The project area falls under the Ganga river basin. Figure 32 present the drainage
pattern and river basin map of river ganges and the project area.
71. The major tributaries of Ganga in India include Yamuna, Ghaghara, Gandak and Kosi.
Chambal is one of the major tributaries of Yamua, which merges with Ganga at Prayag
(Allahabad). These tributaries and their watershed form the 16 major sub-basins of the Ganga
basin. Hoogly diverts from Ganga before Ganga enters Bangladesh.
44
72. The proposed site for the 6-lane bridge over river ganges is situated about 10 km
downstream of Patna city. The project area mostly falls under the river basin of Ganga and sub
basins of Punpun, Gandhak and Burhi-Gandak-Bagmati river basins. As per the local
observation, Ganga river near the project site is meandering to the left and during the summer
season.
73. The major sub-basin of Ganga in project area, Gandak- Burhi Gandak contributes mean
annual flow 58.967 BCM which is about 11.23 % of total tributaries.
Figure 32: Drainage Pattern and River Basin Map of Bihar and Project Region3
F. Land Use
74. Land use pattern in the project area has been analysed based on the data published by
various government agencies supplemented by data collected during field surveys and satellite
3
Source: State of Environment Report (2007) for Bihar published by the Bihar State Pollution Control
Board.
45
imaginary data obtained from authentic source. Figure 33 show the land use pattern of the
Bihar State as whole whereas Table 9 present the land use pattern in the project area.
75. It can be seen from the Table 9 that agriculture is the dominant land use in the State
with over 80% of the area is cultivable land followed by forest land which constitute about 7% of
the total area.
Table 9: Land use classification of Bihar State4

S. Category of Land use Area
No. (Unit in Lakh Ha.) (Unit in %)
Total Geographical Area 93.60 100
1 Forest 6.16 6.6
2 Barren and Non-Cultivable Land 4.37 4.7
3 Land put to Non-agricultural uses 16.38 17.5
4 Culturable wasteland 0.46 0.5
5 Permanent Pasture Grazing land 0.18 0.2
6 Miscellaneous crops & Grooved 2.31 2.5
7 Other fallow (2 to 5 tears) 1.39 1.5
8 Current fallow 5.67 6.1
9 Net area sown 56.68 60.6
10 Total cropped area 79.95 -
11 Area sown more than once 23.27 -
Figure 33: Land use pattern in Bihar State
76. The land use pattern within the corridor of influence of the proposed project is mostly
water bodies (river ganges) followed by agricultural land. Agricultural activities are being
practices along the proposed alignment of approach roads on both side of the bridge. Table 10
4
Source: State of Environment report 2007, Bihar State Pollution Control Board.
46
and Figure 34 present the land use pattern within project’s corridor of influence obtained based
on satellite imagery of 2012 of the project area. It can be seen that water bodies occupy about
61 % land area followed by agriculture and plantation which accounts to 31% and 5%
respectively.
Table 10: classification within Project Influence Area based on Satellite Imagery5
Sl. No. Land use Class % of the Study Area
1. Agriculture 30.55
2. Settlements area 02.45
3. Horticulture & Plantation 05.10
4. Land not used for agriculture 01.14
5. Water bodies (river/drain/pond/tank/well) 60.76
Total 100
Agriculture
31% Se lements area
Hor culture &

Planta on
61% Barran Land

5% 2%
Water bodies
1%
Figure 34: Distribution of Land use Pattern in Project Influence Area
G. Air Quality
77. Ambient air quality in the project area is quite pure compared to Patna main city where
emission level is reported higher side. There are no major industrial activities in the project area
however operation of brick kilns near proposed sites is leading to higher level of SPM. These
brick kilns, vehicular pollution and dust arising from unpaved surfaces are main sources of
pollution in the project area.
78. There is no secondary data available in the project area. Therefore in order to establish
the baseline for ambient air quality in the project area, air quality sampling has been carried out
for both winter/dry and wet seasons.
5
Source: Field surveys and setellite maps data for the project influece area of 10 km radius.
47
79. The baseline status of the ambient air-quality was assessed using a scientifically
designed ambient air-quality monitoring network. The design of this network was based on the
following:
 meteorological conditions;
 the assumed regional influences
on background air quality;
 the areas where impact would
most likely be greatest;
 present land use along the
proposed alignment; and
 traffic congestion points.
80. To establish the baseline ambient air

quality, Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM)
stations were set up at four locations
representing various sensitive locations as
indicated in Table 11 (Image 1). Image 1: Air Quality Monitoring Station Setup
at Project Area
Table 11: Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

Sl. No. Location Code Name of the Location Source
1. A1 Kalyanpur Village Residential
2. A2 Jafarabadih Village Residential
3. A3 Majlishpur (School) Sensitive
4. A4 Didarganj Commercial
81. At each of the four locations (see annex 13) monitoring was undertaken as per new
notification issued by MOEFCC on 16th November 2009. Dry season monitoring has been
conducted in the month of January 2015 whereas wet season monitoring has been carried out
in the month of July-August 2015. Data for the following parameters was collected.
 PM 10
 PM 2.5
 Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)
 Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), and
 Carbon monoxide (CO).
82. The sampling of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, and NOx was undertaken on a 24-hourly basis
while 8- hourly samples were collected for CO. The PM, SO2, and NOx were monitored using
M/s Envirotech Instruments Private Ltd; make Respirable Dust Sampler (APM 460) (Figure
4.12) along with gaseous attachment (Model APM 415 & 411). Whatman GF/A filter papers
were used for PM. Carbon monoxide (CO) samples were monitored by using M/s Endee
Engineers Pvt. Ltd. make gas detector model No. CO96 & GP - 200P respectively.
83. Methodology adopted for sampling and analysis and instrument used for analysis in
laboratory are presented in Table 12.
48
Table 12: Techniques Used for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Minimum
Sl. Instrument
Parameter Technique Detectable Limit
No. Used
(μg/m3)
Respirable Dust Sampler Electrical
1. PM 10 and PM2.5 1.0
(Gravimetric method) Balance
Improved West & Gaeke
2. Sulphur Dioxide Colorimeter 5.0
Method
Jacob & Hochheiser modified
3. Nitrogen Oxide Colorimeter 5.0
(Na-Arsenite) Method
4. Carbon Monoxide Gas Chromatograph 0.01
84. The samples were analysed at an laboratory accredited by MOEFCC. The results are
compared with new NAAQS set by Government of India (MOEFCC) for respective zones as
well as those of World Bank EHS Standards. A comparison of NAAQS of India and World
Bank’s standards for ambient quality has also been made and presented as Annex 2.
85. A summary of results for each location is presented in Table 13 to Table 22.
Table 13: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to PM10 (24 hour average) Dry6 season
3
PM10 Concentration, µg/m
Location Name Code 05- 06- 12- 14- 19- 21- 27- 29- Avg.
Jan Jan Jan Jan Jan Jan Jan Jan 24 hour
Kalyanpur Village A1 74 87 98 92 100 104 82 84 90
Jafarabadih Village A2 64 80 90 84 75 83 98 93 83
Majlishpur (School) A3 48 64 58 70 82 80 68 74 65
Didarganj A4 86 90 105 96 102 116 88 92 97
Table 14: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to PM10 (24 hour average) Wet7 season
3
PM10 Concentration, µg/m
Jul Jul Jul Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug 24 hour
Kalyanpur Village A1 51 62 54 57 62 67 64 60 59.62
Jafarabadih Village A2 48 46 52 54 50 46 49 53 49.75
Majlishpur (School) A3 42 48 44 51 53 56 54 58 50.75
Didarganj A4 65 68 72 62 74 61 58 69 66.12
Table 15: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to PM2.5 (24 hour average) Dry season
3
PM2.5 Concentration, µg/m
Didarganj A4 52 63 66 57 64 63 49 53 58
6
Source: Dry/winter season ambient air quality monitoring carried out by EIA Team in the month of
January 2015.
7
Source: Wet season ambient air quality monitoring carried out by EIA Team in the months of July-
August 2015.
49
Table 16: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to PM2.5 (24 hour average) wet season
3
PM2.5 Concentration, µg/m
Location Name Code 24- 25- 31- 01- 08- 09- 16- 17- Avg. 24
Jul Jul Jul Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug hour
Didarganj A4 38 36 39 34 40 37 38 45 38.37
Table 17: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to SO2 (24 hour average) Dry season
3
SO2 Concentration, µg/m
Didarganj A4 12 14 16 09 13 15 10 12 13
Table 18: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to SO2 (24 hour average) wet season
3
SO2 Concentration, µg/m
Location Name Code 24- 25- 31- 01- 08- 09- 16- 17- Avg. 24
Jul Jul Jul Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug hour
Didarganj A4 10 12 10 8 14 12 11 13 11.25
Table 19: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to NO2 (24 hour average) Dry season
3
NO2 Concentration, µg/m
Didarganj A4 18 24 19 20 23 21 16 22 20
Table 20: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to NO2 (24 hour average) wet season
3
NO2 Concentration, µg/m
Location Name Code 31- 01- 08- 09- 16- 17- Avg. 24
24-Jul 25-Jul
Jul Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug hour
Didarganj A4 16 21 15 14 18 22 18 21 18.12
50
Table 21: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to CO (24 hour average) Dry season
3
CO Concentration, µg/m
Avg.
Location Name Code 05- 06- 12- 14- 19- 21- 27- 29-
24
Jan Jan Jan Jan Jan Jan Jan Jan
hour
Didarganj A4 1400 1800 1429 1047 1288 1325 1802 1504 1149
Table 22: Ambient Air Quality Status with respect to CO (24 hour average) wet season
3
CO Concentration, µg/m
Avg.
Location Name Code 24- 31- 01- 08- 09- 16- 17-
25-Jul 24
Jul Jul Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug
hour
Didarganj A4 918 924 1024 817 1121 918 976 1051 968.6
86. The above tables show that the ambient air quality level of all the air pollutants are within
the NAAQS but the PM10 and PM2.5 levels are above the WB EHS guideline values of 50 and
25 µg/m3 for PM10 and PM2.5 respectively. The source of the PM10 and PM2.5 is the brick
kilns that are located in Didarganj and along the banks on southern side of the project side i.e.
Kacchi Dargah end.
87. Figure 35 and 36 shows the graphically presentation of the average existing ambient air
quality along the project road at four monitored locations.
250
200
150
Concentration (ug/m3)
100
50
0
PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2
Parameter
A1 A2 A3 A4 GOI Standard WB Standards
Figure 35: Average Ambient Air Quality in the Project Area (Dry Season)
51
250
200
Concentration (ug/m3)
150
100
50
0
PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2
Parameter
A1 A2 A3 A4 GOI Standard WB Standards
Figure 36: Average Ambient Air Quality in the Project Area (wet Season)
H. Noise
88. Noise pollution is not a current problem in the region except in commercial location in
urban areas where major settlements are, and high traffic flow. However, few commercial
locations in Patna and Hajipur will experience increase in noise levels but still the ambient noise
quality is expected to be within the permissible limits prescribed by CPCB.
89. During construction period, temporary increase in the noise levels are expected from the
movement of construction machineries and construction activities. Suitable barriers and timely
scheduling of construction activities will minimize these impacts.
90. No secondary information was available on noise level in the project area. In order to
establish the baseline noise quality in the project area, a reconnaissance survey was therefore
undertaken to identify noise generating sources and sensitive receptor such as school,
hospitals, temples, built-up areas. Four locations listed in Table 23 were selected for monitoring
the noise level.
Table 23: Details of Noise Level Monitoring Locations

Sl. No. Location Code Name of the Location Source
1. N1 Kalyanpur Village Residential
2. N2 Jafarabadih Village Residential
3. N3 Majlishpur (School) Sensitive
4 N4 Didarganj Commercial
91. Methodology: At each of the four locations (see annex 13), Sound Pressure Level
(SPL) measurements were taken at an interval of 1 minute using a sound level meter of Lutron
make Digital Sound Level Meter. At all these locations, daytime noise levels were monitored
during the period 6 am to 9 pm and night-time noise levels during the period 9 pm to 10 pm.
Noise readings, with setting at ‘A’ response - slow mode, were recorded. The readings were
tabulated and a frequency distribution table prepared from which 24 hourly, hourly, and Average
Leq noise levels were calculated.
52
92. Presentation of Results: The results of the noise level monitoring were analysed and
compared both with national (NAAQS of India) and World Bank EHS Guidelines. A comparison
on noise level requirements between the WB EHS guidelines and the NAAQS under the Air
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 of GOI as given in Annex 2. It can said that the
required levels are equal for residential, institutional and educational areas. The NAAQS
requirements for commercial areas are more stringent while the WB EHS requirement for
daytime noise in industrial area is more stringent.
93. Table 24 and Table 25 present the noise levels monitoring carried out in the months of
January 2015 and February 2015 for dry/winter season and July and August 2015 for wet
season. Figure 37 to Figure 40 show the graphical presentation of noise levels for dry/winter
and wet seasons.
Table 24: Ambient Noise Levels Monitored in Dry/winter Season8

06-01-2015 13-02-2015
No Location Leq - Day Leq - Night Leq - Day Leq - Night
dB(A) dB(A) dB(A) dB(A)
1 Kalyanpur Village (N1) 54.3 47.6 53.6 46.8
2 Jafarabadih Village (N2) 49.7 42.4 48.6 41.2
3 Majlishpur (School) (N3) 50.4 39.8 51.2 38.4
4 Didarganj (N4) 60.8 43.2 58.7 41.5
January and February 2015.
70
60
Noise Level (Leq) in dB(A)
50
40
30
20
10
0
N1 N2 N3 N4
Location Leq Day Leq Night
Figure 37: Average Noise Level (Leq) in the Project Area in January 2015
8
53
70
60
50

40
30
20
10
0
N1 N2 N3 N4
Figure 38: Average Noise Level (Leq) in the Project Area in February 2015
Table 25: Ambient Noise Levels Monitored in Dry/winter Season9

24-07-2015 16-08-2015
No Location Leq - Day Leq - Night Leq - Day Leq - Night
dB(A) dB(A) dB(A) dB(A)
1 Kalyanpur Village (N1) 54.8 49.2 54.1 48.2
2 Jafarabadih Village (N2) 50.4 44.4 49.5 42.4
3 Majlishpur (School) (N3) 48.6 41.2 50.4 39.6
4 Didarganj (N4) 58.1 45.7 59.2 43.2
Source: West season ambient air quality monitoring carried out by EIA Team in the months of July-August
2015.
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
N1 N2 N3 N4
Figure 39: Average Noise Level (Leq) in the Project Area in July 2015
9
54
70
60
50
Noise Level (Leq) in dB(A) 40
30
20
10
0
N1 N2 N3 N4
Figure 40: Average Noise Level (Leq) in the Project Area in August 2015
94. Location N1 and N2 fall under the zone of residential area, location N3 falls under
educational institute area and location N4 falls under commercial zone. Given this the baseline
noise levels for night time are slightly above the standard requirements for both WB EHS and
NAAQS for location N1, Kalyanpur village with an recorded level of 47.6 dB(A) against the
45dB(A) limit for residential areas. The source of noise in Kalyanpur village is operation of the
brick factories and local domestic/commercial activities. There is no major variation in the
seasonal noise levels in the project area.
I. Water Resources and Water Quality
95. According to the WB EHS guidelines on waste water and ambient water, waste water
discharges should not result in contaminant concentrations to exceed the ambient water quality
criteria. For cases where there is no local ambient water quality criteria it recommends
reference to other criteria such as the US EPA National Recommended Water Quality Criteria
and the World Health Organization (WHO) guidelines.
96. Surface Water Resources: The project area is lying on the Ganga river basin. The
Ganga river is the main surface water body in the project area. The river is joined by other four
other rivers: Ghaghara, Gandak, Punpun and Sone. The proposed bridge alignment crosses the
south channel of Ganga and passes over Rustampur, Himmatpur diara, Jamalpur, Jafrabad dih,
Saifabad, Karampur villages on Raghopur Diara and again crosses the north channel of river
Ganga. Two small channels are spanned across on the diara at ch. Km 2/740 & Km 5/725. The
proposed approach road on the northern side connecting to NH103 will cross one stream.
Water from the Ganga river is used mainly for agricultural activities. The water level of the river
varies between 45m and 50m (HFL) above msl between the dry winter season and monsoon
season.
97. Ground Water Resources: The groundwater resources of the state is broadly divided
into two hydrological units, i) fissured formations, and ii) porous formations. Ground water is
widely used by the communities in the project area. It is the main source of water for household
use including drinking and water is mainly drawn through hand pumps. Therefore availability of
ground water is very important for the local communities in the project area. The pre-monsoon
water levels were found to be generally in the range of 3m – 9m bgl (below ground level) and
55
post-monsoon water levels mostly in the range of 1m – 3m bgl in the project area of Patna and
Vaishali districts. There are also few wells and small ponds in the project area.
98. Due to the presence of the Ganga river and abundant ground water resources overall
there are no problems of water shortage for communities in the project area.
99. Water Quality: Based on the review of the historic data (2003-2004 to 2005-2006)
obtained from the pollution control board, it is found that parameters like pH, DO and BOD are
within the acceptable limits whereas, coliform counts exceeds prescribed limits even for bathing
purposes. The Public Health Engineering Department, Government of Bihar has also reported
that nine north eastern districts viz; Kishanganj, Purnea, Katihar, Madhepura, Araria, Saharsa,
Supaul, Khagaria & Begusarai are affected by excessive Iron while some of the districts namely
Gaya, Nawada, Jamui & Munger are affected by excessive fluoride. The eleven districts
bordering Ganga (including Patna and Vaishali) are affected by excess arsenic content in
drinking water sources. Excess nitrate in few habitations has also been noticed.
100. In order to establish the baseline water quality data, seasonal water quality data has
been generated. Sampling of water quality was done at four locations (see annex 13), two for
surface water and two for ground water. In total eight samples (four at each source) have been
collected for surface water and four samples (two form each source) were collated for ground
water quality testing. Samples were collected in the months of January 2015 and February 2015
(for dry/winter season) and in the months of July and August 2015 (for wet season data). The
results of the sample tests are presented in Table 26 to Table 29 for surface water and ground
water quality respectively. It can bee seen from the results that that both the surface and ground
water quality meets the standards of IS:10500 standards for drinking water and CPCB
standards for ground water, except for the presence of fecal coliform and total coliform in the
surface water samples. The source of the coliform is open defaecation by the local people along
the river edge.
56
Table 26: Surface Water Quality in the Project Area (dry/winter season)
CPCB Sample No. 1 Sample No. 2
standard for Ganga River
drinking Ganga River (Patna site near Sabalpur
(Vaishali site near Madhurpur)
water
Sl. Parameter Unit 3/1/2015 25/1/2015 21/2/2015 29/1/2015 25/1/2015 21/2/2015 29/1/2015 22/2/2015
(desirable
No. (SW) (SW) (SW) (SW) (SW)
limit/ (SW) (SW) (SW) Down
permissible Up stream Up stream Down Down Up Up Down
stream
limit) stream stream stream stream stream
1 Temperature C 18.0 17.8 17.4 17.2 17.4 17.6 17.4 17.9
6.5 – 8.5/no
2 pH value - 7.12 7.26 7.77 7.65 7.14 7.16 7.26 7.12
relaxation
3 Conductivity µS/cm 515.41 523.26 519.26 511.33 512.57 513.26 507.82 510.10
Total dissolve 500/2000
4 mg/l 335.02 340.12 337.52 332.37 333.17 333.62 330.09 331.57
solid(TDS)
5 Dissolve Oxygen mg/l 6.8 7.2 7.6 7.8 7.8 7.6 7.5 7.8
6 Turbidity NTU 5/10 <1.00 <1.00 <1.00 <1.00 <1.00 <1.00 <1.00 <1.00
Under Under Under Under Under Under Under
7 Salinity ppt Under Scale
Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale
8 Alkalinity mg/l 171 175 164 168 168 164 160 162
Calcium as 75/200
9 mg/l 140 138 147 138 140 142 139 140
(CaCO3)
Magnesium As
10 mg/l 70 65 74 65 63 66 62 59
(CaCO3)
Total hardness as 600/600
11 mg/l 210 203 221 203 203 208 203 199
(CaCO3)
12 Chloride as (Cl) mg/l 250/1000 35 37 38 36 36 38 35 37
13 Iron (as Fe) mg/l 0.3/1.0 0.15 0.16 0.23 0.22 <0.52 <0.55 <0.54 <0.52
Manganese (as 0.1/0.3
14 mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
Mn)
0.05/no
15 Arsenic (as As) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
relaxation
16 Fluoride (as F) mg/l 1.0/1.5 0.42 0.44 0.50 0.55 0.49 0.48 0.50 0.47
17 Total ammonia mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
57

drinking Ganga River (Patna site near Sabalpur
water
(desirable
stream
18 Nitrite (as NO2) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
19 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l 45/100 2.81 2.82 2.92 2.86 2.86 2.90 3 3.01
20 Phosphate (as P) mg/l <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
21 Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l 200/400 29.64 30.16 33.04 32.42 31.48 32.42 38.10 37.0
22 Sulphide (As H2S) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
23 Mercury (as Hg) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
0.05/no
24 Lead (as Pb) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
relaxation
25 Total Chromium mg/l 0.05/1.0 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
26 Cadmium (As Cd) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
27 Zinc mg/l 0.28 0.26 0.37 0.32 0.25 0.24 0.40 0.35
28 BOD mg/l 2.00 2.2 3.5 3.0 3.81 3.75 3.89 3.54
29 COD mg/l 14.0 13.8 16.0 14.8 16.0 15.8 15.4 16.0
Total Organic
Carbon (TOC)
Total Oxygen
31 mg/l 580.0 590 610 590 612 610 545 548
Demand(TOD)
32 Fecal Coliform MPN/100ml 5667 5658 5644 5655 4580 4565 4460 4466
33 Total Coliform MPN/100ml 10ml 18778 18764 18656 18654 16890 16858 16670 16623
34 Sodium mg/l 10.3 10.7 10 9.5 10.3 9.8 10.0 9.4
35 Potassium mg/l 2.7 3 2 2.3 3.0 3.3 2.4 2.8
Source: Samples collected and anaysed as part of EIA study.
58
Table 27: Ground Water Quality in the Project area (dry/winter season)
Sample No. 3 Sample No. 4
CPCB standard for
Majlispur Saifabad (Diara Area)
drinking water
Parameter Unit 12/1/2015 19/1/2015 19/1/2015 20/2/2015
Sl. No. (desirable limit/
permissible limit) (GW) (GW) (GW) (GW)
Dug well Hand pump Hand pump Bore well
1 Temperature C 17.8 17.0 17.4 18.1
2 pH value - 6.5 – 8.5/no relaxation 7.80 8.04 7.97 7.85
3 Conductivity µS/cm 555.86 562.16 553.02 565.09
4 mg/l 361.31 365.40 359.46 367.31
solid(TDS)
5 Dissolve Oxygen mg/l 3.2 3.0 3.0 3.1
6 Turbidity NTU 5/10 <1.00 <1.00 <1.00 <1.00
Under Under
7 Salinity ppt Under Scale Under Scale
Scale Scale
8 Alkalinity mg/l 190 196 191 198
9 Calcium as (CaCO3) mg/l 75/200 182 188 186 189
Magnesium As
10 mg/l 36 28 38 40
(CaCO3)
11 mg/l 218 216 224 229
(CaCO3)
12 Chloride as (Cl) mg/l 250/1000 27.65 29 23.40 24
13 Iron (as Fe) mg/l 0.3/1.0 <0.50 <0.50 <0.50 <0.50
14 Manganese (as Mn) mg/l 0.1/0.3 BDL BDL BDL BDL
15 Arsenic (as As) mg/l 0.05/no relaxation BDL BDL BDL BDL
16 Fluoride (as F) mg/l 1.0/1.5 0.36 0.32 0.37 0.34
17 Total ammonia mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL
18 Nitrite (as NO2) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <1.0 <1.0
19 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l 45/100 3.05 2.74 3.08 2.97
20 Phosphate (as P) mg/l <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
21 Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l 200/400 31.84 29.42 31.48 29.41
59

CPCB standard for
drinking water
Parameter Unit 12/1/2015 19/1/2015 19/1/2015 20/2/2015
22 Sulphide (As H2S) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL
23 Mercury (as Hg) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL
24 Lead (as Pb) mg/l 0.05/no relaxation BDL BDL BDL BDL
25 Total Chromium mg/l 0.05/1.0 BDL BDL BDL BDL
26 Cadmium (As Cd) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL
27 Zinc mg/l 0.17 0.15 0.14 0.19
28 BOD mg/l <2.00 <2.00 <2.00 <2.00
29 COD mg/l 14 12.0 10.0 13
Total Organic Carbon
30 mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL
(TOC)
Total Oxygen
31 mg/l 492.0 521.0 610.0 561.0
Demand(TOD)
32 Fecal Coliform MPN/100ml Absent Absent Absent Absent
33 Total Coliform MPN/100ml 10ml Absent Absent Absent Absent
34 Sodium mg/l 14.6 14 13.8 14.2
35 Potassium mg/l 3 3.3 3.4 3.5
Source: Samples collected and anaysed as part of EIA study
60
Table 28: Surface Water Quality in the Project Area (wet season)
drinking Ganga River (Patna site near Sabalpur)
water
(desirable
stream
1 Temperature C 24.5 25.1 24.8 25.6 24.4 25.1 24.8 24.4
6.5 – 8.5/no
2 pH value - 7.10 7.24 7.23 7.28 7.10 7.05 7.12 7.06
relaxation
3 Conductivity µS/cm 556.40 525.28 552.10 524.30 480.45 488.76 484.21 490.20
4 mg/l 350.11 330.12 350.76 335.87 305.28 307.11 306.24 307.37
solid(TDS)
5 Dissolve Oxygen mg/l 7.2 7.4 7.5 7.8 7.9 7.8 7.6 7.9
6 Turbidity NTU 5/10 20 18 15 14 12 14 10 12
Under Under Under Under Under Under Under
7 Salinity ppt Under Scale
Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale Scale
8 Alkalinity mg/l 170 182 168 180 160 168 164 171
Calcium as 75/200
9 mg/l 132 134 140 132 128 138 136 125
(CaCO3)
Magnesium As
10 mg/l 62 64 63 65 58 61 60 58
(CaCO3)
11 mg/l 194 198 203 197 186 199 196 183
(CaCO3)
12 Chloride as (Cl) mg/l 250/1000 38 41 40 39 25.70 26.80 28.10 28.90
13 Iron (as Fe) mg/l 0.3/1.0 0.17 0.18 0.24 0.26 0.55 0.56 0.52 0.53
Manganese (as 0.1/0.3
Mn)
0.05/no
15 Arsenic (as As) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
relaxation
16 Fluoride (as F) mg/l 1.0/1.5 0.44 0.45 0.56 0.58 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.58
17 Total ammonia mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
18 Nitrite (as NO2) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
61

drinking Ganga River (Patna site near Sabalpur)
water
(desirable
stream
19 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l 45/100 2.50 2.62 2.72 2.81 2.88 3.10 3.15 3.19
20 Phosphate (as P) mg/l <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
21 Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l 200/400 34.50 36.7 38.04 35.54 32.76 34.10 39.20 38.30
22 Sulphide (As H2S) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
23 Mercury (as Hg) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
0.05/no
24 Lead (as Pb) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
relaxation
25 Total Chromium mg/l 0.05/1.0 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
26 Cadmium (As Cd) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
27 Zinc mg/l 0.30 0.28 0.39 0.35 0.21 0.26 0.28 0.34
28 BOD mg/l 3.00 4.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 5.00 4.80 4.50
29 COD mg/l 12.0 14.0 12.0 10.0 18.0 16.0 15.0 14.0
Total Organic
Carbon (TOC)
Total Oxygen
31 mg/l 556 584 600 614 615.0 618.0 555.10 540.0
Demand(TOD)
32 Fecal Coliform MPN/100ml 4250 3457 5421 4292 3210 2894 3570 3426
33 Total Coliform MPN/100ml 10ml 12224 15575 12788 15788 9850 8870 10250 11424
34 Sodium mg/l 10.5 10.8 11.20 9.8 12.8 10.7 12.8 10.6
35 Potassium mg/l 2.10 3.40 2.80 2.50 3.2 3.5 3.4 3.3
Source: Samples collected and analyzed as part of EIA study.
62
Table 29: Ground Water Quality in the Project area (wet season)
CPCB standard for
drinking water
Parameter Unit 24/7/2015 16/8/2015 25/7/2015 17/8/2015
1 Temperature C 20.8 22.10 22.5 22.8
2 pH value - 6.5 – 8.5/no relaxation 7.90 8.11 7.81 7.44
3 Conductivity µS/cm 655.31 662.10 664.12 670.24
4 mg/l 410.56 415.81 418.1 418.21
solid(TDS)
5 Dissolve Oxygen mg/l 3.4 3.5 3.2 3.5
6 Turbidity NTU 5/10 <1.00 <1.00 <1.00 <1.00
Under Under
7 Salinity ppt Under Scale Under Scale
Scale Scale
8 Alkalinity mg/l 205 198 196 201
9 Calcium as (CaCO3) mg/l 75/200 175 178 180 176
Magnesium As
10 mg/l 38 41 34 36
(CaCO3)
11 mg/l 213 219 214 212
(CaCO3)
12 Chloride as (Cl) mg/l 250/1000 44.10 42.60 35.40 38.10
13 Iron (as Fe) mg/l 0.3/1.0 <0.50 <0.50 <0.50 <0.50
14 Manganese (as Mn) mg/l 0.1/0.3 BDL BDL BDL BDL
15 Arsenic (as As) mg/l 0.05/no relaxation BDL BDL BDL BDL
16 Fluoride (as F) mg/l 1.0/1.5 0.38 0.34 0.35 0.32
17 Total ammonia mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL
18 Nitrite (as NO2) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
19 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l 45/100 3.10 2.78 3.58 3.20
20 Phosphate (as P) mg/l <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
21 Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l 200/400 42.37 44.45 32.46 32.51
63

CPCB standard for
drinking water
Parameter Unit 24/7/2015 16/8/2015 25/7/2015 17/8/2015
22 Sulphide (As H2S) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL
23 Mercury (as Hg) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL
24 Lead (as Pb) mg/l 0.05/no relaxation BDL BDL BDL BDL
25 Total Chromium mg/l 0.05/1.0 BDL BDL BDL BDL
26 Cadmium (As Cd) mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL
27 Zinc mg/l 0.20 0.16 0.16 0.20
28 BOD mg/l <2.00 <2.00 <2.00 <2.00
29 COD mg/l 12.0 12.0 6.0 8.0
Total Organic Carbon
30 mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL
(TOC)
Total Oxygen
31 mg/l 482.0 524.0 612.0 565.0
Demand(TOD)
32 Fecal Coliform MPN/100ml Absent Absent Absent Absent
33 Total Coliform MPN/100ml 10ml Absent Absent Absent Absent
34 Sodium mg/l 15.2 16.30 13.9 15.1
35 Potassium mg/l 3.10 3.40 3.6 3.8
Source: Samples collected and anaysed as part of EIA study
64
B. Ecological Environment
101. In order to assess the ecological and biological baseline of the project region as whole
and within project’s corridor of influence, a detailed ecological assessment has been carried out
as part of this EIA study. The assessment includes both flora and faunal aspects for terrestrial
as well as aquatic ecology. The details are presented in subsequent sections.
1. Scope and Methodology for Ecological Study
102. The coverage of the ecological study for the project included a core zone comprising the
immediate project area covering the bridge location, approach road locations, Raghopur diara
below the bridge location and a 10km radius project influence area surrounding the immediate
project area including 10km upstream and 10 km downstream of the bridge location. Figure 42
shows the area covered for the ecological study with delineation of areas where primary and
secondary data was collected. Field surveys were carried out by a team of experts from
forestry, wildlife, and fisheries fields.
103. Primary data collection was carried out in the immediate project area from January to
March 2015 representing the dry season from 4 to 7 February 2015 and wet season from late
July to early September 201510. Data collection methods involved: i) geo-spatial survey through
use of GPS; ii) conduction of a total of 22 transect walks for inventorying vegetation and wildlife
was conducted over the dry season (4 – 7 February 2015) and wet season (August and
September 2015); iii) conduction of a household survey through use of structured questionnaire
for the ethno botanical study; iv) focus group discussions (FGDs) with the local communities;
and v) key person interviews with knowledgeable people from the local communities,
community leaders, PRI members. A total of 13 FGDs and over 24 one on one consultations
with key person interviews were carried out for purposes of ecological data collection. Details of
transect walks conducted and information collected is provided in annex 12.
104. Secondary data was collected for information in both the immediate project area as well
as the surrounding influence area of 10 km. This entailed review of literature and having
discussions with key experts from local agencies such as the Forestry Department, Fishery
Department, Patna University, Zoological Survey of India; NGO’s active in conservation of
wildlife such as WWF, Dolphin Foundation, Center for Environment Education (CEE). There is a
substantial amount of literature on the endangered Gangetic Dolphin and the Ganga river and
its watershed. There are also a number of agencies implementing various kinds of conservation
projects for the Gangetic Dolphin and cleaning of the Ganga river. Some of the documents that
were referred to for seeking ecological information for this study are:
i. Floral and Faunal diversity of in the Lower Ganga published by the Indian
Institute of Technology in 2012
ii. The Conservation Action Plan for The Gangatic Dolphin (2010-2020) by National
Ganga River Basin Authority, MoEFCC, Governemnt of India (http://www.iucn-
csg.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/dolphincap_27092010_editss1.pdf);
iii. The Gangetic Dolphin and Action Plan for its Conservation in Bihar (2013)
prepared by Dr. R.K. Sinha for Department of Environment & Forest,
Government of Bihar (http://forest.bih.nic.in/Magazines/DCAP-Bihar.pdf);
10
29 July, 1 August, 4 August, 28 – 29 August, 6 – 7 September, 2015
65
iv. Protection of Endangered Ganges River Dolphin in Brahmaputra River, Assam,

India (2009) prepared by Dr. Abdul Wakid, Programme Leader, Gangatic Dolphin
Research and Conservation Programme for IUCN.
v. Smith, B.D. & Braulik, G.T. 2012. Platanista gangetica. The IUCN Red List of
Threatened Species. Version 2015.2. <www.iucnredlist.org>. Downloaded on 28
July 2015.
66
Figure 41: Coverage of Ecological Study

67
2. Forests and Vegetation
105. Forest Cover: With a geographical area of 94,163 sq.km Bihar is located in eastern part
of India bordering Nepal and it forms part of gangetic plains drained by two major rivers, the
Ganges and the Gandhak. The forest cover in the state is 6473 sq.km which is about 6.87
percent of the state’s geographical area. In terms of forest canopy density classes, the state has
231 sq.km very dense, 3280 sq.km moderately dense forest, and 3334 sq.km open forest.
106. The forest cover distribution of state is shown in Figure 42 and forest cover map is
shown in Figure 43. Forest cover in different canopy density classes in the project districts are
given in Table 30. It can be seen from the table that Patna district has 3202 sq.km. of
geographical area comprising 21 sq.km of moderately dense forest, 4 sq.km open forest and
absence of very dense forest. Thus the forest cover of Patna district is 0.50% of total
geographic Area. In case of Vaihsali district, it comprising 79 sq.km of moderately dense forest,
13 sq.km open forest and it also does not have very dense forest.
Table 30: Forest Cover of Bihar and Project Districts

Forest Category (Sq.km)
Project
Mod.
District Geographic Very Dense Open
Dense Total
al Area Forest Forest
Forest
Patna 3202 0 21 4 25
Vaishali 2036 0 79 13 92
Bihar State 94163 247 3380 3666 7291
Source: India State of Forest Report 2013 by Forest Survey of India (FSI), Dehradoon.
Figure 42: Forest Cover Distribution of Bihar

68
Figure 43: Forest Cover Map of Bihar and Project Area
107. Forest Classification: Of the total forest area in Bihar state, Reserved Forests
constitute 10.70%, Protected Forests 89.28% and Unclassed Forests 0.02% of the total forest
area. There are no Reserved, Protected or Unclassified forests in the project area. Table 31
show the recorded forests of the state.
Table 31: Forest Classification in Bihar

Forest Category Area
Reserved Forest 693 sq.km
Protected Forest 5779 sq.km
Unclassed Forest 1 sq.km
Total 6473 sq.km
Of State’s Geographical Area 6.87 %
Of India’s Forest Area 0.84 %
108. Landuse and habitat type. Majority of the land use in the project area of influence is
water bodies and agricultural land. The project area of influence comprises Riparian Habitat
(transition zone between aquatic and terrestrial ecosystem). The proposed project area of
influence comprises riparian habitat and terrestrial habitat. Given that the project area on either
side of the bridge along the approach roads and in the diara is dominated by agriculture and
horticulture the habitat type is mostly “modified habitat” in accordance with the ADB SPS.
However, the Ganga river, its edges and the western floodplains of Raghopur diara form
“natural habitat as it supports many native species of flora and fauna. Further discussions on
habitat classification based on fauna is provided in para 113.
69
109. Shrubs and grasses. The main type of vegetation in the project area are aquatic
species and shrubs and bushes growing at the edge of agricultural areas. Vegetation surveys
conducted in the project influence area revealed the presence of scattered grasses (mainly
weeds), rooted hydrophytes, emerging hydrophytes and shrubs. Weeds commonly found in the
project area are Congress grass (Parthenium hysterophorus), Lantana (Lantana Camara),
Eupatorium trilpineve, Solanum xanthiocarpum and Datura (Dathura stromonium). Better
survival of these species are attributed to higher seed production and faster growing rates in
comparison to other weeds. Grass species common in the project influence area area
Cyanodon dactylon, Achyranthes aspera, Saccharum arundinaceum, Vetiveria zizanoides,
Ludwigia parviflora, and Rungia repens. These species are mainly found growing above the
water level in undisturbed areas. Rooted hydrophytes are found along the banks of the river the
where water level is less than a foot and the water recedes after the monsoon season.
Commonly reported hydrophytes are Ipomoea carnea, Argeratum conyzoides, Azolla pinnata,
Eichhornia crassipes,Lemna perpusilla, Spirodela polyrhiza and Ipomoea aquatic and others.
110. Trees. Beyond the riparian habitat lies mainly manmade ecosystems. There are some
trees near residential and agricultural areas. Most of them have been planted for purposes of
landscaping with a few that are naturally occurring. They include fruit, flower and seed bearing
species which attract avifauna, small mammals and reptiles. The list of tree species that were
recorded in the project influence area during field surveys are provided in Table 32.
Table 32: List of Trees in the Project Influence Area and It’s Status
Sl. Common Local
Scientific Name IUCN GOI CITES
No. Name Availability
1 Peepal Ficus religiosa NA - - R
2 Bargad Ficus benghalensis NA - - R
3 Sissoo Dalbergia sissoo NA - - C
4 Jamun Syzygium cumini NA - - C
5 Neem Azadirachta indica NA - - C
6 Sal Shorea robusta LC - - C
7 Salai Boswellia serrate NA - - C
8 Bahera Terminalia arjuna NA - - C
9 Mango Mangifera indica Data Deficient - - A
10 Golden Crassia fistula NA - - C
shower
11 Bakain Melia azadirachta NA - - C
12 Jackfruit Artocarpus heterophyllus NA - - C
13 Kadamb Anthocephalus cadamba NA - - A
14 Bail Aegle marmelos NA - - C
15 Siris Albizia procera NA - - C
16 Devil Tree Alstonia scholaris LC - - R
17 Royal Palm Roystonea regia NA - - C
18 Amla Phyllanthus emblica NA - - C
19 Coconu Coco nucifera NA - - C
20 Umar Ficus racemosa NA - - R
21 Gular Ficus Glomerata NA - - R
22 Palash Butea monosperma NA - - R
23 Gulmohar Delonix regia LC - - C
24 Kala siris Albizia lebbeck NA - - R
25 Semal Bombax ceiba NA - - R
26 Bair Zizyphus jujube NA - - C
70
Sl. Common Local

Scientific Name IUCN GOI CITES
No. Name Availability
27 Palm Arecaceae NA - A I & II A
28 Khajoor Phoenix dactylifera NA - - C
29 Babul Acacia nilotica NA - - C
30 Jalebi Pithecellobium dulce NA - - C
31 Arjan Terminalia arjuna NA - - C
Abbreviations:
 IUCN: T = Threatened, R = Rare, V = Vulnerable, LC = Least Concern, NA= Not Assessed
 GoI: (Government of India, THE WILDLIFE (PROTECTION) ACT, 1972): Schedule VI = specified
plants: Willfully pick, uproot, damage destroy, acquire or collect any specified plant from any
forest land and area specified,
 CITES: A I & II = Appendix I & II =species that are not threatened but may become so unless
trade is closely controlled
 Local Availability: (Observation by vegetation survey team): A = abundant, C = common, R =
rare.
3. Wildlife and Protected Area
111. Protected Area Network: The protected area network of Bihar consists of wildlife
sanctuaries and national parks. There is one national park and twelve wildlife sanctuaries
covering an area of 0.32 million hectares, which constitutes 3.38% of the total geographical
area of the state. The lone tiger reserve of the state i.e. Valmiki Tiger Reserve covers an area of
84,000 hectares. Kabar, situated in Begusarai district with an area of 6,738 hectares, is a
wetland of national importance. Details of these protected areas are given in table 33 and figure
44 show the protected area map of the Bihar.
112. As evident in figure 44 none of the protected areas are located within 10 km of the
project bridge location. The nearest protected area is Barela S.A.Z.W Wildlife Sanctuary in
northern part of Vaishali districts which is more then 50 km away from the project site. Of the 13
protected areas the Vikramashila Gangetic Dolphin Sanctuary is the only Dolphin sanctuary in
India. The Project influence area is located over 100km upstream from this dolphin sanctuary.
Table 33: Protected Area Network in the State of Bihar

Sl. Protected Area Location (District) Area in sq.km
A. National Parks (NP)
1 Valmiki National Park West Champaran 335.65
B. Wildlife Sanctuaries (WLS)
2 Barela S.A.Z.S. WLS Vaishali 1.96
3 Bhimbandh WLS Munger 681.99
4 Gautam Budh WLS Gaya 138.34
5 Kanwarjheel WLS Begusarai 63.11
6. Kaimur WLS Rohtas 1342.00
7. Kusheshwar Sthan WLS Darbhanga 29.17
8. Nagi Dam WLS Jamui 1.92
9. Nakti Dam WLS Jamui 3.33
10. Pant (Rajgir) WLS Nalada 35.84
11. Udaypur WLS West Champaran 8.87
12. Valmiki WLS West Champaran 454.15
13. Vikramshila Gangetic Dolphin WLS Bhagalpur 50.0
Source: Wildlife Institute of India, Dehradun
71
Figure 44: Protected Area Map of Bihar and Project Area (Source: Wildlife Institute of India, Dehradun)
72
113. Habitat types: The dominant type of habitat in the project area is “modified habitat” in
the area of the approach roads. However the area inside the Ganga river as shown in Figure
4.14 serves as natural habitat for the Gangetic Dolphin (Platanista Gangetica) which is listed as
“endangered” under the IUCN red list, under schedule I of the Wildlife Conservation Act of India
and also listed under CITES annex 1. Gharial (Gavialis gangeticus) a critically endangered
species has also been reported to use the river in the project influence area as a migratory
route. However according to local wildlife experts (Professor R.K Sinha of Patna University and
Dr. Gopal Sharma of Zoological Survey of India, Patna) it is mainly the confluence of the
Gandak river located about 14km upstream of the project bridge site which is the main habitat
for the gharial. The Raghopur diara serves as natural habitat for the Ganges soft shell turtle
(Nilssonia gangetica) which is listed as “vulnerable” under IUCN and is also listed schedule I of
the Wildlife Conservation Act of India. In addition the diara serves as habitat to a number of
migratory bird species. However, none of the bird species are endangered. Further detailed
discussions on the Gangetic Dolphin, Gharial and Ganges soft shell turtle is provided in para
122 to 140.
114. Mammals. Other than the Gangetic dolphin smooth coated otters (Lutra perspicillata)
have been reported to be seen occasionally in the project areas. The Black Buck (Antilope
cervicapra) is also reported to be seen on the river floodplain further downstream of the bridge
location within the 10 km project influence area. Blue Bulls (Boselaphus tragocamelus) and
Jackals (Canis aureus) are commonly found along the Ganga river near Patna. Local people
also reported the presence of the Indian mongoose (Herpestes edwardsii) and five stripped
squirrel (F. p. chhattisgarhi). Other than these wild animals, domesticated mammals like goat,
sheep, dog, cow, ox, donkey etc. are also present in the project influence area.
115. Reptiles. In addition to the Ganges soft shell turtle and Gharial, Bengal Monitor Lizard
(Varanus bengalensis) were commonly sighted along the river bank that were vegetated. Hard-
shell turtles or Indian Roofed turtle (Kachuga tecta) were also reported in the upper ganga and
gandak river basins located about 14km upstream from the project bridge location. Turtles
inhabit deep rivers, streams, large canals, lakes and ponds, with a bed of mud or sand. It tends
to prefer areas where the water is turbid. Presence of these turtle species in the project
influence area was confirmed by the state wildlife and zoological authorities as well as by
Professor R.K. Singh of Patna University. A number of water snakes such as Asiatic water
snake (Xenochrophis piscator) were also sighted in the Ganga river. Rat Snakes (Ptyas
mucosus), Common Krait (Bungarus caerulens) and Indian cobra (Naja Naja) have also been
reported to be seen in the project area. Many house geikos and garden lizards were sighted
during field surveys.
116. Avian Fauna: Avian fauna in and along the Ganga river are rich and highly diverse.
Rare species recorded along the Ganga river in the project area are Caspian Tern (Sterna
caspia), Black-tailed Godwit (Limosa limosa), Peregrine Falcon (Falco peregrinus), Greater
Spotted Eagle (Clanga clanga), Brahminy Kite (Haliastur indus), Common Shelduck (Tadorna
tadorna), Pied Harrier (Circus melanoleucos), Indian Cormorant (Phalacrocorax fuscicellis),
Great White Pelican (Pelicanus onecrotalus). Through field surveys the following birds were
sighted in the project influence area: Common crow, Myna, Eagle, Sparrow, Babbler, Pigeon,
Cattle Egrets, Red Vented bulbul, Drongo, Sparrow and Indian Roller.
117. Table 34 lists the faunal species of the prject influence area that are listed as
endangered under IUCN and included in schedule I and II of the Wildlife Protection Act of India
found in the project area.
73
Table 34: Faunal Species in Project Influence Area

Common name Scientific Name IUCN Wildlife
category Conservation
(CR, EN, VU) Act Schedule
Mammals
1. Gangetic Dolphin Platanista gangetica EN Schedule I
2. Smooth coated otters Lutra perspicillata VU Not listed
3. Black Buck Antilope cervicapra NT Schedule I
4. Jackal Canis aureus LC Schedule II
5. Indian mongoose Herpestes edwardsii LC Not listed
6. Five stripped squirrel F. p. chhattisgarhi LC Not listed
7. Nilgai Boselaphus LC Schedule III
tragocamelus
Reptiles
8. Ganges Softshell Turtle Nilssonia gangetica VU Schedule I
9. Gharial Gavialis gangeticus CE Schedule I
10. Bengal monitor Varanus bengalensis LC Schedule I
11. India Roofed turtle Kachuga tecta LC Not listed
12. Asiatic water snake Xenochrophis piscator Not assessed Not listed
13. Oriental rat snake Ptyas mucosus Not assesed Not listed
14. Common Krait Bungarus caerulens Not assesed Not listed
15. India cobra Naja Naja Not assesed Schedule II
Avian fauna
16. Caspian Tern Sterna caspia LC Not listed
17. Black-tailed Godwit Limosa limosa NT Not listed
18. Peregrine Falcon Falco peregrinus LC Not listed
19. Greater Spotted Eagle Clanga clanga VU Not listed
20. Brahminy Kite Haliastur indus LC Not listed
21. Common Shelduck Tadorna tadorna LC Not listed
22. Pied Harrier Circus melanoleucos LC Not listed
23. Indian Cormorant Phalacrocorax LC Not listed
fuscicollis
24. Great White Pelican Pelicanus onecrotalus LC Not listed
Note: LC – Least Concern, NT – Near Threatened, EN – Endangered, VU – Vulnerable, CE – Critically
Endangered
118. Fishes: The species of fishes noticed from study are Rohu, Catla, Hilsa, Mystus sp,
Cirrhinus Sp, etc. Species of fishes reported in the study area is given in Table 35. The species
of fishes given in Table 35 are commonly reported in the fresh water bodies like river, streams,
lakes, pond and estuaries. They are cosmopolitan in distribution and are reported all over India
and Indian Sub continents. These species of fishes are commonly used in aqua culture practice
and had good commercial importance.
119. Ecologically these species are primary and secondary consumer in the freshwater
ecosystem mainly in rivers. They are primary food for secondary consumers like fresh water
dolphins (Platanista Gangetica), gharials, crocodiles, turtles, etc. They do not have fix breeding
and nesting site and mainly spawn during monsoon season when the water is diluted, laden
with silt and current of water is high to keep their spawn (egg) floating for hatching of eggs.
Hence they breed all over river, streams and lakes during favorable conditions. Therefore the
74
species of fishes listed in Table 35 are not confined to the project site only and are found all
along the Ganges river and its tributaries.
Table 35: Fish Species in the River Section under Project Area
S. Common Scientific Name Categories Category as per IUCN –Red
No. Name List
1 Mrigal Cirrhina mrigala Indian Major Not Included
carps
2 Catla Catla Catla Do Not Included
3 Rohu Labeo rohita Do Least Concern (as per Ver. 3.1)
4 Calbasu Labeo calbasu Do Least Concern (as per Ver. 3.1)
5 Bata Labeo Bata Indian Minor Least Concern (as per Ver. 3.1)
Carp
6 Kalabans Labeo dero Least Concern ( as per Ver. 3.1)
7 Wallaga attu Not Included
8 Rita rita Least Concern ( as per Ver. 3.1)
9 Cyprinus carpio Other fishes Vulnerable A2ce (As per Ver 3.1)
10 Channa punctate Not included
11 Channa marulias Least Concern ( as per Ver. 3.1)
12 Tengara Mystus Tengara Least Concern ( as per Ver. 3.1)
13 Ponthia Puntius sophore Least Concern ( as per Ver. 3.1)
14 Puntius ticto Not Included
15 Singhi Heyeropneustus fossilis Not Included
16 Palwa Mystus cavasius Least Concern ( as per Ver. 3.1)
17 Phasia Setipinna brevifilis Not Included
(Source: Secondary Data)
120. Endangered/Vulnerable Species of Flora and Fauna: Data and anaylsis carried out in
the paragraphs above show that there are mainly three important species in the project
influence area. They are: i) the Gangetic Dophin (Platanista Gangetica), ii) Gharial (Gavialis
gangetica) and iii) Ganges soft shell turle (Nilssonia gangetica). The first is listed as endangered
under IUCN, the second as critically endangered and the third as vulnerable. All three species
are listed under schedule I of the Wildlife Conservation Act of India. Further detailed discussions
on these three species is presented in subsequent sections.
a. Gangetic Dolphin (Platanista Gangetica)
121. Status and classification: The Gangetic dolphin (Platanista gangetica) (Image 6 and
7), is one of the five freshwater dolphins of the world. Listed as endangered in IUCN red data
list based on its diversity and scale of threats this species is the sole living representative of its
family (which represents an ancient lineage in the order Cetartiodactyla). This species is also
listed under Schedule I11 of the Wildlife Protection Act of India, appendix 112 under CITES and
appendix II under the Convention on Migratory Species (CMS). It was declared as the National
Aquatic Animal of India by Honorable Prime Minister, Dr. Man Mohan Singh, on 5 October,
2009.
11
Schedule I species under the Willdife Protection Act of India are species with absolute protection with the highest
level of penalites.
12
Appendix I are species that are under threat of becoming extinct and therefore are the most endangered among
CITES-listed animals and plants. CITES prohibits international trade in specimens of these species except when the
purpose of the import is not commercial
75
Images 6 and 7: Gangatic Dolphin (Susu) - Platanista gangetica
Figure 45: Distribution Map of Gangatic Dolphin (Source: IUCN Red List)
122. Range and Discrete Management Unit: This species occurs in the Indus, Ganges-
Brahmaputra-Megna, in India, Nepal and Bangladesh and also in Sangu-Karnaphuli river
systems in Bangladesh (Figure 45). From the deltas upstream they are blocked by rocky
barriers, shallow water, fast currents, dams, or barrages (low, gated diversion dams). The three
river systems are disjunct and therefore so are their respective dolphin subpopulations,
although there may be occasional demographic interaction between the latter two during the
high-water season if the freshwater plumes of the two systems meet. There is further
subpopulation separation within all three systems, some of it natural but much of it caused by
physical barriers constructed within the last 100 years.
123. The three river systems can be considered as the larger discrete management units for
the dolphin. The Dolphin Conservation Action Plan 2010 – 2020 states that “…stretches in the
rivers that contain healthy breeding dolphin populations with long term survivial potential
designated as ‘critical stretches’ need to be identified.” Such critical stretches could be
considered as smaller discrete management units within the larger discrete management units.
Field surveys conducted by Professor R.K Sinha and his team in Bihar in 2012 identified some
6 critical stretches: 1) Kosi confluence downstream to Kahalgaon; 2) Bariarpur upstream to
Sultanganj; 3) 30km stretch from Munger to Mirzapur; 4) 24km stretch from Sone confluence
76
upstream to Ghaghara confluence in and around Doriganj; and 5) 12km stretch from Buxar to
Karmnasa confluence at Chausa. These critical stretches can be considered as smaller discrete
management units inside the state of Bihar within the larger discrete management unit of the
Ganges-Brahmaputra-Meghna river system. The first three stretches are located on the far
eastern side of the project bridge location beyond 100km close to the Vikramsala Dolphin
Sanctuary and the last two stretches are located also beyond 100km on the far western side of
the project bridge location. Therefore it can be concluded that the Project influence area does
not fall inside any of the smaller discrete management units for the Gangetic dolphin.
124. General Habitat and Ecology: Ganges River dolphins are generally concentrated in
counter-current pools below channel convergences and sharp meanders (Kasuya and Haque
1972, Smith 1993, Smith et al. 1998) and above and below mid-channel islands, bridge pilings,
and other engineering structures that cause scouring (Smith, unpublished data). Their fidelity to
counter-current pools is probably greatest in fast-flowing channels (Smith et al. 1998). Annual
monsoon-driven floods cause great variability in the dolphins’ access to large parts of their
range. Isolation in seasonal lakes sometimes occurs (especially in the Brahmaputra basin), as
does "escapement" from the river channels into artificial water bodies such as canals and
reservoirs. Deltaic (brackish) waters are a major component of the total range, but Ganges
River dolphins are not generally known to occur in salinities greater than 10 ppt, although they
have been recorded in waters as saline as 23 ppt (Smith and Braulik, unpublished data). River
dolphins are expected to be most vulnerable during the low-water season when habitat is
limited and it is therefore important to determine which habitats are preferentially used at this
time, so that conservation effort can be focused in these locations.
125. Habitat in the Project influence area. Within the project area the dolphins are found
near bathing ghats, cremation ghats and similar areas where they can feed on smaller fishes.
Treveni ghat in Fatuwa located on the south channel a few kilometers downstream and within
the 10km of the bridge location is the only ghat in the project influence area. The smaller fishes
go to such areas to feed on food and other wastes and materials that are disposed by people
coming to these areas. They are also seen at the confluence of Gandhak river located about 14
km upstream from the project area. Such confluences are preferred by the dolphins as they are
able to get plenty of food from the fishes migrating upstream on one hand and save energy on
the other as currents of the water carry them. Figure 46 shows the locations where dolphins
were sighted during field surveys and indicated to be present by local Dolphin experts.
126. Population distribution. According to Dolphin experts Professor R.K Sinha of Patna
University and Dr. Gopal Sharma of the Zoological Survey of India in Patna there is a total of
approximately 3500 Gangetic dolphins distributed across Nepal, India and Bangladesh. Of this
almost half the population is found in the rivers of Bihar state alone. They also stated the
presence of approximately 25 to 40 dolphins in the project influence area. The Dolphin
Conservation Action Plan (DCAP) prepared by Professor R.K Sinha which is based on field
surveys carried out in 2012 recorded dolphin population densities in various sections of the
river. The average of population density found along the river was 1.52 dolphins per linear km
with the highest density of 2.22 dolphins/km in the Vikramasala Dolphin Sanctuary and the
lowest density of 1.12 dolphins/km in the Mokama – Patna segment. The project influence area
falls within the Patna end of the Mokama – Patna segment. Going by this estimate there are
approximately 22.4 (1.12 x 20km) dolphins in the 20km project influence area considering 10km
upstream and 10 km downstream of the bridge location. The physical dispersion and movement
within the project area can be seen in figure 47.
77
127. Based on the verbal feedback from the experts and this statistical estimate it is assumed
that there are 22 to 40 dolphins in the project influence area. The higher estimate of 40 dolphins
in the project influence area amounts to 1.14% of the total population of the Ganges dolphin.
128. Seasonal activities. Mating usually takes place during the first monsoon rains around
May to July. Only a single baby is born after a gestation period of about 9 months. Accordingly
the birthing season is usually around January to March. At the time of birth the neonate is about
70- 90 cm and weighs about 4 kg – 7.5 kg. The mother and calf remain together for about one
year. The male attains sexual maturity at an age of about 10 years when they reach a length of
1.7 meters while the females are known to attain sexual maturity at 10 or less years (Kasuya
1972) when they are around 2m long (Harison 1972). Various research on Dolphins indicated
that the river habitat is conducive for dolphin breeding in spite of various biotic pressures.
129. While the exact distance of movement of the Dolphins is not known as no monitoring
using radio collars have been conducted yet (due to technical difficulties), the DCAP prepared
by Professor R.K Sinha, mentions dolphins to be seen travelling as far as 100 km into the Sone
river from the main Ganga river during the monsoon season. The marked seasonal changes in
the dolphin distribution and density over much of its range are due, at least in large part, to
fluctuations in water levels. During the dry season from October to April, many dolphins leave
the tributaries of the Ganga and Brahmaputra systems and congregate in the main channels,
only to return to the tributaries the following monsoon. Dolphins were seen more than 100kms
upstream in the River Son in the flood season in the early 1990s, returning to the main stream
of the Ganga after the floods abated in October. They may become isolated in pools and river
branches during the dry season (Reeves and Brownell, 1989). Observations in Nepal show that
they move in and out of tributaries of the Gandak, Kosi, and Karnali systems during high water
seasons, probably spending low water seasons in deep pools of the tributaries. In the main
rivers, a decrease in abundance during the summer would confirm a seasonal pattern of
migration (Shreshtha, 1989). In the Indus, about 40%- 45% of the dolphin population is found at
junctions of tributaries with the main river stream, at least during the dry season, presumably
being attracted to these areas by concentrations of prey (Reeves and Brownell, 1989).
130. Importance of the Species and key threats: The Ganges dolphin is at the apex of the
food chain of the river ecosystems, and thus is an indicator of the health of the river
ecosystems.
131. Key threats causing population reduction of the species are:
 Water pollution caused by effluents discharge from industries and waste water
and sewage discharged from major cities;
 Mining and dredging of sand on the river bed causing increased sediment loads
in the river,
 Habitat fragmentation due to construction of dams and barrages
 Habitat degradation due to construction of irrigation channels, embankments
along the river edges
 Excessive fishing by fishermen causing a decline in food species and also
causing dolphins to be trapped in fish nets
 Poaching for use of the blubber oil as fish bait and for meat.
 Noise pollution in river caused by mechanized boats and other vessels moving in
the rivers as well as conduction of seismic tests and other development activities.
78
132. Ongoing conservation efforts for the Gangetic Dophin: There is a “Conservation
Action Plan for the Ganges River Dolphin, 2010 – 2020” under the National Ganga River Basin
Authority, Ministry of Environment and Forests (MOEF). The action plan includes activities on
conduction of baseline surveys; creation of protected areas and restoration of degraded
habitats; and community involvement and resolution of human-dolphin conflicts. The
Environment and Forest Department, Governement of Bihar has set up Centre for Conservation
and Development of Dolphin and a proposal to set up National Dolphin Research and
Development Institute also under consideration.
133. Based on the importance and endangered status of the Gangetic Dophin, the
Government of India has notified a 50 km section of river between Sultangang and Kahalgaon
near Bhagalpur in Bihar State as a dolphin sanctuary. It is called the Vikramshila Gangetic
Dolphin Sanctuary and is located more than more than 130 km (aerial distance) downstream of
project site of bridge development as shown in figure 49. Designated in 1991, it is the only
protected area for the endangered Gangetic dolphins in Asia.
134. Conclusions on presence of critical habitat according to ADB SPS. Guidance on

critical habitat is provided in the ADB SPS as well as under the International Finance
Corporation (IFC) Performance Standard (PF) 6 on Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable
Management of Living Natural Resources. The ADB SPS includes 613 criteria and the IFC PF 6
includes 514 criteria for critical habitat. As the Gangetic Dolphin is an IUCN endangered species
and also a migratory species it could potentially trigger criteria i) and iii) of the ADB SPS and
criteria i) and iii) of IFC PF 6 as well. For IFC PF 6 criteria i) further detailed guidance is
provided into 2 tiers as elaborated below.
135. Under criteria i), tier 1 critical habitat are those areas that:
 sustain 10% or more of the global population of a CR or EN species;

 the area could be a discrete management unit for that species;
 the area could be one of 10 or fewer global discrete management units for the
species.
136. Under criteria ii), tier 2 critical habitat are those areas that:
 supports regular occurrence of a single individual of a CR species;

 area having regionally important concentrations of a EN species and the area
could be a discrete management unit for that species;
13
6 criteria for criticial habitat under ADB SPS: i) habitat required for the survival of critically endangered or
endangered species; ii) areas having special significance for endemic or restricted-range species; iii) sites that are
critical for the survival of migratory species; iv) areas supporting globally significant concentrations or numbers of
individuals of congregatory species; v) areas with unique assemblages of species that are associated with key
evolutionary processes or provide key ecosystem services; and vi) areas having biodiversity or significant social,
economic or cultural importance to local communities. These may include areas that are either legally protected or
officially proposed for protection, such as areas that meet the criteria of the World Conservation Union classification,
the Ramsar List of Wetlands of International Importance, and the United Nationals Educational, Scientific, and
Culturual Organization’s world natural heritage sites.
14
5 criteria for critical habitat under IFC PF6: i) habitat of significant importance to Critically Endangered and/or
Endangered species; ii) habitat of significant important to endemic and/or restricted range species; iii) habitat
supporting globally significant concentrations of migratory species and/or congregatory species; iv) highly threatened
and/or unique ecosystems; and/or v) areas associated with key evolutionary processes
79
 habitat of significant importance to a CR or EN species whose population

distribution is not well understood and where loss of the habitat could potentially
risk the long term survivability of the species
 habitat containing nationally/regionally important concentrations of a CR or EN
species or equivalent national/regional listing
137. Approximately only 1.14% (less than 10%) of the total population of the Ganges dolphin
exist in the project area and the project influence area is not one of the smaller discrete
management units for the species. None of the other subcriteria for tier 1 or tier 2 under critieria
i) are triggered. Hence, the project influence area does not trigger criteria i) of critical habitat for
both ADB SPS and IFC PF6. Accordingly the ADB SPS criteria iii) is also not triggered as the
project influence area is not critical for the survilval of the Ganges Dolphin which is a migratory
species. The project area clearly does not support a globally significant concentration of the
Gangetic Dolphin, a migratory speies. Hence criteria iii) under IFC PF 6 is not triggered either.
Therefore it is concluded that the project area is not a critical habitat for the Gangetic
dolphin.
80
Figure 46: Habitats and Movement Path of Dolphins, Turtles and Gharials in Ganga near Project Area
Boundary of Project
Influence Area
Boundary of Project
Influence Area
81
Figure 47: Location of Vikramshila Gangetic Dolphins Sanctuary with respect to project site
82
b. Gharial (Gavialis gangeticus)
138. Status and classification. The gharial is listed as critically endangered under the IUCN
red data list. It is listed under schedule I as a fully protected species under the Wildlife
Protection Act of India. It is also listed under Appendix I of both CITES and CMS.
139. Range and Population distribution. It was originally found in the four river systems:
Indus (Pakistan), Ganges (Nepal, India, Bangladesh), Mahanadi (India) and Irrawady
(Myanmar) rivers. Today it is found only in the Indus, Ganges and Mahanadi rivers as shown in
figure 49. Hence these river systems can be considered as larger discrete management units
for the species. There are 7 wildlife sanctuaries (6 in India and 1 in Nepal)15 believed to hold the
largest concentration of gharials in the wild. These sanctuaries can be considered as smaller
discrete management units within the larger discrete management unit of the Ganges and
Mahanadi river systems. None of these sanctuaries are located within the 10km project
influence area. The closest sanctuary is the Son River Sanctuary which is located a few
hundred kilometer away from the Project bridge location.
140. IUCN records 16 show that the gharial population was 5000 to 10,000 in 1946. This
reduced to 436 in the 1990’s and further to 182 in 2006. Population reduction from the 1990’s to
2006 was 58%. The overall reduction of population from 1946 to 2006 over three generations
was over 80%, thus trigerring its classification as critically endangered. These figures account
only for the wild population. With various conservation activities it is estimated that there are
some 800 plus gharials under captive breeding or in zoos. These include 11 breeding centers or
zoos in India, Nepal and Bhutan (8 in India, 2 in Nepal and 1 in Bhutan), 2 zoos in Europe and 8
zoos in the United States.
141. The National Chambal Gharial Wildlife Sanctuary which exists along the Chambal river
system falling in the states of Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh and Uttar Pradesh is believed to hold
the largest breeding subpopulation of about 48% of the total population.
142. General Habitat and Ecology. According to Dr. Gopal Sharma, gharials prefer silent
areas that are not frequented by people or other animals. They spend most of their time in the
calmer sections of deep and fast flowing rivers. Given that they are cold blooded they like to
bask in the sun in quiet sand bars to warm their body and lie in the shade or go inside water to
cool down. They have short legs and are clumsy walkers on land. Their streamlined body with a
powerful tail and webbed back feet make them good swimmers. Hence they are the most
aquatic of all crocodiles spending most of their time in water and coming on land only to lay
eggs and bask in the sun.
143. Habitat and Ecology within the Project area. Consultations held with the local
community and wildlife experts revealed that gharials are not commonly seen in the project
influence area. However there are a few reports of them migrating through the project influence
area. According to both Professor R.K Sinha and Dr. Gopal Sharma the prime habitat for this
species is the confluence of Gandak river which is about 14 km upstream of the proposed
bridge site.
15
Corbett Tiger Reserve, Katerniaghat Wildlife Sanctuary, National Chambal River Sanctuary, Ken
Ghairal Sanctuary, Chitwan National Park (Nepal), Son Gharial Sanctuary, Sathkosia Tiger Reserve.
16
file:///C:/Users/ky1/Downloads/8966_Gavialis_gangeticus.pdf
83
144. Seasonal activities. Mating usually takes place during the dry season from December
to January, and nesting occurs before the monsoons from around March to May when the water
levels are still low. Eggs are laid into deep holes excavated by the reptile in sandy banks above
the flood line. Gestation period of the eggs are 83 to 94 days or approximately 2.5 to 3 months
allowing the new hatchlings to come out in time for the monsoon rains.
145. Threats: Key threats to the Gharial include:
 habitat degradation due to human activities along the rivers.

 poaching for using the skin to make handbags and shoes,
 hunting of the male for use of its snout believed to have aphrodisiac properties
 accidental snaring in fishing nets
 excessive fishing causing a decline in availability of smaller fish which further
causes a decline in larger predator fish which serve as food for the gharial
 hunting of the gharial eggs by people believed to have medicinal properties
Figure 48: Gharial habitat range
146. Conservation activities: Given the rapid decline in its population conservation activities
targeted at this species was started as early as the late 70’s. A key conservation activity
entailed captive breeding of the reptile. Though captive breeding programs were successful, the
success rate for “head starting” or releasing the gharials into the wild were very low and unable
to revive the wild population. Therefore of late conservationists are shifting their strategy to
protect the gharial habitat in the wild.
147. As stated above currently there are 7 legally protected areas in India and Nepal which
have the largest concentrations of this species. In addition there are 11 captive breeding
centers and zoos in India, Nepal and Bhutan which will ensure that the species doesn’t go
extinct.
148. Conclusions on presence of critical habitat according to ADB SPS. Guidance on

critical habitat is provided in the ADB SPS as well as under the International Finance
Corporation (IFC) Performance Standard (PF) 6 on Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable
Management of Living Natural Resources. The ADB SPS includes 6 criteria (see footnote 13)
84
and the IFC PF 6 includes 5 criteria (see footnote 14) for critical habitat. As the Gharial is an
IUCN critically endangered species and also a migratory species it could potentially trigger
criteria i) and iii) of the ADB SPS and criteria i) and iii) of IFC PF 6 as well. For IFC PF 6 criteria
i) further detailed guidance is provided into 2 tiers as elaborated below.
149. Under criteria i), tier 1 critical habitat are those areas that:
 sustain 10% or more of the global population of a CR or EN species;

 the area could be a discrete management unit for that species;
 the area could be one of 10 or fewer global discrete management units for the
species.
150. Under criteria ii), tier 2 critical habitat are those areas that:
 supports regular occurrence of a single individual of a CR species;

 area having regionally important concentrations of a EN species and the area
could be a discrete management unit for that species;
 habitat of significant importance to a CR or EN species whose population
distribution is not well understood and where loss of the habitat could potentially
risk the long term survivability of the species
 habitat containing nationally/regionally important concentrations of a CR or EN
species or equivalent national/regional listing
151. Presence of gharials in the project influence area is quite rare. No gharials were spotted
or mentioned to be present in the project area during field surveys and consultations with the
local community people. Local wildlife experts reconfirmed this and stated that it is the Gandhak
confluence area 14km upstream of the bridge locaton that is the main habitat for gharials.
Moreover gharials like quiet areas not frequented by people and boats. But the project area is a
fairly busy area with regular movement of people and boats. Therefore it is highly likely that the
proportion of gharials frequenting the project influence area is less than 10% of the total
population. In addition the project influence area is not one of the smaller discrete management
units for the species and is not critical for their survival. In addition it is clear that there is no
regular presence of the species in the project influence area. Therefore none of the other
subcriteria for tier 1 or tier 2 under critieria i) are triggered. Hence, the project influence area
does not trigger criteria i) of critical habitat for both the ADB SPS and IFC PF6 definition. Due to
similar reasons criteria iii) of the ADB SPS and IFC PF 6 is not triggered either. Therefore it is
concluded that the project area is not a critical habitat for the Gharial.
c. Ganges Softshell Turtle (Nilssonia gangetica)
152. Status and classification. Listed as Vulnerable species in IUCN red data list based on
its diversity and scale of threats – recent, ongoing, and projected. This species is also listed on
Schedule I of India’s protected species list under the Wildlife Protection Act. It is listed in CITES
Appendix 1 as well.
153. Physical features. With its prominent, tube-like snout and incredibly flattened shell, the
Ganges soft-shelled turtle is a very peculiar-looking freshwater reptile. It is these odd features
that make this turtle so superbly adapted to its riverine habitat, with its long neck and snorkel-
like snout allowing it to extend its nose out of the water to breathe, and its compressed shell
creating a stream-lined silhouette that makes it a brilliant and fast swimmer. The Ganges soft-
shelled turtle has a round to oval, smooth upper shell (carapace), which is olive or green in
85
colour with a yellow border. The limbs are also green, while the shell on the underside of the
turtle’s body is grey to cream. It has a broad head, with several black stripes running from the
centre towards the sides. Juvenile Ganges soft-shelled turtles can be identified by the dark eye-
shaped markings and rows of round bumps that adorn the shell.
154. Despite small size, this turtle is termed as voracious and skilled predator. They feed in
groups. The omnivorous Ganges soft-shelled turtle spends more time eating aquatic plants and
a large variety of smaller animals, such as fish, molluscs, insects, amphibians, and waterfowl.
Animal carcasses, which are frequently dumped in the rivers it inhabits, are also fed upon,
resulting in this turtle being called a ‘waterlogged vulture’.
155. Range. The Ganges soft-shelled turtle is found in the Ganges, Indus and Mahanadi river
systems of Pakistan, northern India, Bangladesh and southern Nepal (Figure 49). It is
considered Endangered in Bangladesh and Vulnerable in India which is its main range state.
156. General Habitat and Ecology. This turtle inhabits deep rivers, streams, large canals,
lakes and ponds, with a bed of mud or sand. It tends to prefer areas where the water is turbid.
They are also known to enjoy sun bathing in sand bars.
tle
157. Habitat and Ecology within the Project area. While the turtle is known to be found
along the entire Ganga river, according to local experts from ZSI and Patna University, the flood
plains of the Raghopur diara which get inundated every monsoon is prime habitat for the turtles
as they enjoy basking in the sun in the sandy areas and also use it for breeding.
158. Population distribution. There is no data on population estimates of the turtle.

According to local wildlife experts of ZSI and Patna University large numbers of the turtle can be
seen along the Ganga river including the project influence area. The turtle is considered a
delicacy and extensively caught by fishermen for commercial purposes. Local wildlife experts
state that the reason why it is listed under schedule I of the Wildlife Protection Act of India is
mainly because of the high risk in rapid decline of its population due to excessive commercial
catching. Currently the turtle is still widely found in the Ganges, Indus and Mahanadi river
systems and according to IUCN (http://www.iucnredlist.org/details/39618/0 ) about 30 - 40 tons
of the turtle meat is traded in East Asian markets. Considering this it is likely that the project
influence area has far less than 10% of the total population of the turtle.
86
159. Seasonal activities. Mating usually takes place in shallow waters during the monsoon
season. This is followed by nesting between January and May, although there is a peak in
activity between December and January. The female burrows into a sandy river banks, digging
a flask-shaped nest cavity into which is laid a clutch of between 8 and 47 eggs. Incubation lasts
for between 251 and 310 days and the hatchlings emerge around July.
160. Threats: As stated above the main threat to this turtle species is food trade. Turtles are
being captured for their meat, and their shells are also sold in the market. Pollution is also a
significant problem in the rivers inhabited by turtles.
Figure 49: Distribution Map of Nilssonia Gangetica (Source: IUCN Red List)
161. Source of data above: Source of data above: 1). Asian Turtle Trade Working Group.
2000. Nilssonia gangetica. The IUCN Red List of Threatened Species 2000:
e.T39618A10251627. http://dx.doi.org/10.2305/IUCN.UK.2000.RLTS.T39618A10251627.en.
Downloaded on 28 October 2015. 2) The Gangatic Dolphin and Action Plan for its Conservation
in Bihar (2013) prepared by Dr. R.K. Sinha for Department of Environment & Forest,
Government of Bihar.
162. Conclusions on presence of critical habitat according to ADB SPS. The turtle is
classified as “vulnerable” under IUCN and hence does not trigger any criteria for critical habitat
under the ADB SPS and IFC PF 6 guidance. None of the remaining 5 criteria for critical habitat
under the ADB SPS and IFC PF 6 is triggered. Therefore it can be concluded that the
project area is not a critical habitat for the Ganges softshell turtle.
C. Socio-Economic Environment
1. Land Use
163. Major portion of the land use is under agriculture. The land use pattern of the study area
along the proposed project, based on satellite imagery of 2013 is tabulated in Table 36. The
land use in the study area is pre-dominantly Ganga river followed by agriculture land.
87
Table 36: Land Use Pattern based on Satellite Imagery (Year 2013)
Sl. No. Class % of the Study Area
1. Agriculture 30.55
2. Settlements area 02.45
3. Horticulture & Plantation 05.10
4. Land not used for agriculture 01.14
5. Water bodies (river/drain/pond/tank/well) 60.76
Total 100
2. Demographic Features
164. Bihar is a land-locked state in the Eastern part of the country with a population of about
82.9 million with more than 90 percent of the population living in the rural areas. The human
population density is 880 persons/km2 compared to 325 persons/km2 for the entire country. Sex
ratio is 921 against the 933 in the country. The demographic feature of Bihar is unique in that
there are many recognized tribes, which inhabit mostly the remote areas and each with distinct
culture, ethos, and traditional knowledge systems. The minority groups in the state namely
Bathudi, Binjhia, Binjhal, Birhor, Birjia, Chik Baraik, Paharia Korwa, and Santal. The majority of
the people survive on subsistence economy based mainly on the agriculture, supplemented with
forest produces, animal husbandry, crafts/handloom, etc.
165. In 2011, Vaishali district had a population of 3,495,021 with a population density of 1,717
people per sq. km. Of the total 1,844,535 were male and 1,650,486 female. In 2011, Patna
district had population of 5,838,465 with a population density of 1,823 people per sq. km. Of the
total 3,078,512 were male and 2,759,953 were female. Further populations details of the two
districts, their sub districts and villages falling in the project area are provided in Table 39 and
Table 40. The sex ratio in Vaishali was 895 females per 1000 in 2011. The average national sex
ratio in India is 940 females per 1000 males as per the census 2011. For children it was 904
girls per 1000 boys. The sex ratio in Patna was 897 females per 1000 male under the census of
2011. For children it was 909 girls per 1000 boys in 2011. The average literacy rate of Vaishali
was 66.60% in 2011 in comparison to only 50.49 in 2001. The male and female literacy rates
were 75.41% and 56.73% respectively. The average literacy rate of Patna in 2011 was 70.68%
compared to 62.92% of 2001. Male and female literacy was 78.48% and 61.96% respectively.
166. Agriculture and livestock rearing is the mainstay of the local people in the project area. It
plays a significant role with respect to both generation of employment and share in the GDP. In
addition the local communities in the project area also rely on allied agriculture, small scale
businesses and small scale industries for employment as labourers.
88
Table 37: The Demography of Villages in project area of Core Zone of Vaishali district
Sub District Bidupur Bidupur Bidupur Bidupur Bidupur Raghopur Raghopur Raghopur Raghopur Raghopur
Jafrabad Himat pur Jamalpur Saifabad Rustampur Chak Khajauta Kazipatti Ragho pur Madhurapur
Dih Diara Chak Sikandar Chaturang
Name of village
Shanker
Ganga Pra
Number of household 422 167 55 36 2478 570 449 109 60 841
Total Population 2407 940 281 237 14211 3243 2208 525 363 4721
Total Male 1266 492 146 144 7650 1724 1162 253 188 2506
Total Female 1141 448 135 93 6561 1519 1046 272 175 2215
Children 475 203 72 73 3186 572 413 90 79 789
Schedule caste 239 154 0 29 3127 714 490 301 170 1766
Schedule tribe 1 1 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 1
Literate 573 349 112 62 4636 2011 1281 319 148 2433
Illiterate 1834 591 169 175 9575 1232 927 206 215 2288
Total Worker 683 229 74 63 3904 857 637 146 95 1365
Cultivator 191 91 27 29 1331 51 184 32 1 303
Agriculture labor 225 81 28 27 1401 271 336 55 49 651
Household worker 12 4 1 0 85 21 0 0 0 16
Other Worker 59 11 3 2 498 306 94 21 21 143
Non Worker 1724 711 207 174 10307 2386 1571 379 268 3356
Source: Census of Indiia
89
Table 38: The Demography of Villages in project area of Core Sone of Patna district
Sub District Fatwah Fatwah Fatwah
Town/Village census code 246135 246138 246138
Name of village Jethuli Daulatpur Kutubpur
Number of household 2044 119 0
Total Population 12769 728 0
Total Male 6791 387 0
Total Female 5978 341 0
Children 2702 141 0
Schedule caste 1924 0 0
Schedule tribe 19 0 0
Literate 6188 399 0
Illiterate 6581 329 0
Total Worker 3284 268 0
Cultivator 397 104 0
Agriculture labour 1183 70 0
Household worker 52 0 0
Other Worker 1278 28 0
Non Worker 9485 460 0
Source: Census of India
90
3. Agriculture and Forestry
167. Agriculture forms the backbone of the national economy and despite resolute
industrialization in the last five decades; agriculture holds a place of pride in Bihar state. About
half the area is under cultivation, but pressure of population has pushed cultivation to the
furthest limits, and little remains to be developed. The transitional nature of the climatic zone is
reflected in the cropping pattern, which shows a mixture of wet and dry crops. Rice is
everywhere the dominant crop, but corn (maize), wheat, barley, gram, oilseeds, and pulses
(legumes) are important supplementary crops. Sugarcane is grown in a fairly well-defined belt in
the northwest. Jute, a crop of the hot, moist lowlands, is found only in the easternmost plain
districts. There are three harvests in a year: bhadai, dominated by corn that is sown from May to
June and gathered in Bhado (August to September).Second is aghani, consisting primarily of
rice sown in mid-June and gathered in the month of Aghan (December).Third is rabi made up
largely of wheat that ripens in the plains in spring. Figure 3.2b show the agricultural map of the
Bihar State.
168. In 2005-06 the State is at present producing about 8.59 million tones of food grains
(comprising Cereals 1.41 million tones and 0.45 million tones of Pulses) and about 0.14 million
tones of total Oilseed. In the production level the State was contributing (about 4.12% food
grains in 2005-06, 4.14 % Cereals and 3.36 % Pulses) in National Kitty. The Contribution in
national oilseed Production is about 0.5%. As far as Jute & Mesta is concerned Bihar stands
second after West Bengal producing 1.39 million tonnes. Fruits and vegetables are extensively
grown. Muzaffarpur and Darbhanga are particularly noted for mangoes, bananas, and litchi
fruits. The potato-growing area near Bihar Sharif, in Patna district, produces the best variety of
seed potato in India. The forest occupies 0.6 million hectares of the geographical area of the
state whereas the cultivated area is about 6.2 million ha.
4. Fisheries
169. The state has potential for fisheries by enhancement of ponds, irrigation reservoirs, other
water resources, the rivers. The fish production for the year 2004-2005 was 267510 tonnes.
The important fishes commonly found in the region’s plain and river basins are Catla catla,
Labeo rohita, Labeio calbase, Cirrihinus mirigale, L. Bata, M.aor, W.attu, B. bagrius,
Heteropneuptus fonilis, Notopterus nontopterus, C. gaehua, and C. striatus,etc.
170. Fishing in the project influence area takes place on an ad hoc basis with no specific
regular fishing locations. Amongst the 20 communities that live 10km upstream and
downstream of the bridge location, it is estimated there are approximately 200 fishermen.
5. Transportation
171. Transportation system is a key factor in the socio-economic development of any state. In
comparison with other Indian states, Bihar is poorly served with transport and communications
facilities. State has about 21.77 km of roads per 100 sq. km, as against the national average of
38.33 km per 100 sq. km. The road network is seriously deficient both in the quantum network
connectivity as well as in riding quality of the roads, mainly the state highways, district roads
and village roads. Important railway junctions include Patna, Gaya, Mugalsarai, Muzaffarpur,
Bhagalpur, Samastipur, Katihar, and Barauni. Also connecting the state with other parts of India
are airports at Patna, Gaya and Bhagalpur as well as several national highways.
6. Mineral Resources
91
172. The most of mineral belt i.e. about 90% of the important minerals was taken away by
Jharkhand from Bihar after its separation. Still some more important minerals are located in the
state which are not only useful for the state but also has become important source of revenue
for the state. There are reserves of important deposits of Limestone, Purite, Magnetite, Mica,
Chinaclay, Soapstone, Gold, Slate, Felspar, Galena, Sandstone, Saltpetre, etc.
7. Industrial Situation
173. Bihar is not so enriched with the resources for the industries and with a few scanty
industries is located in the state. Some of the industries of the state are of sponge iron, oil
refinery, forging, fertilizers, jelly filled communication cables, watch factory, fruit processing, bulk
drugs, etc. One factory to be mentioned which is old and renowned rail wagon manufacturing
plant, the Arthur Butler & Co, at Muzaffarpur. The major industrial units in the state are of sugar
mills which are scattered throughout Bihar. Other types of mills are of rice and edible oil.
8. Aesthetic and Tourism
174. The state having the vast historical background is one of the hot tourist destinations of
country. Bodhgaya is one of the ancient places in Bihar having a status of World Heritage Site
and an important place of pilgrimage, has a number of monasteries, some of them established
by Buddhists of Japan, Thailand, Myanmar, Sri Lanka etc. Vaishali was one of the earliest
republics in the world (6th century BC).It was here that Buddha preached his last sermon.
Vaishali, birthplace of Lord Mahavira is also Sacred to Jains. Rajgir, 19 kms from Nalanda, was
the ancient capital of Magadha Empire and is one of the important tourist centres in India.
9. Cultural Resources
175. The History of Bihar as a region is very rich and eventful. This is due to the fact that
Bihar was a center of power, learning and culture. It has been a cradle of Indian civilization and
the birth place of two of the major religions that have emanated from India: Buddhism and
Jainism. Festivals and cultural activities are being celebrated throughout the year in the state.
There is one Hindu festival that is uniquely Bihari, and that is the festival of Chhath. This is
observed mostly by the people of North Bihar. It is devoted to the worship of the Sun God.
Specific events are being organised by different communities in different places in Bihar
throughout the year such as Madhushravani (Social festival giving a message how to weave
together religion and tradition in day-to-day life) in Mithilanchal, Bihula festival (family welfare) in
Bhagalpur district, Sama-Chakeva (brother-sister relationships) in Mithila, etc. A huge fair is
held at Sonepur which is a confluence point of the River Ganga & river Gandak in Kartik
Poornima which is the largest fair of its kind in the world, for it is a fair especially for the trade of
animals. Cattle, horses, camels and elephants can be seen in large numbers. It attracts a huge
number of people, not only from all over Bihar, but also from other parts of India and foreign
countries
176. Bodhgaya is one of the most important and sacred Buddhist pilgrimage center in the
world. It was here under a banyan tree, the Bodhi Tree, Gautama attained supreme knowledge
to become Buddha, the Enlightened One and a temple was erected there known as Mahabodhi
Temple, a World Heritage Site. Apart from this, there are other ancient sites in Vaishali like
Ashoka Pillar during Emperoer Ahoka, Bawan Pokhar Temple of Pala Period, and Bhudha
Stupas containing ashes of Gautam Bhudha. Rajgir is also one of the most important historical
place housing a large number of ancient monuments like Jarasandh ka Akhada believed to be
at the time of Mahabharata, Jivakameavan Gardens, Ajatshatru Fort, Cyclopean Wall, Shanti
92
Stupa, Sonbhandar Caves, Bimbisar Jail, Jain Temples, etc. Most of the monuments are of
during the period of Gautam Bhudha. Another important historical center is Nalanda where the
ruins of the world's most ancient university lies and came to light during 5th-12th centuries.
Nalanda was one of the world's first residential universities and was considered an architectural
masterpiece. Another marvel is the Kesariya Stupa being the highest Stupa found in the country
with a height of about 104” from the base and believed to be the World’s largest Stupa.
177. There are some historical places along the project road but beyond the project influence
area. However, there are few religious structures i.e. temples, shrines located within corridor of
project. Dargah at Km 0.050, Mazaar at Km 0.275 and Km 13.150, Temples at Km 0.425,Km
12.900, Km 13.250, Km 36.925 ,Km 37.400 and Km 113.125 which all have religious
significance and are likely to be affected. However, these will not be disturbed due to
improvement work.
10. Energy and Electric Power Potential
178. The state is well endowed with potential hydroelectric power. Main hydroelectric projects
are Kosi Hydel Power Station, Eastern Gandak Canal, Sone Eastern Link Canal and Sone
Western Link Canal. The other small hydel projects in the state are Agnoor and Delabagh and
Nasirganj.
179. Installed power capacity of Bihar is 540 MW, of which 320 MW is produced from Barauni
Thermal Power Station and 220 MW from Muzaffarpur Thermal Power Station. As on today, the
installed generating capacity of Bihar State Electricity Board in terms of its Thermal and Hydro-
Electrical plants exceeds 559.2 MW. Per capita electricity consumption in the state is 141 Kwh.
11. Presence of sensitive receptors such as schools/colleges/health

centres/ hospitals
180. The list of sensitive receptors present along the project alignment is given in following
Table 39. There is no sensitive receptors falling in the project alignment, however, project
alignment is passing nearby the Girls Middle School at village Majlishpur.
Table 39: List of Sensitive Receptors along the Project Road

S. No Name of Village Properties side Offset in (m)
1 Majlishpur Girls Middle School Right 5.50
D. Socio-Economic Profile of Project Affected Person
1. Social Categories of the DPs
181. The social stratification of the project area shows that the dominance of other backward
caste (OBC) population with 1335 (83.75%) households followed by higher caste with 186
(11.67%), scheduled caste (SC) population with 72 (4.52%) households. There is only one
household belong to scheduled tribe community is being affected by the project. The detail of
social grouping in the project area is presented in the Table 40.
Table 40: Social Categories of the DPs

Sl. No. Description of the Caste No. of Households % age
1 Scheduled Caste 72 4.52
2 Scheduled Tribe 1 0.06
93
Sl. No. Description of the Caste No. of Households % age

3 Other Backward Caste 1335 83.75
4 Higher Caste 186 11.67
Total 1594 100.00
2. Number of DPs
182. There are 18171 DPs in total being affected by the project which includes 10549
(58.05%) males and 7622 (41.95%) females. The average household size is 11.4 and the sex
ratio among the DPs is 723. The average household size is quite large because of many joint
families and joint ownership. The details of DPs being affected in the project are presented in
the Table 41.
Table 41: Number of DPs

Sl. No. Categories of DPs No. of DPs % age
1 Male 10549 58.05
2 Female 7622 41.95
Total 18171 100.00
3. Vulnerable Households being Affected in the Project
183. According to project census survey there are 1007 households enumerated as
vulnerable households as per the definition provided in the RF. In this project vulnerable group
includes 72 SC households, 1 ST households, 56 women headed households, 41 households
headed by physically handicapped persons and 770 Below Poverty Line (BPL) households. As
per the latest Planning Commission, Government of India estimate, any person having monthly
per capita consumption and expenditure (MPCE) of Rs. 77817 in rural area and Rs. 923 in urban
area of Bihar is considered to be living below poverty line. Based on this calculation of poverty
line figure, average annual household MPCE in rural Bihar is Rs. 46680. There are 77
households not falling under any other category but earning less than the average MPCE are
also considered as vulnerable households in the project. The vulnerable household details are
presented in the Table 42
Table 42: Vulnerable Households being affected

Sl. No. Vulnerable Categories No. of Households % age
1 Scheduled Caste Households 72 7.08
2 Scheduled Tribe Households 1 0.10
3 Women Headed Households 56 5.51
4 PH Headed Households 41 4.03
5 Below Poverty Line Households 770 75.71
Households below Minimum Precipitate
6 Income 77 7.57
Total 1017 100.00
17
Source: Press Note on Poverty Estimates, 2011-12, Government of India, Planning Commission, July
2013
94
4. Annual Income Level of the Affected Households
184. There are only 77 (4.20%) households earning less than the official poverty level i.e. Rs.
46,680/- per year. There are 32 households (2.01%) having an average monthly income of
above Rs. 46680 and Rs. 50000. The survey reveals that 515 (32.31%) households are earning
above 50,000 and below 75,000, 347 households are earning above 75000 and below 100000
and another 620 (38.90%) households are annually earning more than Rs. 1,000,00 which is a
good economic indicator of their standard of living. The average income level of households in
the project area is summarized in the Table 43.
Table 43: Annual Income Level of the Affected Households

Sl. No. Annual Income Categories in (Rs) No. of Households % age
1 Above 10000 and Below 20000 4 0.25
2 Above 20000 and Below 30000 5 0.31
3 Above 30000 and Below 46680 58 3.64
4 Above 46680 and Below 50000 32 2.01
5 Above 50000 and up to 75000 515 32.31
6 Above 75000 and up to 100000 347 21.77
7 Above 100000 620 38.90
8 Not Responded 13 0.82
Total 1594 100.00
5. Number of DPs considered as Separate family as per LA Act
185. There are various categories of DPs as summarized in the Table 44 are treated as
separate family under Right to Fair Compensation in Land Acquisition and Resettlement Act-
2013.
Table 44: Number of DPs considered as Separate family as per LA Act

Sl. No. Categories of APs No. of APs % age
1 Unmarried Son > 30 years 659 56.71
2 Unmarried Daughter/Sister > 30 years 146 12.56
3 Physically/Mentally Challenged Person 296 25.47
4 Divorcee/Widow 61 5.25
Total 1162 100.00
6. Educational Status of DPs
186. The educational status of DPs reveals that there are still 31.62% DPs are illiterate.
Among the DPs, 20.42% are above matric 10.07% are graduate and 1.41 % are above
graduate. This data excludes the children below 0 to 6 years. The gender segregated details of
educational status of DPs are presented in the Table 45.
Table 45: Educational Status of DPs

S. N. Educational status Male %age Female %age Total %age
1 Illiterate 2117 22.32 3066 44.40 5183 31.62
2 Literate 1248 13.16 899 13.02 2147 13.10
3 Up to middle 1557 16.41 931 13.48 2488 15.18
4 Below metric 857 9.03 487 7.05 1344 8.20
5 Metric 2317 24.43 1030 14.92 3347 20.42
95
S. N. Educational status Male %age Female %age Total %age

6 Graduate 1205 12.70 446 6.46 1651 10.07
7 Above graduate 185 1.95 46 0.67 231 1.41
Total 9486 100.00 6905 100.00 16391 100.00
7. Occupational Status of DPs
187. The occupational pattern of DPs excluding children below 6 years, reveals that 26.17%
DPs are engaged in agriculture. Among other categories, 6.71% DPs are laborers, 4.67%
engaged in service and 2.13% doing various business. The details of occupational status of
DPs are summarized in the Table 46.
Table 46: Occupational Status of DPs

S. N. Occupational status Male %age Female %age Total %age
1 Service 641 7.26 74 1.14 715 4.67
2 Business 322 3.65 5 0.08 327 2.13
3 Agriculture 3921 44.43 88 1.36 4009 26.17
4 Study 2817 31.92 1375 21.17 4192 27.36
5 Housewife 0 0.00 4918 75.73 4918 32.10
6 Labour 1006 11.40 22 0.34 1028 6.71
7 Unemployed 33 0.37 5 0.08 38 0.25
8 Professional 85 0.96 7 0.11 92 0.60
9 Old/Inactive 893 10.12 589 9.07 1482 9.67
Total 8825 100.00 6494 100.00 15319 100.00
8. Project Impact on Indigenous People
188. As per the 2011 census of India survey, total ST population of Bihar is about 1.28% of
total State population. Since the project road is close to the State Capital and falling mostly
semi-urban area, the presence of ST population is less as only 1 household is getting affected.
The ST people affected under the project is considered vulnerable and special provision made
in the entitlement matrix of RP.
9. Project impact on Women
189. There are 56 women headed households affected in the project. The negative impacts of
the sub-project on female-headed households will be taken up on a case-to-case basis and
assistance to these households will be treated on a priority basis. During disbursement of
compensation and provision of assistance, priority will be given to female-headed households.
Additionally, women headed households are considered as vulnerable and provision for
additional assistance has been made in the entitlement of the RP. Provision for equal wage and
health safety facilities during the construction will be ensured by the EA.
96
V. IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES
A. Construction Activities and Rating of Impacts
190. This Chapter presents the environmental assessment process and planning undertaken
by BSRDC in addressing the environmental impacts and risks associated with the construction
of the new Bihar Over Ganga Bridge. The relationship between the three project phases (pre-
construction, construction and post-construction & operation) and components and the
environment established to identify anticipated environmental impacts are given below in table
47. Although very limited information on the construction methodologies and components area
available under the EPC procurement modality, general construction activities typical of a major
bridge construction have been considered. Each anticipated environmental impact was
assessed for significance based in intensity, duration, and scope. Mitigation measures were
identified to reduce the significant adverse impacts including residual effects.
Table 47: Stage wise construction activities

No. Activities
I. Pre-construction Stage
PC1 Site mobilization and construction of temporary facilities - land clearing, installation of
construction trailers, construction camp sites18, electricity and other utility connections,
perimeter fencing, establishment of storage areas, waste disposal, pre-fabricated
components, installation of production equipment (hot mix, concrete batching, rock
crusher, casting), launch and assembly areas, temporary access roads, parking areas
PC2 Establishment of management system for traffic, fishing and river navigation
PC3 Relocation and protection of public utility infrastructure
II. Construction Stage
C1 Land clearing which includes surface stripping, topsoil storage, excavation, earthwork
and other land preparation activities for the approach roads on the northern and
southern side and the diara area
C2 Construction of infrastructure on land: 1) main bridge approach embankments and
viaducts with 6 lane divided carriageway, 2) connecting road to Diara portion is a 4-
lane divided carriageway, 3) bridge connecting approach roads (about 1.5km at Kachhi
Dargah – southside and 9km at Bidupur – northside) and associated structures, 4) 2
ROB, 5) 8 underpasses and bridges, 6) 2 junctions, and, 7) 2 Toll Plazas.
C3 Construction of works in aquatic environment: Bridge piers and installation of bridge
substructure and superstructure
C4 Management of construction wastes, excavated material and hazardous materials
C5 Transportation of construction materials from quarries and borrow areas
C6 Operation of construction camp sites having: worker camps, batching plants, hotmix
plants, service yards, stockpiles
C7 Management of traffic, fishing and river navigation
III. Post -construction and Operation Stage
O1 Deconstruction of structures: dismantling of steel and concrete structures, offices, and
crushing of debris
O2 Demobilization of work site like dismantling of all temporary facilities, restoration of
storage and all other areas
O3 Maintenance works including works in the river
18
As per the current project plans 2 construction camps are planned to be established. One in Raghopur
diara and one on the Vaishali side in the north.
97
191. As the project will be implemented based on engineering, procurement, and construction
(EPC) modality a number of wide range on construction alternatives like the bridge design
remains to be decided and from which a host of construction activities and materials
permutations will be assessed. Although this limits the scale and scope of impact assessment, it
also allows a unique opportunity to integrate mitigation and enhancement principles in the
design phase of the project to avoid and reduce adverse environmental impacts. Additional
studies are also required from the EPC contractor to refine the analysis of certain impacts.
Nonetheless, the principal environmental impacts from the construction of the new bridge
across the Ganga are as follow:
a) Physical Environment: Soil, ground and surface water, and ambient air quality.
Soil and ground contamination from oil and lubricant spillage and measures must
be implemented to immediately avoid the dispersion in the environment. Most of
the construction activities will occur near or in the Ganga river and measures and
the control of suspended solid and other contaminants must be implemented.
Movement of large volume of equipment; emissions from production equipment
like hot mix, cement batching, welding yard, casting yard, and rock crusher),
unpaved road travel will cause deterioration of the air quality however the
intensity, duration, and scope will be further defined once the supply and
transport of materials are defined by the contractor. Measures must also be
implemented to control greenhouse gas emissions from the construction
activities in addition to national ambient air quality parameters. An emergency
response plan will be prepared and implemented by the EPC contractor to
contain the harmful effects of accidents and malfunctions of construction
equipment and machineries.
b) Biological Environment: The project site is known to serve as habitat for the
endangered and nationally protected Gangetic Dolphin, several turtle species,
common birds, including migratory birds and also be the migration route for the
critically endangered gharial. Fishing activities take place on an ad hoc basis
along the river in the project influence area. Measures must be undertaken to
ensure unimpeded migration of the Gangetic Dolphin and gharial and
construction activities and infrastructures do not lead to the reduction in their
population. During construction and de-commissioning phases, temporary and
permanent structures along the river banks, river, and diara could affect fish
habitat, migratory birds, turtles, and other animals through disruption of normal
activities, deterioration and loss of habitat.
c) Human Environment: The main impacts are noise, traffic particularly near the
approaches in Patna-Bakhtiyarpur, Rail-over-Bridge in Patna-Mokama main line,
Mehnar junction, and the Hajipur-Samastipur main line. The surrounding sound
environment will deteriorate from the bridge construction and later during
operation. A noise management program will be implemented by the EPC
contractor and BSRDC to comply with the GoI and Word Bank EHS guideline.
Withstanding all these anticipated impacts, the effects to the human environment
are considered as not significant if the mitigation measures are implemented.
192. To ensure the EPC meets the GoI, and ADB environment safeguard requirements,
BSRDCL will put in place a management system where: i) the contractor will be required to
conduct additional detailed assessments such as on hydrology and others as enumerated in the
EMP attached to the bidding documents, ii) the contractor will be required to update the EMP
98
and EMoP in coordination with BSRDCL and Safeguards officers in the PIU and the
environmental management team of the Project Management and Authority Engineer (PMAE)
(Construction Supervision Consultant), and iii) third party review of the updated EMP and EMoP
will be conducted by the External Monitor for Environment Safeguards. The environmental
management system will ensure that the mitigation measures and performance objectives set in
the assessments are strictly observed, with clear accountabilities where necessary.
193. During pre-construction, construction, post-construction & operation including

demobilization similar types of environmental impacts are expected to occur, however, the
corresponding intensity, location, and scale will vary. To determine the significance of the
environmental impact, the level of disruption to a particular environmental component was
assessed on 3 aspects accounting for changes in the nature and characteristics of the
environment, temporal scale and physical area of impact. This is further elaborated in table 48
below:
Table 48: Rating of Impacts
Low Medium High
Characteristic Impact causes no Average impacts that cause Severe impact causes
(Quality change in change in certain a complete change in
dimension) characteristics of local characterisistics of the local the local environment
environment environment
Temporal Impact is short lived Impacts are temporary and Permanent impacts
scale and effects disappear experienced only during that are irreversible
(Time immediately construction stage and changes are
dimension) permanent
Area of impact Impact is limited and Impact is localized when Impact is regional and
(Spatial affects only a part of affects are felt in the entire effects are felt beyond
dimension) the Project influence project influence area the project influence
area area
B. Anticipated Environmental Impacts
194. In the construction of the Ganga Bridge, the following environmental impacts are
anticipated:
a) Encroachment on private lands and demolition of structures

b) Disruption of recreational and transport related activities across the Ganga River
including its immediate banks
c) Loss of vegetation
d) Disturbance of faunal habitat in Raghopur diara
e) Disturbance of Ichthyofauna and habitats
f) Impacts on endangered and protected faunal species
g) Deterioration of air quality
h) Increase in noise and disturbance
i) Deterioration of surface water quality
j) Deterioration of groundwater quality
k) Deterioration of soil and sediment quality
l) Disruption of road and rail traffic
m) Disruption of water traffic on the Ganga river
n) Hydrological, sedimentation and erosion risks
o) Health, safety and hygiene of construction workers
p) Landuse and social Impacts
99
q) Impacts related to road safety
195. Encroachment on private lands, buildings, and Community Property Resources

(CPRs). Establishment of construction camp sites with storage yards, worker camps, batching
plants, casting yards, service area etc. along with access roads may require temporary
encroachment of private properties during pre-construction activities PC1 and PC3.
Construction activities C1 and C2 will require acquisition of private land for the access roads on
the northern and southern end of the bridge as well as in the diara. 6 CPRs will also be
impacted under activity C1 and C2. Activities C2, C4, C5, O1 and O2 may cause damage to
neighboring lands near excavation sites, soil compaction and vibration from movement of heavy
equipment and machineries and overall dirtying of the immediate environment surrounding all
construction activities. Associated environmental impacts from these activities are expected to
be low, temporary, and localized impacts. However land acquisition and impacts on structures
and CPRs will be permanent. Compensation and relocation will be carried out in accordance
with provisions given in the resettlement plan (RP). The EPC Contactor will minimize the
encroachment of detours on private lands and any temporary use or encroachment will be
supported by a written agreement and with the land/structure owner consistent with the
provisions in the resettlement plan. BSRDC will facilitate the availability of all relevant maps
showing all underground utilities. Vibration monitoring shall be implemented by the EPC
Contractor to ensure that no damage to nearby structures (within 100m of construction zones).
A baseline condition survey shall be performed by the EPC contractor. The following limits will
be observed: i) <25mm/s for residential, commercial, and other buildings; ii) 50 mm/s for water
wells; iii) 5 mm/s near fresh concrete < 24 hours curing; iv) 25 mm/s for concrete >24 hrs but <
72 hours; and v) 50 mm/s >72 hours. The EPC Contractor shall remove all loose materials and
other debris from all streets used by its vehicles on a daily basis. Upon completion of works the
EPC contractor will remove all equipment, materials, scrap, waste, gravel, stones, wood, clear
obstructed water courses, repair or rebuild damage structures such as fences and ensure all
disposal sites are not disfigured and they are in proper shape.
196. Disturbance of tourist, transport, and other commercial activities along the
affected banks of the Ganga River. Preconstruction activities PC1 and PC2 and post-
construction activities O1 and O2 will have low, temporary, and localized impacts on the limited
recreational, local tourist and transport activities along the affected river banks. The Contractor,
unless exceptional cases, will ensure that travel is unimpeded along the Ganga River. During
construction activity C1 is the same, however, during C3 when installation of decks and
construction of bridge abutments, partial or total closures of some transport and commercial
activities may occur which translates to high, temporary, and localized impacts. The BSRDCL
and EPC contractor will inform the affected tourist and transport operators on the extent of
impact, detours, channel markings, and notices through the concerned government authorities.
197. Loss of vegetation. Possible temporary loss of vegetation may occur to accommodate
storage areas, access roads, production facilities, and Raghopur diara during PC1. An estimate
of about 500 trees will need to be removed for the approach roads mainly on the northern side
under activity C1. These trees are mainly fruit and timber species. All trees will be compensated
at 1:10, where 1:2 will be achieved through payment of NPV to the Forestry Department and the
remaining 1:8 will be planted by the contractor beside the access roads and other suitable
plantation areas such as the junctions with the national highways on the two ends of the bridge.
Hence the impacts on this will be average, temporary and limited. All trees to be cut shall be
properly marked by the forest authorities and permission shall be secured prior to cutting. For
trees to be retained by ensuring land and root zones are not damaged and leaf are not
mutilated.
100
198. Disturbance of faunal and avifaunal habitat in Raghopur diara. Several species of
migratory birds, turtles, and resident Nilgai are found in the diara including only one species of
concern, the Gangetic softshell turtle which is listed as vulnerable under IUCN, included in
schedule I of the Wildlife Protection Act of India, and Annex I of CITES. The migratory birds and
turtles are found mostly along the western end of the Raghopure diara which gets inundated
annually. This portion of the diara is an important area used for nesting by the turtles. Impacts
attributed preconstruction activity PC1 are severe, temporary, and localized, as one of the two
proposed construction camps are planned to be established in Raghopur diara. During
construction activities C1, C2 and C6 the anticipated impacts will be severe, temporary, and
localized. During C3, the EPC Contractor will install temporary structures like cofferdams,
jetties, piers which can potentially affect fish and bird habitats, feeding grounds, and shelters.
199. To avoid severe and permanent impacts on the turtles and migratory birds the western
floodplains of the diara will be declared a no-go zone for any construction works. Upon advise
from the Ecological Experts under the PMAE and the External Monitor the EPC contractor
seeking will ensure that no activities will disrupt the avifaunal, faunal, and reptilian habitats
particularly during sensitive breeding and migrating periods. The breeding season for turtles is
known to be before the summer season between January and May. Migratory birds generally
visit the diara during the winter months between November and March. Hunting of any kind will
be prohibited amongst the contractors as per relevant contractual clauses. The EPC contractor
will implement all measures to minimize the disturbance on other mammals and birds in the
diara.
200. Noise from different equipment, vehicles, and human traffic has the potential to disturb
migratory birds, which may cause them to leave or change their flight route until the activities
are over. Staging grounds of birds will be further identified by the External Monitor with advise
from relevant wildlife experts during the detailed engineering design and before the start of
construction activities.
201. Disturbance of Ichthyofauna and their habitat. There can be severe, temporary and
localized impacts on fishes and downstream habitats along the bridge alignment over the
Ganga river during construction activities C1, C2, C3, C6 and C7. Due to increase in runoff from
the soil stripping and clearing along the river bank and diara, excavation of contaminated
backfill which can leach to the aquatic environment and harm fish health, and sediment
resuspension. During post-construction activities O3 anticipated impacts are low, temporary,
and limited as works in the waters may disturb spawning fishes.
202. To minimize impacts on fishes due to sedimentation, no dredging works will be carried
out. The piers will be constructed using a caisson that will not require any hammering or piling.
Hence suspended sediments will be minimal. Siltation and erosion from earthworks near the
river will be controlled through the use of silt traps. All excavated material as well as material
stock piles will be maintained atleast 100m from the edge of the river. No waste water outlets
from construction camps and construction sites will lead directly into the river.
203. Impacts on endangered and protected faunal species. As identified in chapter IV

there are three species of concern in the project influence area: Gangetic Dolphin (Platanista
gangetica), Ganges softshell turtle (Nilssonia gangetica) and Gharial (Gavialis gangeticus). Of
these three species the dolphin is commonly seen in the river section in the project influence
area and many softshell turtles are known to exist within the project influence area. The Gharial
is not a resident species of the project influence area but use the river section in the project
influence area as a migratory route. As discussed in chapter IV (para 134, 148 and 162) the
101
project influence area is not “critical habitat” for all three species mainly because the project
influence area is not a discrete management unit for any of the species and the population of
each species in the project influence area is estimated to be less than 10% of the total global
population.
204. Activities PC1,C1 and C4 will have average, temporary and localized impacts on the
three species. Activities PC2, C7 and O3 can have average, temporary and localized impact. If
no avoidance and mitigation measures are implement activities C3 and C6 can have severe,
permanent and regional impacts.
205. Declaration of the western floodplain of Raghopur diara and river banks as no-go zones
will avoid severe impacts on the turtle. All boats or ferries transporting construction material and
workers will have propeller guards installed to prevent injury and death of dolphins, fishes and
other aquatic fauna. The species at highest risk of being hunted is the Ganges softshell turtle as
it is known to be a delicacy. In addition their eggs which are laid in the sand bars and flood
plains are known to be hunted by people. No hunting of any kind will be permitted and vigilant
monitoring will be carried out amongst construction workers.
206. A clause disallowing piling works for construction of the bridge piers has been included
in the EPC contract. This removes the risk of disturbance and injury to dolphins from piling
which is known to be the main significant impact on dolphins, fishes and other aquatic fauna
during bridge construction. Construction activites in the water will be avoided or minimized
during the breeding season of dolphins known (April to July) to minimize average, temporary
and localized impacts. Construction activities in water will also be avoided the migration season
of the dolphin and gharial.
207. Sound is very important for daily survival of the dolphins due to the following reasons: (i)
it provides information about their environment, (ii) it is used for communication and (iii) it
enables the remote detection of prey. The sounds generated by these animals often extend
beyond the range audible to the human ear. Vocalizations of Dolphins are in the range of 125 to
173 (dB at 1m) for whistles and 218 to 228 (dB at 1m) for clicks. According to studies carried
out on impacts of piling on dolphins19 the threshold peak impulse source pressure for direct
physical trauma in marine mammals is generally considered to be >200 dB. A study on noise
levels generated by different methods of piling show that noise level can range from 152 to 257
db at a distance of 5m to 1000m from the source. Therefore under the project it can be safely
assumed that the noise levels that will be generated by the construction of piers using a
caisson20 inside the water will be far below the threshold peak of >200 db which can cause
trauma to dolphins.
208. An exclusion zone of 500m within construction site maybe established wherein all
construction works will be required to be stopped if any dolphin or gharial is seen within the
zone. Construction works will resume only after the animal has left the exclusion zone. Turtles if
19
JA David Mciwem (2006), Likely sensitivity of bottlenose dolphins to pile-driving noise, Water and
Environmental Journal 20, pp48-54 (http://www.marineconnection.org/docs/Dolphins at Risk-
piledriving.pdf)
20
A structure used in under water work with an airtight chamber open at the bottom containing air with
enough pressure to withstand water
102
seen inside or near the construction area maybe physically moved to safer habitat areas under
the guidance of the External Monitor and/or local wildlife experts21.
209. High noise levels may influence the behavior of these species and they are therefore
likely to avoid the construction areas during the construction period. In order to avoid impacts on
these species, the construction works will be limited within the designated sites allocated to the
contractors. Regular monitoring of the worksite for animals trapped in or in danger will be done
and contractor will take measures to relocate the animal under the supervision and guidance of
the Ecological Experts under the PMAE and External Monitor as well as local wildlife experts.
210. All avoidance, mitigation and enhancement measures proposed to address impacts on
flora, fauna and the three protected species will be further reviewed by the External Monitor
during the detailed design stage. Necessary updates and detailed guidance such as identifying
the exact route and time of migration of the dolphin and gharial; studying the water depth at
which they migrate etc.
211. Deterioration of air quality. During pre-construction stage activities PC1 and PC2,
construction activities C1, C5 and C6, and post-construction O1 and O2 it is anticipated that
there will be average to severe, temporary, and localized impacts on the air quality. Increase in
dust is expected mostly from surface stripping, earthworks and transport of materials.
Excavation, clearing, demolition, exposed soil storage piles and other granular materials are
prone to low, temporary and localized erosion and can lead to airborne dust particularly during
the dry season. The EPC Contractor will stabilize all work areas, particularly side slopes,
immediately after work is completed. All demolished materials will be re-used for backfilling or
recycled (steel and wood) and if residuals are disposed in approved sites. While vegetation has
not fully established on exposed soils, the EPC Contractor will implement temporary erosion
and sedimentation measures to include scarification or harrowing before seeding. Sediment
barriers may also be used. The EPC Contractor will ensure that National Ambient Air Quality
Standards and WB-EHS guidelines for PM10 and PM2.5 are complied with by implementing
suitable measures as per EHS guidelines for air quality. In case of exceedance, the EPC
Contactor will implement measures to include: installation of tarpaulins around the work area
emitting dust, covering piles with geotextile, covering all haul trucks and avoid transporting of
materials across residential areas. All construction vehicles will be required to secure Pollution
Under Control Certificates. Regular sprinkling of water, and temporary paving of haul roads
maybe necessary to minimize dust issues along haul routes. Fires and burning of wastes shall
be strictly prohibited at all times.
212. Fugitive Emissions Modeling During Construction Period involving Unpaved Road
Travel. When a vehicle travels on an unpaved road, the force of the wheels on the road surface
causes pulverization of surface material. Particles are lifted and dropped from the rolling
wheels, and the road surface is exposed to strong air currents in turbulent shear with the
surface. The turbulent wake behind the vehicle continues to act on the road surface after the
vehicle has passed (USEPA AP-42).
213. PM-10 emissions from unpaved road travel was estimated using USEPA equation below
for industrial sites as this closely mimics the condition in a road section under construction.
21
There are many wildlife experts in Patna that are knowledgeable about the behaviour and handling of
wildlife species. Experts met during preparation of the EIA report were Professor R.K Sinha of Patna
University and Dr. Gopal Sharma of the Zoological Survey of India in Patna.
103
214. Where k, a, and b are empirical constants, and
E = size-specific emission factor (lb/VMT)

s = surface material silt content (%)
W = mean vehicle weight (tons)
S = mean vehicle speed (mph)
215. k,a, and b for PM10 are given as 1.5, 0.9, and 0.45. Surface silt was assumed at 21.15%
as provided by R.S. Murthy et. al, (1961)22 while mean vehicle weight was estimated at 20 tons.
The PM10emissions during construction was computed as follow:
E = 1.5(21.15/12)0.9 x (20/3)0.45
= 2.53 kg/VKT
216. Assuming an average speed of construction vehicles at 30 km/hr and 20 construction

vehicle travelling a 1-kilometer active construction front, the emission rate was computed at
0.0004216 g/s-m2. Using the USEPA SCREEN 3 air dispersion model, under worst-case
scenario the maximum dust concentration from unpaved road travel is estimated at 16.8 mg/s at
a distance of 70 meters from the road boundary which in a flat terrain will reach 100 ug/m3 at a
distance of 3 kilometeres.
217. The SCREEN 3 model output is provided below.
GANGA BRIDGE UNPAVED ROAD TRAVEL APPROACH ROADS
SIMPLE TERRAIN INPUTS:

SOURCE TYPE = AREA
EMISSION RATE (G/(S-M**2)) = 0.421600E-03
SOURCE HEIGHT (M) = 1.0000
LENGTH OF LARGER SIDE (M) = 100.0000
LENGTH OF SMALLER SIDE (M) = 30.0000
RECEPTOR HEIGHT (M) = 0.0000
URBAN/RURAL OPTION = RURAL
THE REGULATORY (DEFAULT) MIXING HEIGHT OPTION WAS SELECTED.
THE REGULATORY (DEFAULT) ANEMOMETER HEIGHT OF 10.0 METERS WAS ENTERED.
MODEL ESTIMATES DIRECTION TO MAX CONCENTRATION
BUOY. FLUX = 0.000 M**4/S**3; MOM. FLUX = 0.000 M**4/S**2.
*** FULL METEOROLOGY ***
**********************************
*** SCREEN AUTOMATED DISTANCES ***
**********************************
22
R.S. Murthy et. al. (1961). “Genesis and Classification of Some Aluvial Soils in the Ganga River Plain
of Central Uttar Pradesh”, soil samples from the upper soil portions contains 21.15-39.75% silt
104
*** TERRAIN HEIGHT OF 0. M ABOVE STACK BASE USED FOR FOLLOWING

DISTANCES ***
DIST CONC U10M USTK MIX HT PLUME MAX DIR

(M) (UG/M**3) STAB (M/S) (M/S) (M) HT (M) (DEG)
------- ---------- ---- ----- ----- ------ ------ -------
10. 8801. 5 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 9.
100. 0.1366E+05 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 8.
200. 7671. 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
300. 4864. 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
400. 3305. 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
500. 2384. 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
600. 1803. 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
700. 1417. 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
800. 1157. 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
900. 967.9 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
1000. 823.6 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
1100. 714.6 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
1200. 626.9 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
1300. 555.6 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
1400. 496.9 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
1500. 447.9 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
1600. 406.1 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
1700. 370.3 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
1800. 339.4 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
1900. 312.6 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
2000. 289.4 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
2100. 269.7 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
2200. 252.3 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
2300. 236.8 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
2400. 222.8 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
2500. 210.1 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
2600. 198.5 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
2700. 188.0 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
2800. 178.3 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
2900. 169.5 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
3000. 161.5 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
3500. 130.8 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
4000. 109.1 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
4500. 92.94 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
5000. 80.56 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 0.
MAXIMUM 1-HR CONCENTRATION AT OR BEYOND 10. M:

70. 0.1628E+05 6 1.0 1.0 10000.0 1.00 14.
***************************************
*** SUMMARY OF SCREEN MODEL RESULTS ***
***************************************
CALCULATION MAX CONC DIST TO TERRAIN

PROCEDURE (UG/M**3) MAX (M) HT (M)
-------------- ----------- --------- -------
SIMPLE TERRAIN 0.1628E+05 70. 0.
105
***************************************************
** REMEMBER TO INCLUDE BACKGROUND CONCENTRATIONS **
***************************************************
218. Wind erosion from construction materials pile: Dust emissions due to wind erosion
will take place on exposed sand and soil piles in the construction site. This section estimates
the PM10 emissions from sand storages piles that will be established throughout the road
alignment. The general predictive equation below was utilized for this purpose:
Emission factor = k ∑𝑁 𝑛=1(Pi)

Where:
k = particle size multiplier
= 0.5 for particle size <10 µm
N=number of disturbances per year
Pi=erosion potential corresponding to the observed (or probable) fastest mile of wind for
the ith period between disturbances, g/m2
219. The erosion potential of an erodible surface that is frequently disturbed is given as:
P = 58 (u*-ut))2 + 25 (u*-ut*)
Where u* = friction velocity (m/s)

= 0.053 u10+
Where: u10+ is the fastest mile of reference anemometer for period between
Disturbances (m/s)
where: u10+ = u+ {ln(10/0.05)/ln(z/0.005)}
= 9.9 m/s
Where: z = anemometer height, India
= 10m
ut = threshold friction velocity (m/s)
= 0.48 and 0.56 m/s for dry and wet sand23
= 0.21-0.35 (0.28) for dry soil24, for wet soil assumed at 1.5x dry soil or 1.67 m/s
220. Computed friction velocity is 1.33 m/s and the fastest mile based on climatological
extremes during construction period is 8 m/s or 17.88 miles per hour.
221. Discussions with the engineering design consultants indicated a typical conical sand
storage pile height of 22m and base diameter of 60m that is fully disturbed every week. Surface
area was computed as:
S = πr(r2+h2)1/2
= 1,255 m2
23
Masahide, Ishizuka, Masao Mikami, Yutakal Yamada, and Fan Jiang Zeng. (2009). “Threshold Friction
Velocity of Saltation Sand Particle for Different Soil Moisture Condition in the Taklimahan Desert.
Meteorological Society of Japan.
24
N.D. Souza et.al (2013). “Dust emission from different soil types in the northwest and the Indo-Gangetic
Plains of India.”
106
222. The contours of normalized surface wind, us/ur based on wind tunnel studies is provided
in the succeeding Figure. The estimated PM10 emissions based on worst case scenario25 from
pile storage are as follow:
 from dry sand pile, the maximum PM10 ambient concentration will occur 131 meters
away from the pile reaching 121.8 ug/m3 and will continue to disperse and achieved
standard limit of 100 ug/m3 at a distance of 400-500 meters
 if water suppression is provided in the pile, the maximum ground concentration will
decrease to 26.40 ug/m3 at the same distance of 131 m
 from dry soil, maximum PM10 ground concentration will reach 152 ug/m3 at a distance
of 131 m and will disperse to 100 ug/m3 at a distance of 700-800 m
 water the soil pile to suppress dust is effective as the predicted maximum ground
concentration is reduced to 30.28 ug/m3 which is already lower that the national ambient
standard
223. 2,719g and 1,418g per week for dry and wet conditions, indicating that water sprinkling
on the wind- and lee-ward bottom sections of the sand pile can reduce fugitive emissions by
50%. The impact of the fugitive emission to ambient PM10 concentration was estimated using
USEPA SCREEN3. Detailed SCREEN 3 Modelling is shown in Annex 9.
224. Model and the predicted maximum ground concentrations of 0.50 ug/NCM and 0.25
ug/NCM for dry and wet conditions will occur 130m downwind of the storage pile. Both ambient
concentrations are well below the standards and no mitigation measures are required.
25
The highest sustained wind speed was 44 m/s, occurring on April 23; the highest daily mean wind
speed was 7 m/s (April 23); and the highest wind gust speed was 15 m/s (July 22).The windiest
month was May, with an average wind speed of 5 m/s. The least windy month wasNovember, with an
average wind speed of 0 m/s. (https://weatherspark.com/history/33924/2014/Patna-Bihar-India)w and
coupled with a stability classification 4.
107
Figure 50: Contours of normalized surface windspeeds, us/ur (source: USEPA AP-42)
Table 49: Calculation of PM-10 Emissions from Sand Piles

% Pile Surface
ID of Pile Us/Ur
Surface area (m2) Us+ U* U*-Ut (DRY) U*-Ut(WET) Pdry Pwet KPA dry KPA wet g/s dry g/s wet
A 0.9 12 151 39.6 3.564 3.084 3.004 474.5412 448.2929 71,655.73 67,692.23 0.829349 0.783475
B 0.6 48 602 26.4 1.584 1.104 1.024 43.09133 35.21741 25,940.98 21,200.88 0.300243 0.245381
C1+C2 0.2 40 502 8.8 0.176 -0.304 -0.384
Total 1.129592 1.028855
Table 50: Calculation of PM-10 Emissions from Sand Piles

% Pile Surface
ID of Pile Us/Ur
Surface area (m2) Us+ U* U*-Ut (DRY) U*-Ut(WET) Pdry Pwet KPA dry KPA wet g/s dry g/s wet
A 0.9 12 151 39.6 3.564 3.284 1.894 543.41 160.7097 82,054.92 24,267.16 0.94971 0.28087
B 0.6 48 602 26.4 1.584 1.304 -0.086 66.02413 39,746.53 - 0.460029 0
C1+C2 0.2 40 502 8.8 0.176 -0.104 -1.494
Total 1.409739 0.28087
225. Increase in noise and disturbance. During preconstruction activity PC1 anticipated
impacts will have medium, temporary and localized impacts. The movement of equipment and
machinery will have temporary high impact on the sound environment as noise will increase in
the detour roads particularly near community areas of Kacchi Dargah.
226. Table 51 lists the typical construction equipment and average noise level and noise level
range. The deterioration in noise quality at a particular time depends on a number and type of
equipments/machineries, vehicles in operation and the location of receptors. Therefore, the
noise level during construction will vary throughout the day and night. The best and easy
approach is to reduce the effect of noise at recipients’ level. Hence persons working in the
construction places will be required to use ear-plugs. The noise impact on the surroundings
from construction works for bridge end facilities is expected to be within the acceptable level
because of natural noise barriers (trees and plantations) in rural settings of the project area.
Noise barriers will be provided at sensitive locations.
227. Noise quality during the main bridge construction (activity C2 and C6) will deteriorate
due to the mobilization of equipments, construction materials/ vehicles, batch mixing, erection
and casting, and welding. The overall impact of noise to the receptors will depend on the
position of equipments and their cumulative actions. Table 51 presents typical construction
equipments and their generated noise level at 50ft away from source and table 52 presents the
vibration level at 30m away from source. These noise levels are above the GOI permissible
limits however with suitable measures such as vegetative coverage in communities, the noise
impacts from construction equipments is thus expected within the applicable standards.
However, construction workers and others will directly be exposed to these noise levels.
Table 51: Construction Equipment Noise Emission Levels

Equipment Typical Noise Level Equipment Typical Noise Level
dB(A) at 50 ft from dB(A) at 50 ft from
Source * Source
Air Compressor 81 Generator 81
Backhow 80 Pneumatic Tool 85
108
Equipment Typical Noise Level Equipment Typical Noise Level

dB(A) at 50 ft from dB(A) at 50 ft from
Source * Source
Ballast Equilizer 82 Pump 76
Ballast Tamper 83 Rail Saw 90
Compactor 82 Rock Drill 98
Concrete Mixer 85 Roller 74
Concrete Pump 82 Saw 76
Concrete Vibrator 76 Scarifier 83
Crane Derrick 88 Scraper 89
Crane Mobile 83 Shovel 82
Dozer 85 Spike Driver 77
* Table based on EPA Report, measured data from railroad construction equipments taken during
Northeast Corridor Improvement Project and other measured data
Table 52: Vibration Levels due to Construction Equipment and Traffic at 30 m (99 ft)
Source Peak Particle Velocity (mm/sec)
Vibratory Compactor 0.75
Pavement Breaker 1.25
Large Bulldozer 0.275
Heavy Trucks 0.25
Jack Hammers 0.075
Vibration Criteria (Old House, Poor Condition)
 After CHAE 9ASCE 48, pp77-79, 1978) 12.5
 Swiss Standard, Blasting 7.5
 Swiss Standard for Machines and Traffic 3.0-5.0
Source: Report on the Pre-design Studies of Noise and Ground Vibration for NWLRS City of Calgary
(Oct. 1986)
228. Modelling of Noise Emissions during Construction. The anticipated noise impact
of the proposed project at nearby residents/receptors during construction period is
assessed using the Roadway Construction Noise Model (RCNM) of the U.S. Federal Highway
Administration (FHWA). The RCNM was developed as a screening tool to check compliance
with applicable noise limits or standards during operations of heavy equipment during
construction period, thus providing measures on areas likely affected by noise.
229. As provided in the User's Guide of RCNM (FDA Final Report, 2006), RCNM
calculates equivalent noise level (Leq), the "Spec" or "Actual" maximum A-weighted sound level
at 50 feet (LmaxCalc), and L10 as provided below. These calculated values are then compared
with applicable limits.
LmaxCalc:
LmaxCalc = selected_Lmax- 20log(D/50) – shielding
where,
Lmax = "Spec" or "Actual" maximum A-weighted sound level at 50 ft., listed in Table
1 for all pieces of equipment, in dBA
D= distance between the equipment and the receptor, in feet, shielding is the insertion
109
loss of any barriers or mitigation, in dBA

Leq and L10:
Leq = LmaxCalc + 10log (U.F%/100)
where,
U.F% = time-averaging equipment usage factor, in percent
L10 = Leq + 3 dBA adjustment factor
The exceedances with limits or applicable standards as specified by the user are
determined as follows:
Daytime Lmax Exceedance = LmaxCalc – Daytime Lmax Limit

Daytime Leq or L10 Exceedance = Leq or L10 – Daytime Leq or L10 Limit
Evening Lmax Exceedance = LmaxCalc – Evening Lmax Limit
Evening Leq or L10 Exceedance = Leq or L10 – Evening Leq or L10 Limit
Nightime Lmax Exceedance = LmaxCalc – Nightime Lmax Limit
Nightime Leq or L10 Exceedance = Leq or L10 – Nightime Leq or L10 Limit
230. During the construction stage, ambient noise will increase temporarily and intermittently
in the close vicinity of active construction fronts and camps. These activities are expected to
produce noise levels in the range of 97 - 105 dB (A) at a distance of about 5 m from the source.
231. Based on the construction of the similar toll roads the types and number of equipment
needed to operate at the same location at the same time and their corresponding noise levels
are provided in Table below.
Table 53: Noise Level Prediction during Construction

Distance Concrete Batch Plant + Auger Drill Rig +Dump Dump Truck +
(m) Concrete Mixer Truck Truck + Generator + Excavator + Pneumatic
Slurry Plant Tools
Lmax Leq Lmax Leq Lmax Leq
5 103.0 97.8 104.4 102.9 105.2 103.6
10 97.0 91.8 98.3 96.8 99.2 97.6
15 93.5 88.3 94.8 93.3 95.6 94.1
20 91.0 85.8 92.3 90.8 93.1 91.6
25 89.0 83.8 90.4 88.9 91.2 89.6
30 87.4 82.2 88.8 87.3 89.6 88.0
35 86.1 80.9 87.5 86.0 88.3 86.7
40 84.9 79.7 86.3 84.8 87.1 85.5
45 83.9 78.7 85.3 83.8 86.1 84.5
50 83.0 77.8 84.4 82.9 85.2 83.6
55 82.2 77.0 83.5 82.0 84.4 82.8
60 81.4 76.2 82.8 81.3 83.6 82.0
65 80.7 75.5 82.1 80.6 82.9 81.3
70 80.1 74.9 81.4 79.9 82.3 80.7
110
Distance Concrete Batch Plant + Auger Drill Rig +Dump Dump Truck +
(m) Concrete Mixer Truck Truck + Generator + Excavator + Pneumatic
Slurry Plant Tools
Lmax Leq Lmax Leq Lmax Leq
75 79.5 74.3 80.8 79.3 81.7 80.1
80 78.9 73.7 80.3 78.8 81.1 79.5
85 78.4 73.2 79.8 78.2 80.6 79.0
90 77.9 72.7 79.3 77.8 80.1 78.5
95 77.4 72.2 78.8 77.3 79.6 78.0
100 77.0 71.8 78.3 76.8 79.2 77.6
232. Noise during construction phase will be mitigated through the following: i) siting noise
sources away from the communities and sensitive ecosystems, the construction camp including
all plants will be located at least 1 kilometer away from the communities; ii) timing of
construction activities only between 7 am to 6 pm to avoid disturbance to nearby communities at
night; iii) installation of acoustic barriers26 to confine equipment near sensitive sites like schools,
hospitals, and government offices.
233. All construction workers exposed to elevated noise will be provided ear plugs and muffs
exposure limited to no more than 8 hours at greater than 85 dB. And no unprotected ear should
be exposed to a peak sound pressure level of more than 140 dB(C) or average maximum sound
level of 110 dB(A). Hearing protective devices provided should be capable of reducing sound
levels at the ear to at least 85dB(A). Noise monitoring will be carried out by the Contractor and
PMAE to ensure compliance to noise standards. Monitoring will be carried out within the
construction camps and active road construction fronts, while the PMAE will conduct monitoring
in settlement areas, as provided in the Monitoring Plan.
234. The EPC contractor will respect applicable noise day and night time standards and will
implement appropriate measures when exceeded including but not limited to: i) prohibiting work
at night, ii) plan the noisiest work in daytime, iii) prohibit certain types of equipment near noise-
sensitive area, iv) promote quieter working methods like sound proofing and use of electric
equipment, v) use good quality mufflers, vi) ensure equipment in good working order, vii) limit
the power output of equipment to what is required, viii) limit amount of equipment to minimum
required, ix) install noise alarms. The EPC Contractor may use temporary stationary or mobile
noise barriers around site and equipment, install acoustic sheets/curtains, increase distance
between noisy equipment and sensitive noise receptor.
235. Increase in turbidity and pollution of the Ganga river. Construction activities PC1
and C1, C3, C7 and O3 in the bridge approaches and Diara can pose low, temporary, and
regional increase turbidity which will have effect extending several kilometers downstream that
may degrade habitats of fish and migratory birds. To minimize the risk of erosion, the EPC
Contractor will: i) minimize cleared land exposed to the elements in terms of area and duration;
ii) before an area is exposed, inform the BSRDCL on the location, area, duration, and route to
be cleared/stripped; iii) intercept all surface runoff originating from outside the work area and
direct to stabilized vegetated area or sedimentation structures (e.g. geotextile; iv) solidly
stabilize all slopes in compliance to specifications; v) prior to work suspension during high
flood/monsoon, preventive soil stabilization must be completed in accordance with
specifications. The EPC Contractor will not carryout earthwork or excavation along the banks of
the Ganga River during high flood and monsoon season. The EPC Contractor will demonstrate
26
Without gap of material having surface density of at least 10 kg/m2 (World Bank, 2007)
111
that there will be no further increase in the sediment load to the Ganga by installing turbidity
curtain, adjusting working methods, disposing all excavated materials at designated sites,
prohibit earthworks or excavation during high flood and monsoon periods, divert all drainage
ditches towards vegetated area or structures to control sediment, and identifying all sources of
suspended solids. The EPC Contractor will take all necessary precautions to prevent fine
particulate matter from entering the Ganga River. Precautionary measures may include but not
be limited to: i) install turbidity curtains, ii) adjust working methods, iii) identify sources of
suspended solids, iv) install geo-textile, v) avoid damaging to local drainage system, vi) install
berm filters and sediment traps, and vii) settling basins.
236. The risk of leaks from machineries operating (activity C6) near the Ganga river and the
change in water quality may degrade fish habitat, migratory birds, and Gangetic dolphin will
have average, temporary, and localized. To extent possible, heavy equipment may not operate
within 20 meters from the high water mark. All pumped water must meet all applicable GoI
water quality standards as defined in IS 10500 (Annex 3a) prior to use. Further, the EPC
Contactor will: i) maintain all equipment in good working order to avoid leaks, ii) keep vehicle
maintenance log and made available during inspection and monitoring, iii) implement
emergency response to control spill, iv) in case of spills, immediately inform downstream users
that may be affected, and v) immediately stop the source of spill. The release of untreated
wastes, oil, chemicals, and other similar chemicals is strictly prohibited. Parking, refueling,
mechanical inspection and repairs, and storage areas must be located at least 100 meters away
from any water body. Dewatering of excavations and cofferdams must be discharged into a
sedimentation basin27 or natural vegetated area for filtering. The EPC during the entire period of
construction work will monitor the contamination of the receiving water.
237. All post-construction activities will pose low, temporary, and localized impacts due to: i)
site remediation may re-suspend sediment and deteriorate water quality, ii) cuttings and debris
from dismantling of decks may fall on the river, and iii) use of barges and other equipment. The
release of any debris, concrete residues, and damp mortar is prohibited and any accidental
release shall be immediately recovered. The EPC Contractor where possible, will restore
demobilized areas into its natural state using native species and natural slopes equivalent to its
natural state before work began.
238. Deterioration in groundwater quality. Potential environmental impacts during

construction activities PC1, C1, C2, C6, and O2 is low to average, temporary, and localized.
Leachate from excavated contaminated soils, accidental oil and fuel spills, and temporary
storage and disposal at unauthorized sites could affect the groundwater quality. During this
activities, the EPC Contractor will ensure all vehicles and construction equipment are leak free
of oil and fuel. All haul trucks will have basic spill containment equipment and all operators
understand containment procedures. When dewatering excavations, pump out water should
comply with applicable GoI standards prior to final disposal. No disposal of construction waste
will be allowed within 100 meters from any water body. Groundwater will be monitored for
possible contamination from the construction activities.
239. Deterioration of soil and sediment quality. Oil spills during pre-construction activity
PC1 could affect the soil and sediment quality particularly on agricultural land on the Bidupur
side including the diara. However the expected level of impact is low, temporary, and limited.
During construction activity C1, excavation and earthworks will result in soils being exposed
27
Must be designed based on entry and exit flows, cleaned when 50% full, and in case of natural filters
must have graminaceous field, obtain prior approval from land owner,
112
causing average, temporary, and localized environmental impacts. When works shift to the
aquatic environment when the piers for the main bridge are constructed (activity C3) there
maybe remobilization of contaminated sediments causing high, temporary, but localized
environmental impacts and finally the management of wastes and hazardous materials C4 will
have average, permanent, and limited environmental impacts from the temporary storage and
disposal at unauthorized sites will have adverse impacts on the soil quality. Post construction
activities will pose low, permanent to temporary, limited environmental impacts if contaminants
are left on the site during O1. Accidental spills from the transport of materials and equipment.
will be avoided by proper maintenance of all construction vehicles to prevent oil leaks and other
pollutants. No vehicle found to be with leaking oil will be allowed inside the project site and all
vehicle shall maintain a maintenance log. All toxic chemicals and hazardous substances such
as oil, lubricants, paint, bitumen, gasoline, and paints including their containers and
contaminated soil from excavation shall be managed in compliance with the Hazardous Waste
Rule, 1989 and the respective material safety data sheet. The operations area must be free
from all wastes at any time, including empty containers unless they are properly stored in a
designated area.
240. All exposed soil from the site mobilization and increased erosion will require the EPC
Contractor to: i) dispose excavated material at approved landfill sites. Only inert construction
rubble may be disposed of in the authorized pits or recycled for road construction, ii) divert
drainage ditches towards stable vegetated areas or control structures to control sediment like
geotextile, straw bale filters, sediment traps and berms from reaching natural water bodies until
such time the exposed soil is stabilized, iii) other simple engineering measures depending on
the soil type like construction of small channels in the traverse slopes, at the base of the slopes
to collect and control run-off; interceptor ditch at the top of the slope; notching the slope by the
use of tractors following the slope contour and perpendicular to the incline. All organic topsoil
stripped shall be stored for re-use. If contaminated soils were discovered in the work area, the
EPC Contractor will temporarily store on impermeable membrane like geotextile membrane to
prevent leaching and its transport and disposal shall be under the strict supervision of the
SPCB. All pump out water from excavations will be treated to comply with applicable standards
prior final disposal.
241. Disruption of road/rail traffic. During this stage of pre-construction PC2 and
construction activity C5 will cause temporary traffic changes to include lane changes in the
affected national, state, and municipal roads which may experience partial closures as
equipment, materials, and temporary structures are transported or built. Areas to be affected
includes the Patna-Bakhtiyarpur diverted NH-30 lane, Patna-Mokama Main Line Rail-over-
Bridge, Old NH30/Loknayak Path, Mehnar Junction and Chak Sikander, Hajipur-Samastipur
Main Line RoB, and NH-103 to Paswan Chowk (on NH-19). Depending on the EPC Contractor’s
work schedule, mobilization on this area may not occur at the same time. A traffic management
plan will be prepared by the contractor and submitted for approval to the PMAE and BSRDCL.
The management plan will identify alternate traffic routes and temporary parking areas near the
worksite.
242. Temporary structures particularly the materials processing plants will require connection
and maybe relocation of existing lines which will cause temporary closure or diversion of traffic.
This may result to low, temporary, and localized impacts during PC3. The EPC Contractor will,
during and after the work, will take necessary measures to facilitate traffic along the affected
roads including detours through: i) work signage as provided in IRC 055-2014 “Guidelines on
Traffic Management in Work Zones”, ii) always ensure safe passage of road users, and iii)
maintain access to properties along the active construction front, iv) use mobile message signs
113
when necessary. The EPC Contractor will inform the public of the works and detours that will
take place including alternate routes.
243. Disruption of water traffic on the Ganga River. Although the river section is an Inland
Waterway No. 1, the vessel movement and cargo traffic immediately along the project is very
low. Recent cargo movement data for the month of September 2015 (obtained from Inland
Waterway Authority of India, Patna Centre) shows that average monthly vessel traffic in the
river is about 12-15 vessels. In September 2015 vessels traffic consists of 4 tourist vessels, 4
cargos carrying material and chips, 3 empty cargoes, and 3 department (IWAI) vessels. There is
no definite timing or season for the cargo movement in the river. During PC1, Expected impact
will be low, temporary, but regional. However, during the piers, footings, and foundations
construction of the main bridge C3, the anticipated impacts will be high, temporary, and regional
and there may be temporary closure of the water way. The EPC Contractor will secure a
memorandum of agreement or permission from the Inland Waterway Authority of India detailing
partial/full closure requirements, advance notification on affected transport activities, and
coordinate enforcement with concerned authorities.
244. Hydrological, Sedimentation and Erosion Risks. Works on the Ganga River C3, like
construction of piers can change the hydraulic regime and if not planned carefully can have
severe, permanent, and localized impacts. The EPC Contractor before the start of construction
will conduct flow regime modeling and additional detailed hydrological studies to predict the
potential impacts and implement additional mitigation measures to ensure that flow and velocity
conditions will not change significantly to cause adverse impacts on Gangetic dolphin and
gharial migration and stream bank erosion.
245. The Ganga River and its northern tributaries traces their headwaters in the Himalayan
ranges which is relatively young and friable geologic feature, under extreme temperature,
tectonic earthquake prone, exposed to heavy rainfall as its high elevation obstructs the
moisture-rich monsoon winds causing massive and regular landslides and soil erosion. These
factors lead to the high silt content of the Ganga compared to non-Himalayan rivers28 which is
estimated to carry from 485 – 1,600 million tons annually. Any river that carry this volume of
sediment has problem of sediment erosion and deposition attached to it.
246. The Ganges River meanders from the Himalayan ranges and bifurcates into the Hooghly
River, which flows south through Calcutta into the Bay of Bengal, and the Ganga River which
flows east into Bangladesh. From source to sea, the Ganges flows approximately 2500 km and
has a drainage basin of 980,000 km2.
247. Grain-size analyses on the river sediments indicate that the sediment is relatively coarse
based on the sediment that reaches the Bay of Bengal is dominated by silt and clay, with only
15- 20% of the total being fine to very fine sand. These fine grained sediments are suspended
load but larger particles are carried during flood stages. The suspended load of a river carries
the majority of the sediment, while bedload transport accounts for approximately 10% of the
suspended load29.
28
Parua, P.K. (2009). “The Ganga Morphology.” Volume 64 of the series Water Science and Technology
Library pp 35-59.
29
S.K. Rice (2007). “Suspended Sediment Transport In The Ganges-Brahmaputra River System,
Bangladesh. (Thesis)” Office of Graduate Studies of Texas A&M University.
114
248. The Ganga floods extensively during the monsoon season, increasing from 5,000 m3/s,
measured at Hardinge Bridge, to 400,000 m3/s annually in August.
249. The Ganga River Patna City reach where the proposed bridge is to be constructed
including the alternatives analysis is provided the in succeeding Figure 51. The site chosen for
the proposed 6-lane facility, lies between NH-30 (near Kacchi Dargah) and NH-103 (near
Bidupur in Vaishali district). This corridor crosses Raghopur diara which is a river khadir. North
side of the river bank along this corridor is cultivated with pockets of intense habitation near the
Hazipur district industrial belt. The Southern river bank of River Ganges is occupied with
operative brick kilns. Immediately upstream is the confluence of a contributary Gandak River
coming from the left bank that traced its headwaters from the Himalayan mountains which
conveyed the maximum discharge 25,000 cumecs corresponding to Gauge 51.429 m RL in
year 1984 (Central Water Commission). The annual flow across the proposed bride axis is
estimated at 106,839 m3/sec.
250. An assessment of bankline changes along the project area in 2010 (see succeeding
Figure 51) 30 based on satellite maps from 1975 - 1988, 1988–1999 and 1999–2010
characterized the area around the proposed bridge axis had “only erosion on both banks during
1975-1988, depositional character increased from 1988 -1999 and the total depositional area on
the left and right banks was found to be 5.4 km2 and 6.5 km2 respectively, this trend continue
from 1999-2010 and the total depositional area on the left and right banks was found to be 3.0
km2 and 8.7 km2 respectively.” This dynamic changes in the river morphology is attributed to
several factors including non-homogenous composition of bank material particularly clayey and
silty clay causing uneven bank caving and slumping and eventually river meandering. This is
particularly evident when the clayey soil is saturated which liquefy and flow towards the channel
causing the overburden and less saturated soil to collapse forming the deep shear planes and
recedes the bank line. This phenomenon becomes more intense after flood stage when the
bank-supporting flood waters recede abruptly. Extreme temperature changes also affects fluvial
erosion of high silt-clay soils. During extreme winters, soil moisture tends to increase in volume
and as the soil expansion causing a decrease in inter-particle forces and less resistant to
erosion by hydraulic forces. Extreme high temperatures also weakens silt-clay soils by leaching
minerals.
251. Assessment of Impacts. Figure 51 presents the bridge alignment alternatives that were
evaluated to identify the best based on, among others, the configuration and erosion and
sedimentation characteristic of the river.
252. The confluence of the Ganga and Gandak near the Mahatma Gandhi Setu has shown
significant changes mainly from the changing contribution of the flood flows which are
dependent on the hydrology of the respective catchment areas and secondly, from the angle of
approach of the rivers at the confluence areas. Changes in the direction of a meandering river
like the Ganga are dictated by the travel and reflection of meanders. The channel changes of
the Ganga River is shown in Figures 53 and 54. The braided nature of the river also represents
a high energy fluvial environment often characterized by non-cohesive banks lacking vegetation
and consequently high rate of bank erosion and bed load transport.
30
S. Dayal and D.S. Pattanaik (2012). Assessment of Bankline Changes of River Ganga around Patna
City,India, using Multi Temporal Satellite Data.” Department of Geology, Utkal University, Bhubaneswar,
Odisha, India. International Journal of Earth Sciences and Engineering. ISSN 0974-5904, Volume 05, No. 03. June
2012, P.P. 442-450.
115
Figure 51. Erosion and Deposition Along the Proposed Bridge Axis, 2010 (S. Dayal and D. S. Pattanik).
116
Figure 52. Bridge alignment alternatives (BSRDC, 2013).

117
Figure 53. Showing superimposed courses of river Ganga from the year 1922 to 2013 (BSRDC, 2013).
118
Figure 54. Channel reflection observed in river Ganga at Patna (BRSDC, 2013)
119
253. The point of Ganga river bifurcation into two channels is located in the close vicinity of
the two rivers confluence point which will also show frequent changes and shifting.
254. The proposed site is separated by a 5-6 km width diara with an average ground
elevation of RL 45.0m which is 5.0m below the HFL of RL 50.0m. The diara is not stable. The
diara has a history of being entirely submerged and the smaller dry channels becomes active.
Historical evidence shows that the diara has been in existence for the past 140 years. There are
2 channels, the south or Fatwa and the north or the Mehnar approximately 100m and 300
meters flowing around the diara. The channels have also existed at the same time, however,
the share of flow have changed. The North channel carries most of the flow, estimated at 80%
of the total Ganga discharge.
255. The Ganga river meandering records starting in 1828 shows that the diara has been
breached at least twice in 1966 and 1973. The diara is vulnerable to breaches, erosion, and
formation of deep channels to form part of the main river. The alignment of the two channels are
very near the banks. After the bifurcation, the angle of flow of the North Mehnar Channel shows
high obliquity to the Bank and the point where the flow of the direction changes is near the
bridge axis. A study31 of the Mahatma Gandhi Setu indicates how crucial the angle of attack in
relation to the foundation scour which increase by 10% for every 5 degree change.
256. The are two smaller channels that crosses the diara and joins the Mehna river. The
alignment of these channels could change depending on the morphological and hydrological
changes immediately upstream. It is possible in the future, given the instability of the diara, that
one of the channels may become extinct and the remaining channel will carry the entire Ganga
discharge 32 . This is further supported by BSRDC 33 (2013) hydraulic study on the proposed
Ganga Path where “there is a tendency of evolution of the spills (offshoots) from the river
Ganga being in the braided stage and it also has the tendency of lateral shifting of the deep
channel of the river. It is therefore important to have adequate protection against action of flow
of the spills from the river and also against the lateral shifting of the deep channel.
257. Proposed Mitigation Measures and Study Considerations by the EPC Contactor.
The bridge is sited 12 kilometres downstream of the Mahatma Gandhi Setu bridge with a
minimum width of flow due to the formation of the diara, within stable reach, and banks are
erosion resistant. The National Highway at the south bank and the state highway in the north
bank ensures high floodwater will be contained. This makes the site suitable.
258. Structural options considered for the 6-lane facility (main bridge) were:
i. A bridge of 9500m length extending from km 1/530 on South bank (near Kacchi
Dargah) to km11/030 on North bank (Gopalpur ghat near Bidupur) with the entire
reach being treated as scourable and navigable.
ii. Two independent main bridges (with navigational clearance) over South bank (A-
31
Tiwari, H., Sharma, N., and Simegn, A. (2012). “The Bridge Cour by HEC-RAS Model: A Case Study
over Ganga Bridge.” Recent Treds in Civil Engineering and Technology, Vol. 2, Issue 2, August 2012.
STM Journals. Pp1-8
32
This phenomenon has happened near Gumi 80-90 kms downstream of Guwahati in the Brahmaputra
river. The island has existed over 100 years and 2 channels flows around carrying 40%:60% of the flow.
Morphological changes in the last 6-7 years has rendered the north channel extinct.
33
BSRDC (2013). “Construction of Ganga Path from Digha to Didarganj (21.5 km) at Patna in the State of
Bihar on EPC mode. Hydraulic and Hydrologic Report (Preliminary).” Prepared by IL&FS and RITES.
120
1 to P-14) and North Bank (P-65 to A-2) with high embankment in the diarra with
openings for cross-drainage, vehicular, pedestrian, cattle crossings and minor
streams.
iii. Two independent main bridges (with navigational clearance) over South bank (A-
1 to P-14) and North Bank (P-65 to A-2) connected with viaduct spans (non-
navigational span and low height) in diarra portion.
259. Of the three technical options considered, option i. of having a bank to bank bridge with
a waterway of 9.5km is being recommended under the project. This was mainly due to the
second and third option having many risks due to the instability of the diara and substantial
costly additional protection works being needed. Other risks with the second option was the
possibility of one channel carrying the entire Ganga discharge, then both waterway designs may
be required to carry the entire flow individually. During high flood flows, the embankment over
the diara for the diara access road can force overland flows to divert to the channels resulting to
increase in flowrate and may cause river bank erosion which will require anti-erosion measures.
260. Considering the instability of the diara, the embankment for the access road from the
diara to the main bridge will require adequate protection. In general the diara will require heavy
protection of upstream side and individual sets of guide bunds for structures across the
channels in the diara. The embankment will remain vulnerable to river attack during floods and
regular maintenance will be needed throughout the bridge life.
261. Due to the unstable nature of the diara, the first option of a bridge with a single waterway
spanning the entire 9.76 kms is being recommended. However, the disadvantage of
constructing a single bridge is the very high looseness factor which will result to hydraulic and
sedimentation problem due to high obliquity of flow at the guide bunds requiring more expensive
protection and maintenance works. A highly non-uniform flow increases the depth of scours at
the foundations requiring deeper foundation level.
262. Preliminary design for the bridge will be reviewed by the EPC Contractor to include: i)
scour depth of 22.5 m was estimated using the Lacey’s Method as provided in the Indian
Railway Standard Bridge Substructure Code, ii) design flow of 106,839 m3/s, ii) silt factor of
1.0, iii) deep foundation design depth was set at 19.80 m based on Gale’s principle, IRC
Practice, and Spring Curve, iv) and founding level was estimated at 14.8m based on HFL
50.0m-45.0 scour depth-19.80m Grip length. Detailed soil investigation on each of the pier
location will made to provide more applicable information.
263. With respect to the proposed bridge alignment and the flow of the North and South
channels, the flow on the North has shown very high obliquity of flow as compared to the
smoother flow across the bridge alignment in the South Channel. The bridge should be oriented
to maintain perpendicular to the direction of flow. As designed during the feasibility study, this is
not optimal and based on hydraulic modeling to be conducted by the EPC Contractor the
orientation of the bridge on across the north and south channels should corrected or provide
deeper founding depth and frequent maintenance works to take into account higher scouring.
264. Health, Safety and Hygiene for Construction Workers: Construction of the bridge and
approach roads will result in the generation of waste. In isolated places, the amount of waste
generated may be greater than normal because of substandard subsoil materials, which will
need to the replaced.
121
265. The EPC Contractor will be required to control the construction site, keep it clean and
provide facilities such as dust bins and collectors for the temporary storage of all waste. This
waste should be adequately stored to avoid pollution of water supplies and water sources and
to avoid dust formation. The Contractor will be responsible for the safe removal and/or storage
of all waste in order to prevent environmental pollution of any type that may be harmful to
people or animals.
266. All necessary safeguards should be taken to ensure the safety, welfare and good health
of all persons entitled to be on the sites and to ensure that works are carried out in a safe and
efficient manner. All personnel working at vulnerable site locations will wear safety helmets and
strong footwear. It should be ensured that all workmen and staff employed on site use proper
safety equipment – for example, eye protectors, ear plugs, safety helmets, the designated
safety equipment when working over water - and that proper rescue equipment is available. Fire
extinguishers and first-aid equipment will be kept at all sites.
267. The construction camps are anticipated to house up to 200 people for about four years.
With this concentration of people, the potential for the transmission of diseases and illnesses
will increase. The main health and safety risks during construction will arise from:
 inadequate sanitation facilities in worker camps;
 introduction of sexually transmitted, and other diseases, by immigrant workers;
and
 outbreaks of malaria, typhoid, cholera etc. amongst the labour force.
268. The following actions will be undertaken at construction camps and stipulated in
construction contracts:
 submit and obtain approval for a health and safety plan prior to the
commencement of work;
 provision of adequate health care facilities; and
 workers will be required to undergo pre-employment medical screening and
treatment (if required) and periodic health checks thereafter.
269. The project will support a public health education programme for workers and villagers
covering road safety, malaria, hygiene, and sexually transmitted diseases. The district health
departments will also be invited to participate in monitoring and educating communities and
workers affected by the project.
270. Road safety issues. The recent industrial and agricultural developments being
experienced in Bihar have led to higher transport demand. However, the vehicular infrastructure
has not kept pace with the resulting business development and resulting increase in vehicular
population and in turn led to traffic congestions, deteriorated level of traffic efficiency and road
safety in existing bridges such as Mahatma Gandhi Setu. The construction of the new Ganga
Bridge directly address the increasing road crashes that has taken place in and around the
Gandhi Setu. The dilapidated state of the Gandhi Set where at some point has been reduced to
a single lane requires “300 policemen equipped with wireless sets, a separate police station,
one crane and scores of CCTV cameras to clear the perennial traffic jams on it.”
271. During the past 10 years, major accidents has happened in the Gandhi Setu. In addition
to avoiding the hazards brought by the dilapidated condition of the Gandhi Setu, the proposed
bridge will comply, among others, with the following national design standards:
 IRC SP:44-1996: Highways Safety Code
 IRC SP: 88-2010: Manual on Road Safety Audit
122
 IRC SP: 30-1968: Standard Letters and Numerals of Different Heights for Use
on Highways
 IRC SP: 35-1997: Road Markings
 IRC SP: 103-1988: Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities
 IRC SP: 67-2001: Code of Practice for Road Signs
272. Due to the greenfield nature of the project, road safety issues are limited to the approach
and haul/access roads to the work and camp sites. The following traffic management measures
will be implemented to avoid road crashes and minimize the inconvenience to other road users,
in addition to the occupational health and safety measures discussed in relevant sections:
 The contractor will implement necessary measures to facilitate the movement of

vehicles affected by the construction work, including detours through the
following;
o Maintain work signages where there is risk of accident or damage to
structures
o Install route signages compliant to relevant Code of Practice for Road
Signs
o Maintain location and guidance signage at all times
o Ensure safe passage for all road users
o Maintain access to adjacent properties
o Deploy variable message signs to inform road users of real-time traffic
conditions and obstructions
o Deploy flagmen on hazardous locations
o Avoid dangerous routes and times of day to minimize risk of accident
o Ensure drivers maintain proper speed
 The public will be informed of the works and detours provides through the use of
media, public announcements, and signages
 Regularly maintain vehicles to avoid malfunction and failures that may lead to
crashes
 Collaborate with local communities including enforcement agencies on the proper
location and adequacy of signages particularly near schools, place of workship,
and public markets
 Partner with emergency responders to coordinate first aid provision to road
crashes
 Provide transport services to laborers to minimize the impact on traffic and
demand for public transport
 Transport of hazardous materials like fuel, lubricants, and paints should be done
by accredited transporter with capacity to manage accidental spills
273. Land use and Social Impacts. The likely impacts on land use and settlement patterns
are limited. Improved access will lead to increased migration, but this will occur gradually and
over a prolonged period. There will be time for new residential areas to be established. There
will be a need to control ribbon development.
274. Specific benefits to local people will include:

 easier communication;
123
 easier access to markets (both internally and regionally) with savings in travel
times and costs;
 enhanced market efficiency through better distribution and accelerated deliveries
etc.;
 improved access to health, education and other social services;
 employment generation;
 improved technical skills; and
 enhanced economic activity.
275. Likely adverse social impacts will include:

 increased chances of exposure to communicable diseases, particularly during
construction;
 influxes of new settlers leading to increased pressure on natural resources
causing hardship to local communities relying on local/forest resources; and
 rural-to-urban migration causing labour shortages in the depleted rural areas and
other negative impacts in the urban areas.
276. Assessment of social impacts and mitigation measures is also presented in the PSA
report.
C. Key operational stage impacts
277. Construction of new bridge and approach roads will result in introduction of fast moving
traffic in the project area. Fast movement of vehicles including cars, buses, trucks, lorries and
similar other heavy transports will result in both potential significant negative and positive
impacts as discussed below.
1. Air Quality and Emissions
278. The major impact on the air quality during the operation stage will be due to plying of
vehicles on the proposed bridge over Ganga River. The impact on air quality depends upon
traffic volume, traffic fleet including fuel type and prevailing atmospheric conditions. An unstable
atmospheric condition disperses pollutants more and results in to low pollutant concentrations
while stable atmospheric conditions buildup the pollution level. To assess the likely impacts on
the ambient air quality due to the proposed highway project, the prediction of the carbon
monoxide (CO) and particulate matter (PM) concentrations have been carried out using line
source dispersion modelling approach, based on Gaussian equation. CO is an indicator
pollutant for vehicular pollution. So, prediction of CO concentration is representative of the
impacts of air pollution due to traffic movement. The modeling for this project has been carried
out using CALINE-4, line source model developed by the California Transport Department. It
has been setup and run by using emission factors prevalent for Indian vehicles (ARAI, 2007)
and hourly traffic volumes as predicted for the project. The study is conducted to predict 1-houly
increment in CO, PM2.5 and PM10 concentrations for the 1st year (base year) and future traffic,
i.e. 5th Year, 10th Year, 15th Year and 20th Year. Improvement in fuel quality i.e., sulphur free
fuel, is used in vehicles now a days which reduce the SO2 emission from vehicles. The impacts
of other pollutant concentrations is also insignificant. Therefore, this study only focus on the CO,
PM2.5 and PM10 dispersion, generated from the traffic on the proposed highway.
279. CALINE-4 is the fourth generation simple line source Gaussian plume dispersion model
(Benson, 1984). It employs a mixing zone concept to characterize pollutant dispersion over the
roadway. The main purpose of the model is to assess air quality impacts near transportation
124
facilities. The input parameters are emission source strength, meteorology and road geometry.
It can predict the pollutant concentrations at selected receptors locations for 1 hour and 8-hour
average up to 500 meters of the roadway. For most applications, optional inputs can be
bypassed and many other inputs can be assigned assuming worst-case values. More complex
approaches to dispersion modeling are unnecessary for most of the applications because of the
uncertainties in the estimation of emission factors and traffic volumes for the future years.
CALINE- 4’s accuracy is well balanced with the accuracy of state-of-art predictive models for
vehicular pollution.
280. Various input parameters for the prediction of pollutant concentrations are discussed
below:
 Traffic Data: The fleet wise traffic volumes for the present study have been
taken from the detailed feasibility report of the project. The annual average daily
traffic (AADT) data is available for the proposed bridge through traffic survey.
CALINE 4 model needs hour average traffic volume. However, model has been
setup for peak traffic hours assuming 25% of average daily traffic volume. The
total traffic hour volume is further categorized in to two wheeler, four wheeler,
Light commercial vehicles (LCVs), Bus and high commercial vehicles (HCVs),
based on the traffic survey at existing bridge (Figure 55).
Buses
6%
2w
HCV 23%
27%
3w
12%
LCV
9% 4w
23%
Figure 55: Traffic Fleet on the bridge
281. The annual average daily motorized traffic data are given in table 55 of existing bridge
along with future traffic growth.
Table 54: Annual average daily motorized traffic data

Year 2 wheeler 3 wheeler 4 wheeler LCV HCV Buses
1st Year 7652 4169 7860 3030 9549 1976
5th Year 12100 6592 12428 4735 15801 3185
10th Year 17779 9686 18260 7057 24312 4592
15th Year 23792 12962 24437 9727 34098 6145
20th Year 31839 17346 32702 13471 47825 8223
125
 Road Geometry: In the CALINE-4 model the entire length of the selected road
section is divided into various road links. The division of sections into links has
been done in such way, so that the link can be fairly considered as straight
stretch of road having homogenous geometry with uniform road width, height and
alignment. The coordinates of end points of links specify the location of the links
in the model. The maximum numbers of link in each road section can be 20. The
mixing zone width calculated for selected highway corridor is 12m (3 m + 3 m + 6
m) as per guideline provided in CALINE4 model.
 Emission Factors: Emission factor is one of the important input parameter in

CALINE-4 model. In the present study, the emission factors specified by the
Automotive Research Association of India (ARAI, 2007) have been used for
calculation of weighted emission factors. These emission factors have been
expressed in terms of type of vehicles and type of fuel used (for petrol and diesel
driven passenger cars). Since, there is only one input requirement for total no. of
vehicles in the CALINE-4 model, whereas, there are different categories of
vehicles (viz., Two wheelers, Cars, Bus and trucks) with different year of
manufacture and fuel used, it is essential that a single value representing the
equivalent or weighted emission factors for all the vehicles is input into the
model. The emission factor used to estimate WEF are given below in table 3.
The traffic data are not available for fuel types, therefore average emission factor
are used in this study. Thus, WEF expressed in g/mile (converted from gm/km)
has been calculated for the present study using methodology given by Sharma et
al., 2013. For PM10, emission from re-suspension of road dust of paved road
have been estimated using following empirical equation (USEPA 2011).
E = k (sL) 0.91 × (W)1.02
Where:
E= particulate emission factor (g/VKT)
K =particle size multiplier (g/VKT), default value of “k” for PM2.5 is 0.15 g/VKT
sL = road surface silt loading (g/m2) = 0.531 g/m2 (Sahu et al., 2011)
W = Average weight of vehicles (in tons) on road = 1.41 Ton (Sahu et al., 2011)
282. The emission factor for CO, and PM2.5 used in the present study for different vehicles
type are given in table 55. The calculated WEF for CO, PM2.5 and PM10 for peak traffic hours
is given in table 56.
Table 55: Emission factors for different types of Vehicle (ARAI, 2007)
Vehicle type CO Emission factor (gm/km) PM2.5 Emission factor (gm/km)
Two wheeler 3.08 0.20
Three Wheeler 2.50 0.24
Cars/Jeep 1.53 0.06
LCV 2.02 0.49
BUS 8.40 1.08
HCV 12.65 1.60
126
Table 56: Weighted Emission Factor for proposed traffic

Year Weighted Emission Weighted Emission factor Weighted Emission
factor for CO (g/mile) for PM2.5 (g/mile) factor for PM10 (g/mile)
1st Year 8.93 1.03 2.12
5th Year 9.09 1.05 2.14
10th Year 9.23 1.07 2.16
15th Year 9.37 1.09 2.18
20th Year 9.51 1.11 2.20
 Meteorological data: The study was conducted to predict pollutant

concentration for worst meteorological conditions. The meteorological
parameters such as wind speed, wind direction standard deviation, temperature,
mixing height and stability condition are used in model. The wind direction
standard deviation was calculated to know the flexibility of wind direction and
used as input parameters in worst case run condition. The model has been run
with worst case, in which models predicted maximum pollutant concentration.
 Receptors: A set of link receptors were taken at various receptor locations within
each section at a distance of 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 40 m, 70m, 100 m and 200 m
both sides from edge of the carriageway to know the dispersion of pollutant from
the road. The monitoring station are marked as receptor points to compare the
monitoring and predicted pollutant concentrations.
2. Results
283. The model has been setup and run to predict hourly average CO, PM2.5 and PM10
concentrations for year 1st year, 5th year, 10th year, 15th year and 20th year using forecasted
traffic data on proposed highway. The predicted hourly average concentration of CO, PM2.5
and PM10 during peak traffic are shown in tables 57, 58 and 59 for proposed highway project,
respectively at four selected receptor locations. The graphical representation of hourly average
pollutant concentrations on both side of the road sections shown in figures 56, 57 and 58 at
different locations.
127
Table 57: CO Predicted Concentrations (ppm) for peak traffic hour

,
CO Concentrations (ppm) GOI limit: 1.5 (ppm) WB-EHS: 1.5 ppm
Distance from the edge of the road, m. (Left side) Distance from the edge of the road, m. (Right side)
Year -200 -100 -70 -40 -20 -10 -5 5 10 20 40 70 100 200
st
1 Year 0 0 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0 0
th
5 Year 0 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0 0
th
10 Year 0 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.1 0
th
15 Year 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.7 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1
th
20 Year 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2
Table 58: PM2.5 predicted concentrations (µg/m3) for peak traffic hour
3 3, 3
PM2.5 Concentrations (µg/m ) GOI limit: 60 µg/m WB-EHS: 25 µg/m
Year -200 -100 -70 -40 -20 -10 -5 5 10 20 40 70 100 200
st
1 Year 1.23 1.34 2.68 5.36 9.38 12.33 13.40 13.20 12.54 9.90 8.98 3.96 1.32 1.25
th
5 Year 1.95 2.12 4.24 8.48 14.84 19.50 21.20 20.60 19.57 15.45 14.01 6.18 2.06 1.96
th
10 Year 2.80 3.04 6.08 12.16 21.28 27.97 30.40 25.20 23.94 18.90 17.14 7.56 2.52 2.39
th
15 Year 3.85 4.18 8.36 16.72 29.26 38.46 41.80 39.40 37.43 29.55 26.79 11.82 3.94 3.74
th
20 Year 4.79 5.21 10.42 20.84 36.47 47.93 52.10 49.20 46.74 36.90 33.46 14.76 4.92 4.67
Table 59: PM10 predicted concentrations (µg/m3) for peak traffic hour
3 3, 3
PM10 Concentrations (µg/m ) GOI limit: 100 µg/m WB-EHS: 50 µg/m
Year -200 -100 -70 -40 -20 -10 -5 5 10 20 40 70 100 200
st
1 Year 2.60 2.83 5.65 11.31 19.79 26.01 28.27 27.32 25.96 20.49 18.58 8.20 2.73 2.60
th
5 Year 4.12 4.47 8.95 17.89 31.31 41.15 44.73 42.64 40.51 31.98 29.00 12.79 4.26 4.05
th
10 Year 5.90 6.41 12.83 25.66 44.90 59.01 64.14 52.16 49.56 39.12 35.47 15.65 5.22 4.96
th
15 Year 8.11 8.82 17.64 35.28 61.74 81.14 88.20 81.56 77.48 61.17 55.46 24.47 8.16 7.75
th
20 Year 9.03 9.81 19.62 39.24 68.67 90.25 98.10 95.40 90.63 71.55 64.87 28.62 9.54 9.06
Note: Brown colour indicates exceedance of WB-EHS standards.
128
1
0.9
CO Concentration (ppm)
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
-250 -200 -150 -100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 250
Distantance from edge of the road
1st Year 5th Year 10th Year 15th Year 20th Year
Figure 56: CO predicted concentrations (ppm) along the proposed Bridge
60.00
PM2.5 Concentration (µg/m3)
50.00
40.00
30.00
20.00
10.00
0.00
-250 -200 -150 -100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 250
Figure 57: PM2.5 predicted concentrations (µg/m3) along the proposed Bridge
120.00
PM10 Concentration (µg/m3)
100.00
80.00
60.00
40.00
20.00
0.00
-250 -200 -150 -100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 250
Figure 58: PM10 predicted concentrations (µg/m3) along the proposed Bridge
129
284. Table 60 describes the average baseline concentration (24 hour average) PM2.5, PM10
and CO monitored during winter and summer period at different locations around the proposed
bridge.
Table 60: Baseline pollutant concentration at different locations

Location Name Approx. distance from PM2.5 PM10 CO
proposed bridge (m)
Kalyanpur Village 50 43.685 74.81 1038.685
Jafarabadih Village 40 39.75 66.375 781.75
Majlishpur (School) 60 38.25 57.875 702.875
Didarganj 100 48.185 81.56 1058.81
Standard (NAAQS) 60 100 2000
285. In addition, the spatial distribution of hourly average predicted CO, PM2.5 and PM10
concentrations have been plotted in figures 59, 60 and 61, respectively for peak traffic hour
which shows that pollutant concentrations is decreasing when goes away from the bridge.
From the CALINE4 modelling results, it is observed that maximum dispersion of pollutants
concentration emitted from traffic volume at proposed bridge is up to 200 m. Therefore, the
impacts of traffic movement at proposed bridge over Ganga River will not impact the
surrounding atmosphere. Also there are very few sensitive receptors within 200 m of proposed
corridor, therefore impacts on air quality will be very limited.
Figure 59: Spatial distribution of CO concentrations
1st Year
130
5th Year
10th Year
15th Year
131
20th Year
Figure 60: Spatial distribution of PM2.5 concentrations
1st Year
5th Year
132
10th Year
15th Year
20th Year
133
Figure 61: Spatial distribution of PM10 concentrations
1st Year
5th Year
10th Year
134
15th Year
20th Year
286. Conclusions. It has been observed from the model output that when the traffic volume
increases, the concentration of air pollutants also increases correspondingly. CO levels are
expected to be within GOI and WB-EHS standards till year 20. Levels of PM2.5 and PM10 is
expected to be within the GOI standards throughout the project life. However, PM2.5 and PM10
levels exceed the WB-EHS standards at year 15 within 40 m from the centerline (10 m on left
and right side from the edge of the road). There are only 4 sensitive receptors located within
10m from the road edge as shown below in table 63. Hence, overall the long term air pollution
impacts on people are expected to be minimal due to presence of very few villages in the
project influence area.
3. Noise Quality Prediction
287. Noise quality along the Project road will be increased due to the introduction of traffic
volumes on new bridge. The predication of future noise levels due to increase in traffic has been
carried out using FWHA noise model. Federal Highway Administration's Traffic Noise Model
(FHWA TNM) helps for highway traffic noise prediction and analysis. TNM computes
135
incremental highway traffic noise at nearby receivers. As sources of noise, it includes noise
emission levels for the following vehicle types:
 Automobiles: all vehicles with two axles and four tires -- primarily designed to
carry nine or fewer people (passenger cars, vans) or cargo (vans, light trucks) --
generally with gross vehicle weight less than 4,500 kg (9,900 lb);
 Medium trucks: all cargo vehicles with two axles and six tires -- generally with
gross vehicle weight between 4,500 kg (9,900 lb) and 12,000 kg (26,400 lb);
 Heavy trucks: all cargo vehicles with three or more axles -- generally with gross
vehicle weight more than 12,000 kg (26,400 lb);
 Buses: all vehicles designed to carry more than nine passengers; and
 Motorcycles: all vehicles with two or three tires and an open-air driver /
passenger compartment.
288. The procedure for prediction of noise levels involves the following steps:
(i) Identification of various receivers,

(ii) Determination of land uses and activities which may be affected by the noise
generated,
(iii) Assemble input parameters, and
(iv) Application of the model.
289. The description of the components to predict noise level are as follows:
 Receivers: TNM calculates the sound levels at the input receivers.

 Land Uses: Land use along the road is obtained from the topographic drawings.
This information provides the range of shielding and absorption factors to be
applied at the various receivers.
 Input Parameters: Traffic volume for the projected period is obtained from the
traffic projections. The total number of vehicles passing per hour by type - light,
medium and heavy along with their average speed is used for predictions.
 Average Noise Level: All vehicles produce noise, which is taken as the base,
and the cumulative noise at the receiver distance due to the whole traffic is
estimated. The average noise level varies depending on the type of vehicle.
 Application of Model: Equivalent noise levels due to traffic at the receivers are
estimated using Federal Highway Noise model. Equivalent Sound Level (TEQ,
denoted by the symbol, LAeqT): Ten times the base-10 logarithm of the square
of the ratio of time-average, mean-square, instantaneous A-weighted sound
pressure, during a stated time interval, T (where T=t2-t1), and the reference
mean-square sound pressure of 20: Pa, the threshold of human hearing, e.g.,
1HEQ, denoted by the symbol, LAeq1H, represents the hourly equivalent sound
level. LAeqT is related to LAE by the following equation:
LAeqT = LAE - 10*log10(t2-t1)

where LAE = Sound exposure level in dB
290. Sound Exposure Level (SEL, denoted by the symbol, LAE): Over a stated time
interval, T (where T=t2-t1), ten times the base-10 logarithm of the ratio of a given time integral
of squared instantaneous A-weighted sound pressure, and the product of the reference sound
pressure of 20:Pa, the threshold of human hearing, and the reference duration of 1 sec. The
time interval, T, must be long enough to include a majority of the sound source’s acoustic
136
energy. As a minimum, this interval should encompass the 10 dB down points. Traffic data used
in noise modelling are given below in table 61.
Table 61: Annual average daily motorized traffic data

Year 2 Wheeler 3 Wheeler 4 Wheeler LCV HCV Bus
1st Year 7652 4169 7860 3030 9549 1976
5st Year 12100 6592 12428 4735 15801 3185
10st Year 17779 9686 18260 7057 24312 4592
15th Year 23792 12962 24437 9727 34098 6145
20th Year 31839 17346 32702 13471 47825 8223
Table 62: Noise prediction in dB (A) along the road corridor
Note: GOI NAAQS and WB EHS Guidelines Standards for Day time noise level limit is 55 dB(A) and Night
Time Noise Level limit is 45 dB(A) for residential areas. For silent zones GOI NAAQS are 50 dB(A) for
day time and 40 dB(A) for night time. Red colored figures show that noise levels are higher than NAAQS
as well as WB EHS Guidelines limits.
Table 63: List of Sensitive Receptors along the Project Road

S. No Location Properties/Structure Side Distance from
road edge in (m)
1. Km 0.050 Dargah Left 3.5
2. Km 0.275 Mazaar Right 4.0
3. Km 10.900 Temple (Religious) Right 10.0
4. Km. 11.000 Girls Middle School Right 5.50
(Majlishpur)
291. Table 62 shows that noise levels increase over time due to the increase in traffic
volume. However, it is the impacts on sensitive receptors and residential areas that is of most
concern and needs mitigation. Table 63 shows that there are only 4 sensitive receptors and
they are located from 3.5m to 10m from the road edge or within 40m from the road centreline
(ROW width is 60m). Hence, to analyse the impacts on the sensitive structures it is the noise
levels within 40m from the centerline of the road that needs to be considered. Noise barriers
have been proposed to be constructed in front of the identified sensitive structures to reduce
noise impacts in consultation with the local community. Trees will also planted as noise barriers
137
where wodth is available. Literature34 shows that noise barriers can reduce noise by 5 to 10 dB.
Hence with construction of a noise barrier it has been assumed that there will be a reduction in
noise by approximately 7 dB (assuming an average reduction in noise of 7dB). In addition noise
reduction can be expected due to difference in height of traffic and sensitive receptors. The road
is mostly elevated in the section with the sensitive receptors nearby. There will also be further
reduction in noise by the barrier created by the wall of the school or temple. Hence a total
reduction of approximately 10 dB can be expected. The “with mitigation” column in table 64
shows the noise levels with mitigation measures of constructing noise barrier, reduced speed of
vehicles from the use of speed breaker and barrier effect from the wall of the
school/temple/house. The figures in Table 64 show that these measures and factors will be
very effective in lowering the noise levels.
292. Conclusion. The noise level at the location of the 4 sensitive receptors will remain
within the GOI and WB-EHS standards with the installation of noise barriers, height difference
between noise source and receptor and barrier effect of the wall of the school or temple.
34
http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/environment/noise/noise_barriers/design_construction/keepdown.cfm
138
Table 64: Predicted Noise Levels along the Project Road with and without mitigation meaaures
Distance
st st th th th th th th th th
from 1 Year 1 Year 5 Year 5 Year 10 Year 10 Year 15 Year 15 Year 20 Year 20 Year
Baseline
Road without with without with without with with with with with
level
center mitigation mitigation mitigation mitigation mitigation mitigation mitigation mitigation mitigation mitigation
line (m)
1 73 76.00 66 79 69 86 76 92 82 96 86
10 53 56.00 46 59 49 66 56 72 62 76 66
20 46.98 49.98 40.98 52.98 42.98 59.98 49.98 65.98 55.98 69.98 59.98
40 40.96 43.96 33.96 46.96 36.96 53.96 43.96 59.96 49.96 63.96 53.96
100 33 36.00 26 39 29 46 36 52 42 56 46
Notes: Red colour shows exceedance in GOI and WB-EHS standard requirement for day time noise level
It is the noise levels at 40m from centerline or 10m from the road edge which matter.
139
293. Noise dispersion: A small corridor of bridge has been selected to develop noise
contour for base year as well as future years also. The contour lines are generated by plotting a
contour zone within 40 m distance from centerline of the road on both side of the road. Due to
model limitation, it is not possible to select the whole road corridor in the modelling domain.
Therefore, spatial dispersion of noise have been show with a small stretch of bridge. Figures 62
to 66 shows noise level contour around a small road corridor for 1st Year, 5th Year, 10th Year,
15th Year and 20th respectively. These predicted results are for peak traffic hours which is only
for 1 hour. During non-peak traffic hours, the noise level are very less compared to noise level
for peak traffic hours.
Figure 62: Noise contour for 1st Year
Figure 63: Noise contour for 5th year

140
294. Noise barriers. The Noise barriers can be constructed from earth, concrete, masonry,
wood, metal, and other materials. To effectively reduce sound transmission through the barrier,
the material chosen must be rigid and sufficiently dense (at least 20 kilograms/square meter).
All noise barrier material types are equally effective, acoustically, if they have this density. To
effectively reduce the noise coming around its ends, a barrier should be at least eight times as
long as the distance from the home or receiver to the barrier. A provision of five Noise barrier
locations in each corridor is made which should be provided based on the willingness of the
school/temple or religious structures authorities and technical feasibility. Conceptual drawing of
the noise barried is provided in Figure 67 below. Environmental Specialist of supervision
consultant will prepare site specific design of the noise barries and will provide it to the
Contractor.
141
Figure 67: Conceptual Drawing of the Noise Barrier
295. Although estimated noise over the project duration shows higher noise levels at various
receptor locations; implementation of suitable mitigation measures will reduce the construction
noise to acceptable limits. Mitigation measures should include:
 Installations of noise barriers;
 construction machinery should be located away from settlements;
 careful planning of machinery operation and the scheduling of such operations;
 controlled blasting should only be carried out with prior approval from the
Engineer in charge;
 contractors should be required to fit noise shields on construction machinery and
to provide earplugs to the operators of heavy machines;
 blasting should be conducted only during day-light hours; and
 only controlled blasting should be conducted.
296. Trees will be planted along the road to act as natural barrier to noise. Further, physical
noise barriers have been provided in the subproject design. These physical noise barriers can
be constructed from earth, concrete, masonry, wood, metal, and other materials. To effectively
reduce sound transmission through the barrier, the material chosen must be rigid and
sufficiently dense (at least 20 kilograms/square meter). To effectively reduce the noise coming
around its ends, a barrier should be at least eight times as long as the distance from the home
or receiver to the barrier.
D. Cumulative and Induced Environmental Impacts
297. According to the ADB Environment Safeguards Sourcebook 35 Cumulative Impacts is

described as: “The combination of multiple impacts from existing projects, the proposed project,
and anticipated future projects that may result in significant adverse and/or beneficial impacts
that cannot be expected in the case of a stand-alone project.” The sourcebook also describes
Induced Impacts as: “Adverse and/or beneficial impacts on areas and communities from
35
Environment Safeguards, A Good Practice Sourcebook, Draft Working Document, December 2012
142
unintended but predictable developments caused by a project, which may occur at later time or
at a different location.
1. Cumulative Impacts
298. Along with the proposed six lane bridge the BSRDCL is developing a wide road network
for improved connectivity as presented in Google earth picture shown below (Figure 68). In
addition there are 4 bridges currently under construction in Bihar. These are:
a. Ara – Chhapra bridge located 50 km upstream planned to complete construction

in late 2016,
b. Digha – Sonpur bridge located 22 km upstream planned to be completed in
February 2016,
c. Bakhtiyarpur – Tajpur bridge located 50 km downstream planned to be
completed in late 2016, and
d. Munger – Khagaria bridge located 163 km downstream and planned to be
completed by, late 2016
Figure 68: Indicative location of Proposed Six-Lane Bridge and future road network
299. Construction of the 4 bridges are all planned to be completed within 2016. Construction
of the Project bridge is expected to start by mid 2017 at the earliest. By then the effects of
construction of the bridges in the water upstream and downstream of the project location will no
longer be there. And given the large volume of water in the river all effects of increased
sediment load and pollution due to chemicals, waste etc. is expected to already be washed out.
300. Owing to the lack of exact information on improvement proposals, location, extent and
timeframe of development of this regional road network and bridges, it is not currently possible
143
to assess cumulative impacts that may occur. Should these development projects take place in
proximity of and concurrent to works on the proposed 6 lane ganga bridge project, possible
adverse cumulative impacts may include:
 Land Acquisition: Construction and up gradation of roads will require land

acquisition which may trigger out involuntary resettlement for affected people
therein.
 Loss of seasonal floodplain: Construction of roads will require land which are
in the low-lying gangetic floodplain agricultural lands that are seasonally flooded
and behave like wetlands during monsoon. Thus the wetlands will be affected. In
addition, there are some permanent seasonal floodplains in the region with
diversified biological functions, particularly in the central gangatic plains.
Construction of roads on these wetlands will have potential significant high
negative impact.
 Loss of biodiversity: Construction of roads and bridges across river ganges will
have adverse impacts in river ecology as well as aquatic flora and fauna. As
ganges river is a good habitat to some of the endangered species (such as
gangetic dolphins, hard-shell and soft-shell turtles, and garials, the anticipated
adverse impacts on these species will be high. Appropriate bio-diversity
conservation plans needs to be implemented as part of these projects to
minimum the adverse impacts.
 Loss of agricultural lands: Majority of the flood plain lands are used for
agriculture purpose and construction or up gradation of roads will result in loss of
agriculture lands of a narrow strip over long distances.
 Construction materials: road development projects are likely to require large
amounts of aggregates during construction. There may be significant cumulative
impacts from transportation of aggregates from the borrow pits and quarries to
the construction sites, and from the operation of concrete batching plants.
 Water resources: There is the potential for pollution of sensitive water resources
during construction in the same way as for the proposed 6-lane Ganga bridge
Project. The cumulative impact is considered to be potentially negative; However,
large volumes of fuel, oil or chemicals are unlikely to be used during construction.
 Ecology: Cumulative impacts from the road extension project may include
permanent removal of habitat. This is considered of lower significance, as these
projects are mostly upgrades and will be in general an extension to the existing
footprints rather than completely new ones in areas of undisturbed habitat.
 Air quality: At locations where construction of the proposed extension road
passes in close proximity to dwellings, construction dust may cause a temporary
nuisance to local residents. There could be some additional dust in the
atmosphere or the duration of increased dust concentrations could be longer.
 Noise and vibration: At locations where construction of the proposed road
extension work is carried our, noise may cause a temporary disturbance to local
residents as well as vibration may cause damage to the most vulnerable
properties.
 Community health and safety: during road construction impacts in community
health and safety due to exposed to noise, dust and vibration disturbance and
the risk of road traffic accidents.
 Traffic: The proposed Project will involve a large number of vehicle movements
on public roads that are also used by other developments and construction
projects, as well as the public. This could have a cumulative impact in terms of
144
temporary congestion or an increased risk of accidents, and is considered to be a

potentially negative. There may be significant cumulative impacts from general
construction traffic movements, including transportation of aggregates from the
borrow pits and quarries to concrete batch plants and construction sites.
 Unplanned events: New developments will not be permitted within a defined
distance from the proposed project facilities in accordance with Indian law, and
any development planned within 500m will be subject to risk assessment.
Keeping third-party developments at safe distance from the project facilities
means that third-party incidents are extremely unlikely to escalate to include the
project or vice versa.
301. Since the topography, terrain, land use and improvement proposals of the new roads
and bridges is expected to be similar to those of new 6-lane ganga beidge project, the mitigation
measures proposed in the EMP for this 6-lane project road would minimize above impacts
associated with development of road network in the project area. Therefore it is recommended
to follow the proposed EMP for extension road section as well.
302. The project contractor will coordinate with the the respective contractor responsible for
constructing the roads connecting with the project approach roads and where possible work
together to minimize negative impacts. Areas where the two contractors may work together are:
traffic management of existing local traffic, coordinating movement of haulage trucks to reduce
movement of haulage trucks from both projects at the same time to minimize impacts of dust,
noise and safety; coordinating the route of the haulage trucks to minimize area of impact and
others. Further details on the road network project will be collected by the contractor during the
detailed design stage and identification of cumulative impacts and need for coordination further
refined.
303. Major positive cumulative impacts from the road network project and the 6 lane bridge
project will include employment generation and increased economic activities during project
construction. During project operation there will be an overall increase in access and
connectivity in within the larger Patna area and Bihar state.
2. Induced Impacts
304. With the development of a regional road network, it is expected that the connectivity of
the northern part of the region with the rest of country will provide increased accessibility to
markets, ports and growth centers. This will lead to development of business (including
agriculture and fisheries), industry, communication, tourism, urbanization, etc. The induced
development has both negative and positive impacts. The positive impacts are increase in the
socio-economic conditions of the region through employment generation and poverty reduction.
The negative impacts are (i) air and noise pollution due to construction activities, increase in
traffic levels and industrial development, (ii) generation of wastes due to increased living
standards, (iii) consequent health impacts due to pollution and waste generation, (iv) loss of
biodiversity and critical habitats, and (v) land acquisition and resettlement. An assessment of
these positive and negative impacts in terms of degree, duration and mitigability of impacts is
shown in Table 65.
Table 65: Assessment of Induced Impacts from Proposed 6-lane Bridge Construction
Impact Degree of Impact Duration Mitigability
Loss of biodiversity Medium, negative Long term Partly
Land acquisition and resettlement High, negative Long term Partly
145
Impact Degree of Impact Duration Mitigability

Air and noise pollution Medium, negative Long term Partly
Waste generation High, negative Long term Fully
Health impacts High, negative Long term Fully
Business development High, positive Long term Enhancement
Industrialization High, positive Long term Enhancement
Tourism High, positive Long term Enhancement
Employment opportunities High, positive Long term Enhancement
305. After the construction of the project, at regional scale a lot of developments are expected
to take place due to the faster road communication, particularly in the northern and eastern part
of the country. Types of induced impacts are discussed in the following paragraphs.
a. Roadside Development
306. Because of commercial importance of the roads and easy access to National Highway
network via NH-30, NH-103 and NH-02, roadside developments are expected to grow at a
faster pace with the construction of the project. The expected roadside developments are
industries, markets/growth centers/shops, housing areas, etc.
307. The potential significant negative from roadside development are i) loss of seasonal
floodplain, ii) deterioration in surface water quality, iii) deterioration in groundwater quality, iv)
waste generation, v) land acquisition and resettlement, vii) loss of agricultural lands, and viii)
change in landuse.
308. Loss of seasonal floodplain: Loss of seasonal floodplain will result primarily from earth
filling of roadside low-lying lands. These lands are seasonally flooded, habitats for
fishes/aquatic life, birds during monsoon/wet season and used as agricultural lands during dry
period.
309. Deterioration in surface water quality: Roadside developments will generate several
types of wastes during their construction and operation and maintenance stages. Typical
wastes are likely of solid and liquid which may further be classified as hazardous/toxic and non-
hazardous/non-toxic. Disposal of these wastes without treatment will contaminate surface water
surrounding the dumping sites. Contamination of surface water quality will have potential
significant negative impact on biological functions of surface water as well as fish/aquatic life
resources therein.
310. Water Supply and Sanitation: Roadside development will require safe drinking water
supply and sanitation facilities in selected locations. Unplanned development will pose great risk
of waterborne diseases to infants and young children and people who are debilitated or living in
unsanitary conditions and elderly. BSRDCL needs to coordinate with other departments and
regions especially Local Government and Engineering Department for identifying locations for
water supply and sanitation facilities along the corridor. And expedite the development of these
infrastructures along the corridor to cash in the full advantage of the national highway network.
311. Deterioration in groundwater quality: Deterioration in groundwater quality is likely to

occur due to the dumping of untreated wastes. Leachate of wastes that contains hazardous
elements will percolate soils reaching groundwater contaminating the natural resources.
146
312. Waste: Wastes will be generated during construction and maintenance of roadside
development, and unless they are properly managed they will cause severe impact on
environment. Particularly industrial hazardous wastes would affect the health quality of the
workers as well as will contaminate soil and water at their dumping locations.
313. Land acquisition and resettlement: Widening of the road and construction of other
commercial establishments along road side with the private/public initiative will trigger out land
acquisition and resettlement issues and their associated impacts which needs to be properly
handled before the start of such activity.
314. Loss of agricultural lands: Roadside areas are mostly agricultural lands and
development along the corridor will have impact on the agricultural lands. The impact is
cumulative and will be seen as key issue for all infrastructure development in Bihar.
315. Change in landuse: Change in landuse is from conversion of existing lands, mostly
agricultural lands, into residential and commercial lands. Moreover, development works would
induce further developments which also have the impact on landuse again. For example,
construction of commercial establishments will result in change in landuse, i.e., agricultural
lands into industrial purpose; and again there will be further change in landuse from associated
developments (say housing facilities for the workers) due to commercial establishments.
316. Major positive impacts will be from employment. Roadside developments including
industries, commercial shops, fuel stations and similar others will generate a lot of employment
for different professional categories of people. Employment will also be generated from other
sectors, directly or indirectly linked with roadside developments.
b. Industrialization
317. Hajipur is an important industrial belt in the project area. There are several industrial
areas in and around Patna. There is good potential of import/export trade through National
Waterways No. 1. Patna as a terminal of Inland Waterways Authority of India. Development of
road network will boost international trade through National Waterways No. 1 which runs from
Haldia (Sagar) to Allahabad across Ganges, Bhagirathi and Hooghly river system. Haldia has
an important sea port serving as the gateway for imports and exports to the regional and South
Asian countries.
318. In addition, private industries are expected to grow along the major roads having good
access to the proposed bridge.
319. Lying on the alluvial plains of the Gangetic plains Patna has long been a major
agricultural center of trade, it’s most active exports being grain, sugarcane, sesame, and
medium-grained Patna rice. There are multiple sugar mills still in existence in and around
Patna. It is an important business and luxury brand center of eastern India. In 2009, the World
Bank stated Patna as the second best city in India to start up a business. Patna is the 21st
fastest growing city into World, and the fifth fastest growing city in India, and is expected to grow
at an average annual rate of 3.72%.
320. The proposed project corridor crosses Raghopur diara, which has a very high potential
for development as a futuristic satellite town of Patna city. North side of river bank along this
corridor mainly Banana plantation, with pockets of intense habitation. This belt is not far from
industrial belt of Hazipur district.
147
321. Major adverse impacts from industrialization in the regions are i) loss of seasonal
floodplain, ii) deterioration in water quality, iii) soil quality, iv) waste generation, v) land
acquisition and resettlement, vi) loss of agricultural lands, and change in landuse.
322. Loss of seasonal floodplain: Loss of seasonal floodplain will result from construction
of industries on roadside floodplain/wetlands, adjacent to major roads and in other areas in the
regions.
323. Deterioration in water quality: Industries are likely to produce hazardous and non-
hazardous wastes which they may not handle/manage properly and dump elsewhere without
treatment. This will deteriorate surface water quality. Surface water contamination during
monsoon may spread over large area due to flooding. Unplanned disposal of hazardous/toxic
waste may lead to the deterioration of groundwater quality, which may lead to several public
health implications related to drinking groundwater.
324. Deterioration in Soil quality/soil contamination: Improper waste dumping will

contaminate soil. Liquid wastes generated from industries may be accumulated contaminating
surface water, groundwater and soil there. The effect may be widespread due to flooding effect.
325. Waste: Wastes will be generated at various stages of industrial development, both
during construction and operation. Various types of hazardous and non-hazardous wastes will
be generated depending on the type of industries and their extent of operation.
326. Land acquisition and resettlement: Land acquisition and resettlement issues will arise
due to the establishment of various industries and export zones.
327. Loss of agricultural lands: Loss of agricultural lands is associated with land-acquisition
for industrial development.
328. Change in landuse: Change in landuse is primarily due to the transformation of

agricultural and other lands to industrial development.
329. Major positive impacts from industrialization are employment and gender related
benefits: Industrial sector is a potential source of employments in Bihar. Industries will provide
employments to many people directly and indirectly. Several types of industries are expected to
be established in the regions such as, food processing, bricks, pharmaceuticals, sea fish/food
processing industries, etc. These industries require professionals at various skills and levels
and the technicians. Employment will also come from associated business and commercial
activities linked with industries. Thus people who are associated with the transportation and
export/import business will also be benefited from employments.
330. Gender: With industrialization, ample job opportunities will be generated for the local
people and a part of these jobs are for women. In the food and agriculture sector, a large part of
the industrial jobs are offered to women because of the job nature and for their skills and
efficient performance in this sector.
c. Construction of Public Utilities Network
331. There are no specific details available but project bridge may support utilities such as
gas/oil pipeline, power transmission lines, telecommunication cables, water pipeline in future.
Construction of these associated lines connecting the existing network is beyond the scope of
148
this project. Concerned department dealing with the corresponding facilities also do not have
any plan of their alignment at this stage. Therefore specific identification of environmental
issues out of their construction is difficult. However, typical assessment is made which show
construction of these networks will require land acquisition. It is expected that the alignment will
be through open land which is primarily used for agriculture purpose. As such, agriculture
production will be potentially affected as well.
d. Development of Raghopur diara
332. The new 6-lane bridge is planned to have access roads to Raghopur diara. This will
bring year round smooth and easy access to the diara which is currently accessible only by a
seasonal pontoon bridge or by boat. The improved accessibility is expected to significantly
improve the quality of life of people living in the diara as development of other facilities will be
made much easier. However this may also bring many negative impacts. Few of the probable
positive and negative induced impact are indicated below:
a. Positive Induced Impact
 Development of basic facilities for improving quality of life such as better

electricity, supply of drinking water, local roads etc.
 Easier commute for the local people to take up employment across the river on
the northern and southern side of the diara.
 Improvement in local business and availability of consumer goods required for
day to day living
 Overall improvement in income level of the local people due to easier access to
economic opportunities
b. Negative Induced Impacts
 Development activities within the diara that may result in loss or change in critial
habitats particularly the western flood plains
 Rapid development may stress the available limited resources.
 Agricultural areas may get converted to non-agricultural uses.
 The local population may start growing at a faster rate due to more people
migrating to the diara hance putting more pressure on local infrastructure
 There may be increased environmental problems such as deterioration of air,
water and soil quality and noise levels due to inappropriate disposal of waste and
increase of vehicle population.
333. To minimize negative impacts and maximize positive impacts it is recommended that the
diara should have a systematic local area plan. The plan should include proper landuse plan
with clear delineation of wildlife habitat areas, agricultural areas and commercial and residential
areas. The local road network connecting to the 6 lane bridge must include adequate safety
features. Waste management facilities such as individual septic tanks or a common sewerage
treatment plant, solid waste management facilities will also need to be included in the local area
plan.
E. Environmental Enhancement Measures
334. Biodiversity Conservation Plan. In order to ensure “no net loss” of biodiversity as a
result of the project and try to achieve a “net gain” of biodiversity a Biodiversity Conservation
149
Plan (BCP) will be implemented under the project. The objective of the BCP will be to enhance
the status of the local biodiversity and focus on conservation of the endangered species in the
project influence area which are Gangetic dolphins, Ganges softshell turtles and Gharial. An
External Monitor for Environment Safegaurds will be recruited to implement the BCP.
335. Activities under the BCP will include baseline data collection, monitoring and
implementation of specific conservation activities. The following are activities will be
implemented under the BCP:
a) Establishment of baseline biodiversity: Collection of baseline data on flora and

fauna within the 10km project influence area to set the pre-project baseline
b) Monitoring during project construction and operation: Monitor flora and fauna
during project construction stage (4 years) and 3 years during project operation
stage to observe changes in comparison to baseline conditions. The purpose of
this exercise will be ensure that biodiversity levels are maintained at baseline
conditions/levels (no-net loss of biodiversity) or improved (net-gain of
biodiversity).
c) Implement biodiversity conservation activities: In consultation with local experts

from relevant agencies such as the Forestry Department, Zoological Survey of
India, Patna University, Vikramshila Dolphin Sanctuary and others and in
reference to the Dolphin Conservation Action Plan (DCAP) the External Monitor
will propose appropriate biodiversity conservation activities that can be
implemented within the project timeline and budget plan of $500,000. These
activities may include habitat enhancement activities, support activities under the
DCAP, implement activities under Vikramshila Dolphin Sanctuary, awareness
raising amongst local communities and in particular the fishermen on the
importance of the local biodiversity, training on fishing methods that do not
impact dolphins, eco-tourism and others. The details of such activities will be
finalized by the External Monitor. Identified activities may be implemented in
partnership with ongoing programs on Dolphin conservation with respective
implementing agencies or institutes.
336. Third Party External Monitoring. In addition to implementing the BCP the External
Monitor will conduct third party monitoring on implementation of the EMP by the contractor and
supervision by the PMAE (Project Management and Authority Engineer). The objective of the
third party monitoring will be to ensure that project activities are being implemented in a manner
that avoids, minimizes or mitigates impacts on the local biodiversity. Appropriate technical
advise and guidance will be provided by the External Monitor if any unforeseen or new impacts
arise during project implementation.
337. Designation of “no-go” zones. Detailed design of the bridge will be prepared after
award of contract to the contractor and details of the exact location of campsites, quarries,
borrow areas, waste disposal sites, acess roads etc. will be finalized during preparation of the
detailed design. The following areas will be designated as “no-go” zones:
338. Floodplains at the western end of Raghopur diara. This serves as habitat for
migratory birds, turtles and other reptiles. No construction camp, borrow areas or disposal sites
will be established in this area. No construction activities will take place in this area. And access
will be restricted to construction workers as they maybe encouraged to hunt for wildlife such as
150
turtles and their eggs. The exact boundaries of this western end will be determined by the
External Monitor after conduction of their baseline studies.
339. River banks or river edges along the two channels on the southern and northern end
of the bridge. One of the key threats to dolphin and turtle habitat is conversion of the river edges
from natural soft embankments into hard concrete embankments. Hence location of the bridge
piers will avoid such areas. The exact distance to be maintained between the pier location and
the river edge will be determined by the External Monitor during finalization of the detailed
design. A minimum distance of 100m should be maintained from the river edge for location of
camp sites including storage yards, labor camps, casting yards, batching plants. This criteria will
be further reviewed and other technical guidance provided by the External Monitor in
consultation with the PMAE and contractor.
340. The above “no-go” zones will be reviewed and further details identified by the External
Monitor. If necessary more areas as “no-go” zones will be identified and added by the External
Monitor.
341. Quarries without an Environmental clearance and other legal permits. The
contractor will ensure that they will source rocks and boulders only from licensed quarries that
have secured an environmental clearance and other legal permits.
342. Borrow areas without legal permits and/or agreement with land owner. The
contractor will ensure that they will source borrow material only from borrow areas that have
secured an environmental clearance and other legal permits. If the borrow area is on private
land, the contractor should also make proper legal agreements with the land owner.
343. Guidelines and good environmental practices. Annex 8 to Annex 12 of this EIA
Report presents good environmental management practices and guide documents in the
following aspects of road construction:
 Tree plantation and management guidelines (Annex 8)
 Borrow area management plan (Annex 9)
 Guidelines for emergency management system (Annex 10)
 Guidelines for waste disposal and management (Annex 11)
 Guidelines for construction material storage and handling plan (Annex 12)
344. Further management plans will be developed for: health and safety; traffic management
plan for both road and water traffic; and other plans that will be identified and prepared during
the detailed design stage.
151
VI. CLIMATE CHANGE RISK AND ADAPTATION FOR GANGA BRIDGE
345. The proposed Ganga Bridge, like other bridge projects are directly exposed during
events of high water levels where accessibility could be affected from frequent storms36. The
immediate project area is prone to riverine flooding the most recent event occurred in 2003
when the HFL surpassed the 1994 record of 50.27m. The project area is classified as having
extreme mortality risk from flooding with flood frequency of more than50 events/100 years.
A. Review of Related Literature
346. Simulated Projections for Summer Monsoon Climate over India by a high-resolution
Regional Climate Model (PRECIS), (K. Krishna Kumar, et al, August, 2011). Impact of global
warming on the Indian monsoon climate was examined using Hadley Centre’s high resolution
regional climate model, PRECIS (Providing Regional Climates for Impact Studies). Three
simulations from a 17-member Perturbed Physics Ensemble generated using Hadley Center
Coupled Model (HadCM3) for the Quantifying Uncertainty in Model Predictions (QUMP) project,
were used to drive PRECIS. The PRECIS simulations corresponding to the IPCCSRES A1B
emission scenario were carried out for a continuous period of 1961–2098. The model showed
reasonable skill in simulating the monsoon climate over India. The climate projections were
examined over three time slices, viz. short (2020s, i.e. 2011–2040), medium (2050s, i.e. 2041–
2070) and long (2080s, i.e. 2071–2098). The model projections indicated significant warming
over India towards the end of the 21st century as follow:
 Towards the end of the 21st century (2071–2098) all three simulations indicate a
significant rise in the mean annual surface air temperature (~ 4°C) over India.
The analysis of temperature extremes indicates that both the daily maximum and
minimum temperatures may be intense in the future under global warming
conditions.
 The summer monsoon precipitation over India is expected to be 9–16% more in

2080s compared to the baseline (1970s, i.e. 1961–1990) under global warming
conditions. However on a smaller regional scale, some regions may experience
slightly lower rainfall compared to the baseline period.
347. Sub-Basin Scale Characterizations of the Changes of the Future Rainfall over the
Ganges River Basin using High Resolution Regional Climate Model, (Md. Raqubul Hasib, et al,
September, 2014). An attempt has been made in this study to define the rainfall features of
Ganges basin under moderate climate change scenario. The river basin has diversified climatic
patterns. The Ganges river basin was divided into 14 major sub basins. The impact of climate
change over Ganges was observed using Hadley Center’s regional Climate model, PRECIS
(Providing Regional Climates for Impact Studies). PRECIS simulation was carried out
corresponding to SRES A1B scenario for a time period of 1971-2099. PRECIS generated
rainfall showed deviation from observed rainfall therefore simulated rainfall were corrected with
respect to observed rainfall for impact studies. In this particular study PRECIS generated rainfall
time series was bias corrected with respect to rainfall data of Indian Meteorological Department.
The climate projections were examined over three time slices, viz. near (2020s, i.e. 2011–
2040), farther (2050s, i.e. 2041–2070) and transient (2080s, i.e. 2071–2099). The Analysis
indicated that monsoon rainfall increases 0.01% at 2020’s, 5.5% at 2050’s and 7.3% at 2080’s.
Probability of rainfall extreme over Ganges basin such as maximum 1 day rainfall, count of
36
http://en.klimatilpasning.dk/sectors/buildings/climate-change-impact-on-buildings.aspx
152
consecutive rainfall days shows increasing trend, on the other hand number of rainfall event
(>20 mm) on monsoon season shows decreasing trend.
348. Impacts of Water Infrastructure and Climate Change on the Hydrology of the Upper
Ganges River Basin (IWMI Research Report 142, 2011). This study assessed the variability of
flows under present and ‘naturalized’ basin conditions in the Upper Ganges Basin (UGB) (area
of over 87,000 square kilometers (km2)). The naturalized basin conditions are those that existed
prior to the development of multiple water regulation structures, and hence may be seen as a
reference condition, a starting point, against which to evaluate the impacts of planned basin
development, as well as the impacts of future climate change (CC) on basin water resources.
The later impacts are also part of the study: the PRECIS regional climate model (RCM) was
used to generate climate projections for the UGB, with subsequent simulations of future river
flows.
349. Results showed that the annual average precipitation, actual evapotranspiration (ET)
and net water yields of the whole basin were 1,192 millimeters (mm), 416 mm and 615 mm,
respectively. However, there were large variations in both temporal and spatial distribution of
these components. Precipitation, ET and water yields were found to be higher in the forested
and mountainous upper areas of the UGB. On an annual average, present-day flows throughout
the UGB were about 2-8% lower than in naturalized conditions. The percentage of flow
reduction was the highest during the dry months as water was withdrawn for irrigation.
350. Dry and wet season flows under CC scenario A2 (scenario corresponding to high
population growth with slower per capita economic growth and technological change) are lower
than those in present climate conditions at upstream locations, but higher at downstream
locations of the UGB. Flows under CC scenario B2 (corresponding to moderate population
growth and economic development with less rapid and more diverse technological change) are
systematically higher and lower than those under CC scenario A2 during dry and wet seasons,
respectively. The dates of minimum daily discharges are highly variable among stations and
between different CC scenarios, while the dates of maximum flow are delayed downstream as a
result of the delay in the onset of the monsoon in the lower parts of the basin. The report also
provides actual simulated discharge time series data for all simulated scenarios, in the overall
attempt to augment the river flow data for this important river basin and to facilitate the use of
these data by any interested party.
351. Climate Change in India, A 4x4 Assessment – A Sectoral and Regional Analysis for
2030s; Indian Network for Climate Change Assessment, INCCA Report #2, November 2010.
INCCA is a network-based programme that brings together over 120 institutions and over 220
scientists from across India to undertake scientific assessments of different aspects of climate
change assessment. Covering agriculture, forest, health and water sectors the assessment
focuses on 4 eco-sensitive regions of the country, namely, the Himalayan region, the North-
Eastern region, the Western Ghats and the Coastal regions, each having a very distinctive bio-
diversity. The climate change scenarios are based on A1B socio-economic scenarios of the
IPCC that assumes significant innovations in energy technologies, which improve energy
efficiency and reduce the cost of energy supply.
352. Indian annual mean temperature showed significant warming trend of 0.51oC per 100
year, during the period 1901–2007. Accelerated warming was observed in the recent period
1971–2007, mainly due to intense warming in the recent decade 1998–2007. This warming was
mainly contributed by the winter and post-monsoon seasons, which had increased by 0.80°C
and 0.82°C in the last hundred years respectively. The pre-monsoon and monsoon
153
temperatures also indicate a warming trend. For India as a whole, frequency of hot days
showed a gradual increasing trend and frequency of cold days shows a significant decreasing
trend during the pre-monsoon season over the period 1970–2005.
353. Trend analysis of 1-day extreme rainfall series based on the period 1951-200, indicated
that these extreme rainfall amounts are increasing at many places in India. This observation is
based on analysis of highest rainfall recorded from 1000 stations across India for the period
1951-2007 at a resolution of 1ox1o. These results were in good agreement to that of Roy and
Balling (2004), who reported overall increase in extreme rainfall events and their intensities
during the period 1901-2000.
354. The vulnerability assessment with respect to the possible future floods was carried out
using the daily outflow discharge taken for each sub-basin. These discharges were analyzed
with respect to the maximum annual peaks. It was observed that all the regions in India show an
increase in the flooding varying between 10 to over 30% of the existing magnitudes. This poses
very severe implication for the infrastructure such as dams, bridges, roads, etc., and shall
require appropriate adaptation measures to be taken up.
B. Predicted High Flood Level
Table 66: Modeling Annual Maximum Flood at Gandhighat Station, Patna
Source: CWC, Patna

154
355. The annual maximum (AM) flood discharges recorded through 48 years (1965 2012) of
the River Ganga at Gandhighat station in Patna is presented in Table 62. The highest measured
flood flow of 83,000m3/s was recorded in 1994, while the lowest of 15,000 m3/s was recorded
in 2010. The 48-year mean instantaneous flood flow is 44,485m3/s with a standard deviation of
16,716m3/s. Figure 69 shows the annual maximum floods with a 5-year moving average trend
smoothed to highlight significant changes in the trend.
Figure 69: Annual Maximum Discharge Series of River Ganga (1965-2012) at Gandhighat
Station, Patna
Source: CWC, Patna
356. A group of statistical functions used in Indian rivers (Table 6.2 include the: Log Pearson
Type III, Gumbel, Log-Normal, and Generalized Extreme Value (GEV)) is fitted to the annual
maximum (AM) series, and the resulting curve is used to estimate the magnitude of flows of a
given return period. Using EasyFit software Ver. 5.6 Professional (2014) the GEV seems to be
the best-fit as per the statistics summary below.
Figure 70: Probability Density Function

Figure 6.2 Probability Density Function
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.1
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0
16000 24000 32000 40000 48000 56000 64000 72000 80000
AM Flood
Histogram Gumbel Max Lognormal Gen. Extreme Value Log-Pearson 3
↓
155
Fitting Results Goodness of Fit

# Distribution Parameters Kolmogorov Anderson
Chi-Squared
Smirnov Darling
k=- # Distribution
Gen. Ex reme Valu Statisti Ran Statisti Ran Statisti Ran
1 0.19841 σ=16195.0 μ=37840
e c k c k c k
.0
Gen. Extreme Valu 0.0850 0.2700 0.5820
1 1 1 1
2 Gumbe Max σ=13034.0 μ=36962.0 e 3 5 7
α=15.862 β=- 0.1344 0.9129

3 Log-Pearson 3 2 Gumbel Max 3 4 3.3157 4
0.10324 γ=12. 64 3 2
0.1060 0.3208
4 L gnormal σ=0.406 5 μ=10.626 3 Log-Pearson 3 2 2 2.3193 3
8 8
0.1388
4 Lognormal 4 0.6096 3 1.1144 2
2
C. Testing for Non-Stationarity
357. The change in a variable over a given period of time is often described with the slope of
a linear trend. Trends are the simplest component of climate change and provide information on
the first-order changes over the time domain considered. This implies that the physical
mechanisms behind the detected trends remain unknown. The calculated trends represent
changes that can be due to natural internal processes within the climate system and/or external
forcing, which can either be natural, such as solar irradiance and volcanic aerosols, or
anthropogenic, such as greenhouse gases.
358. Statistical methods are used to estimate the trend, together with some measure of
uncertainty. Amongst others, Smith (2008) provides more information on the basic statistical
model for a linear trend and the complications that arise from climate data being auto-correlated
(not independent). Here, by change-point analysis, two distinct trends; a positive trend from
1964-2003, and a downward trend after are discernible. The trend is charted in Figure 71, and a
change-point after year 2003, may suggest varying hydrological phenomenon responsible for
generating flood events, or regulation of water at upstream Ganga River.
Figure 71: Observed Trends in ganga River Annual Maximum Discharge

156
359. The most common nonparametric tests for working with time series trends are the Mann-
Kendall and Spearman’s rho tests. The Mann-Kendall test is the most common one used by
researchers in studying hydrologic time series trends. The software XLStat (2015) has been
employed here to detect trends if any in the AM series given in Table 62, and the results are as
follow:
360. The indicates existence of non-stationarity in the annual maximum flood series of the
Ganga River at Patna and that traditional iid presumed methods cannot be applied with
reasonable confidence.
6.3 GEV Fit (under Stationarity) for observed Annual Max Discharges of the Ganga River
The GEV Distribution (cdf) is:

1
𝑥−𝜇 −⁡𝜉
𝐺𝐸𝑉(𝑥, 𝜇, 𝜎, 𝜉) = exp⁡{−[1 + 𝜉( 𝜎
)] }
𝑥−𝜇
Where, 1 + 𝜉( ) > 0; and, μ = location parameter, σ = scale parameter and ξ = shape parameter
𝜎
361. Using the extRemes toolkit (Ver.2.9.2), a GEV distribution has been fitted to annual
maximum discharge series of the Ganga River at Patna. The parameters of the simulated data
from GEV Distribution without trend is given below
GEV fit
L-moments (stationary case) estimates
Location (μ): 0.005511165
Scale (σ): 1.065316
Shape (ξ): -0.000101106
Likelihood ratio test (5% level) for ξ=0 does not reject Gumbel hypothesis.
Likelihood ratio statistic is 0.002057116 < 3.841459 1 df chi-square critical value.
p-value for likelihood-ratio test is 0.963824

157
362. Simulated Data from GEV Distribution with Trend in Location Parameter
363. To simulate a GEV distribution with a non-constant location parameter of the form μ(t) =
μ0 + μ1t, where μ0 = 0 and is based on a discernible trend from 1965-2003 with μ1 = 0.03. The
following probability and return level plots are shown in the succeeding Table.
GEV Fit Non-Stationarity (Linear Trend in Location)

L-moments (Non-stationary case) estimates
Location (μ): 0.1698266
Scale (σ): 1.031883
Shape (ξ): 0.09348973
Likelihood ratio test (5% level) for ξ=0 does not reject Gumbel hypothesis.
Likelihood ratio statistic is 0.5138502 < 3.841459 1 df chi-square critical value.
p-value for likelihood-ratio test is 0.4734769
Figure 72: GEV Fit, Non-Stationary, Ganga River at Patna
D. Return Periods vs. Return Levels
364. With the L-moments estimated parameters simulated from GEV shown in boxes 6.2 &
6.3 above, the T-year return periods by GEV can be estimated using the following equation
(6.1). The results are given in Table 67 and Figure 70 below.
𝜎 𝑇−1 𝜉
𝑋𝑖 = 𝜇 + ( 𝜉 ) {1 − (−log⁡(
𝑇
) } (6.1)
158
Table 67: % Change for Estimated Maximum Discharge

3
Return Period, Estimated Max Discharge, m /s % Change
years
T Stationary Non-Stationary (linear change in location Stationary →
parameter) Non-Stationary
10 58,562 64,049 9.37%
20 68,100 73,262 7.58%
50 77,250 82,093 6.27%
100 89,093 94,127 5.65%
200 97,968 103,062 5.20%
500 106,811 111,905 4.77%
Figure 73: return Level versus Return Period

130
Thousands
120
Non-Staionarity (Linear Trend in Location Parameter)
Estimated Max. Flood Discharge (cms)
y = 12507ln(x) + 35286
110 R² = 0.9941
100
90
80
Stationarity (No Trend)

70 y = 12581ln(x) + 29855
R² = 0.9946
60
50
10 100 1000
Return Period, Years
E. Design Flood for River Ganga at Patna
365. Considering that the Ganga River system is very complex with many regulation systems
upstream and that critical floods are generated by monsoon onslaughts, the question as to how
to incorporate the effect of climate change in the variables and assumptions will remain a
contentious matter. In the light of uncertainties created by climate change, among other things,
much literature advice that the calculation assumptions and procedures be revised regularly and
comparisons made continuously between actual flood occurrences and calculated design
floods. However this is an ongoing process amongst researchers.
366. The WMO’s WCDMP-No.72, 2009 (Guidelines on Analysis of Extremes in a Changing

Climate in Support of Informed Decisions for Adaptation), mentions that changes in extremes
can be assessed by using extreme value theory and calculating extreme quantities for different
periods of time (both in the past and future) or by using more advanced methods in which the
parameters of the statistical models vary over time to describe the temporal evolution of the
159
extremes. Thus, using the extRemes toolkit, and with a linear trend in location parameter,
Figure 70 depicts the shift in return levels. The 100-year flood turns out to be near 150-year
flood by this method considering non-stationarity of the annual maximum flood data series.
Conversely, if stationarity was to be taken for granted, the 100-year flood translates to a 65-year
flood under non-stationarity.
F. Adaptation Measure
1. Design discharge
367. Various methods are followed in practice for determination of design discharge. The
feasibility study report indicate two methods were chosen for the detailed analysis. There are
three bridges constructed in the vicinity of the proposed bridge and all have shown satisfactory
performance till now. Further, there are two bridges under construction, and one gauge
discharge site wherein long records of discharges are available.
368. Therefore, it is reasonable to take a cognizance of all the design discharge values
selected for these Bridges and the maximum discharge values observed at the gauge discharge
site. It is indicated that while deciding the design discharge of the proposed Bridge, statistical
processes for extrapolation of maximum discharges were used and the discharges observed in
rivers Ganga and Gandak were considered while arriving at the design discharge for the
proposed Bridge.
369. The design discharge for the proposed Bridge is finalised as 106,839 cum/ s. When
compared to the design discharge of Mahatma Gandhi Setu of 96,277 cum/s, and the design
discharge of rail cum road bridge at Patna, of 97,000 cum/s. the proposed design discharge
appears within reasonable limits. However, further analysis is made to look in to the
dependency on the computed design discharge. The observed highest discharges of rivers
Ganga and Gandak are added and the design discharge of (81,839+25,000=) 1,06,839 cum/s is
arrived at. Using the peak flood data, RITES worked out the 100 year flood frequency for the
two rivers. Addition of the estimated discharges of the two rivers works out to (96,919+20,620=)
1,17,539 cum/s. If the flood peaks would coincide, then the above two values may have to be
chosen for deciding the design discharge. However, the floods of rivers Ganga and Gandak do
not coincide. As the catchments of the two rivers are far apart, and the time of travel of floods
would also be different, the coincidence of the floods at the Bridge is normally not possible.
Mahatma Gandhi Setu was designed for a discharge of 96,277 cum/s. There is no major
contribution of discharge from any river between Mahatma Gandhi Setu and the proposed
bridge. The hydraulic performance of Mahatma Gandhi Setu is quite satisfactory. Therefore, the
design discharge of the proposed bridge could also be the same. However, with the projected
increase in flood flows due to climate change, which was estimated at 94,127 m3/s, the 106,839
m3/s is acceptable. However, these calculations will be reviewed and upated after further
hydrological studies are conducted by the contractor during detailed design. The most
conservative estimate will be considered for the bridge design.
370. Such increase in the design discharge in the downstream direction, two design
discharges, are found on other places. On river Yamuna at Delhi, the Wazirabad Barrage was
constructed in the year 1958-60 has a design discharge of 7,080 cum/s. Structures constructed
later like the road Bridge at Humayun tomb has a design discharge of 8,495 cum/s. Various
methods are followed in practice for determination of design discharge. The reports indicate that
two methods were chosen for the detailed analysis. There are three bridges constructed in the
vicinity of the proposed bridge and all have shown satisfactory performance till now. Further,
160
there are two bridges under construction, and one gauge discharge site wherein long records of
discharges are available.
371. Therefore, it is reasonable to take a cognizance of all the design discharge values
selected for these Bridges, the maximum discharge values observed at the gauge discharge
site, and the projected impact of climate change on Ganga River flood flow. It is indicated that
while deciding the design discharge of the proposed Bridge, statistical processes for
extrapolation of maximum discharges were used and the discharges observed in rivers Ganga
and Gandak were considered while arriving at the design discharge for the proposed Bridge.
G. Greenhouse Gas Emissions
372. The Transport Emissions Evaluation Model for Projects (TEEMP)37 developed by Clean
Air Asia38 was utilized to estimate the CO2 emissions from the project traffic prepared during the
feasibility study. Unlike the original application of TEEMP where emissions reductions
attributable improvements in the road capacity and surface roughness are estimated, this
exercise estimate the gross carbon emissions from expected vehicles crossing the bridge from
2020 to 2037. Traffic projections made as part of volume II: Feasibility Study Report (Traffic
Report)39 is provided in table 68 and 69 below.
Table 68: Projected Traffic for the New Patna Bridge

Car/ Bus
Year 2W 3W Taxi/ LCV Truck Tractor
Min Full
Jeep
2022 12100 6592 12428 117 3008 4310 15801 425
2027 17779 9686 18260 172 4420 6632 24312 425
2032 23792 12962 24437 230 5915 9302 34098 425
2037 31839 17346 32702 308 7915 13046 47825 425
Table 69:. Projected growth rates %

Year 2/3 Wheeler Car Bus Truck
2020-21 10 10 10 11
2022-2027 8 8 8 9
Beyond 2027 6 6 6 7
373. The default road maximum capacity for a 6-lane expressway 36,000 PCU/day was used
and saturation capacity was set at 1.5 time this capacity. Consistent with the traffic study,
vehicular increase is attributed to the growth of the population and economy of Bihar and no
induced traffic was considered. The construction method will be determined by the EPC
Contractor and therefore the related carbon emissions were not considered.
374. Emission factors were mostly taken from the CBCP/MOEF (2007) Draft Report on
Emission Factor Development for Indian Vehicles, the Automotive Research Association of
37
TEEMP is an excel-based, free-of-charge spreadsheet models to evaluate emissions impacts of transport projects.
38
A network of 250 organizations in 31 countries established by the Asian Development Bank, World Bank, and
USAID to promote better air quality and livable cities by translating knowledge to policies and actions that reduce air
pollution and greenhouse gas emissions from transport, energy and other sectors.
39
M/s. Infrastructure Development Finance Company Limited, M/s Infrastructure Development Corporation
(Karnataka), Limited and M/s RITES Limited (2013). “Development of Six Lane Suspension Cable Green Field
Bridge Over Ganga from Kacchi Darga on NH-30 to Bibupur in Dist. Vaishali on NH-103.” Bihar State Road
Development Corporation Limited
161
India, and C. Reynolds et.al (2011) Climate and Health Relevant Emissions from in-Use Indian
for three-wheelers rickshaw as given in table 70 below.
Table 70:CO2 Emission Factors

Vehicle Type Gas Diesel LPG/CNG
2-Wheel 1.37 kg/l
3-Wheel 2.12 kg/l 3 kg/l
Cars/bus/bus 2.24 kg/l 2.58 g/l
375. The bridge use related carbon emission was estimated at a total of 220,237 tons in year
25 which translates to 4,450 tons/km, 8,809 tons/yr, and 178 tons/km/yr.
162
VII. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES
A. Introduction
376. This chapter presents the symmetrically compared feasible alternatives to the proposed
project with respect to location, site, design and technology. Various alternatives considered for
the proposed Ganga Bridge Project are:
 ‘With’ and ‘Without’ Project Alternative
 Alternative for Bridge Alignment/Location
 Alternatives for Landing/Approach Roads and Connecting Roads
 Alternatives for Bridge Design i.e. type of bridge, superstructure, piers and type
of foundation etc.
 Alternatives for Construction Methods/Technologies including structure options
377. This chapter discusses how environmental parameters were assigned due importance
and were carefully considered in the analysis of alternatives.
B. ‘With Project’ and ‘Without Project’ Scenario
1. ‘With Project’ Scenario
378. The ‘with Project’ scenario includes construction of a green field 6-lane bridge between
Kacchi Dargah (NH-30) to Bidupur (NH-103 ) in District Vaishali in the state of Bihar. The ‘with
project’ scenario has been assessed to be economically viable and will alleviate the existing
conditions. It would thereby, contribute to the development goals envisaged by the Government
of Bihar as well as Government of India, and enhance the growth potential of the state and the
country as a whole. There will be reduction in travel time as well as better connectivity to
Vaishali District with construction of the new bridge. Traffic movement will improve and
congestion will be reduced at existing Mahatma Gandhi Setu which is 15 km upstream to the
proposed bridge. The project will further provide direct connectivity in between NH-30 and NH-
103. Also there will be saving in fuel for vehicles travelling from Kachhi Darga to Bidurpur and
subsequent reduction in CO2 emissions.
2. ‘Without Project’ Scenario
379. In the case of ‘without project’ scenario the traffic will continue to use existing Mahatma
Gandhi Setu bridge. Considering the present traffic volume and potential for growth in near
future, the capacity of the present bridge is insufficient for handling expected traffic volume and
calls in for immediate improvements. Traffic congestion occurs frequently due to heavy traffic
load at the existing Mahatma Gandhi Setu bridge which causes frequent traffic jams on the
existing road.
380. Economic activities will remain static and accordingly local economy will improve at a
very slow pace. Development activities will be greatly hampered due to inadequate connectivity.
Environmental quality will further deteriorate due to pollution and high emission from slow traffic
movement and congestion.
381. Therefore, the no-action alternative is neither a reasonable nor a prudent course of
action for the proposed project, as it would amount to failure to initiate any further improvements
and impede economic development. Keeping in view the site conditions and the scope of
163
development of the area, the ‘With’ and ‘Without’ project scenarios have been compared as
shown in Table 70. By looking at the table it can be concluded that “With” project scenario with
positive/beneficial impacts will vastly improve the environment and enhance social and
economic development of the region compared to the “Without” project scenario, which will
further deteriorate the present environmental setup and quality of life. Hence the “With” project
scenario with minor reversible impacts is an acceptable option than the “Without” project
scenario. The implementation of the project therefore will be definitely advantageous to achieve
the all – round development of the economy and progress of the State.
164
Table 71: Comparison of ‘With’ and ‘Without’ Project Scenario

Sl. No. Component ‘With’ Project Scenario ‘Without’ Project Scenario
1. Traffic Traffic movement will improve and congestion will be reduced at Traffic congestion occurs due to heavy traffic load at
Congestion existing Mahatma Gandhi Setu which is 15 km upstream to the the existing Mahatma Gandhi Setu which cause
proposed bridge. The project will further provide direct frequent traffic jams on the existing road
connectivity in between NH-30 and NH-103.
2. Road Safety There will be a decrease in the number of road accidents after The existing bridge is having heavy traffic load and
this new bridge, as there will be adequate space for plying of due to inadequate space for plying the vehicles, and
vehicles to cross over and overtake each other. Also, proper poor safety arrangements, accidents are more
road signage and safety features will be provided for safety and frequent.
convenience of people.
3. Environmental The free flow of traffic on the improved highway will improve the Environmental quality will further deteriorate due to
Quality environmental quality as the emissions from the plying vehicles pollution and high emission from slow traffic
will reduce. There will be temporary increase in dust and movement and congestions with increase in traffic.
emissions during the construction phase only and is reversible.
4. River Temporary impacts on river flora and fauna mainly during Frequent traffic jams and idling of vehicles will cause
Ecosystem construction phase are expected. leakage of oil which will ultimately reach to river
through runoff causing river quality degradation.
The proposed project area has several species of flora and
fauna. This includes IUCN endangered Gangetic Dolphin,
critically endangered gharial and vulnerable Indian Soft Shell
turtle. All 3 species are also listed under schedule I of the
Wildlife Protection Act. Raghopur Diara with its sandy flood
plain are the staging grounds for some migratory birds and
nesting areas for the turtles. Construction activities and human
traffic in the diara have the potential to negatively affect dwelling
animals, including migratory birds.
Other than Ganges river dolphin, turtles (Ganges soft-shell

Turtle, Hard-shell Turtle etc.), terrestrial birds (fish owl, river
lapwing, etc.) are the important / vulnerable species found in
project area, which might have potential major impacts. High
noise level may influence their behavior, and they are therefore
likely to avoid the construction areas during the construction
period.
Temporary impacts on river water quality are expected.
During operation period smooth traffic flow will reduce river

water quality degradation.
5. Transportation The proposed bridge will provide better transportation Continued inadequate and unsafe connectivity.
165
Sl. No. Component ‘With’ Project Scenario ‘Without’ Project Scenario

Facilities infrastructure to local communities. Quality, time and People will still need to travel longer distances to
convenience of travelling from Kachhi Dargah to Bidurpur and reach from Kacchi Dargah to Bidurpur and vice versa
vice versa will be much better. Also the travel quality will and spend more time traffic jams. People from the
drastically improve for the people living in the diara because of diara will need to continue using the pontoon bridge
the proposed road connecting to the bridge. which is inundated during the monsoon months to
travel in and out of the diara.
6. Economic The economy of Bihar state is mainly based on agricultural and The economic activity will remain static and local and
Development trading activities. The industrial and agricultural developments will improve only at a slow pace.
have led to higher transport demand. With the higher transport
demand and the expansion of the existing business, there is a
growing mismatch between the vehicular population and
availability of road infrastructure and connectivity across Ganga,
which has resulted in traffic congestions, deteriorated level of
traffic efficiency and road safety in existing bridges. The
proposed bridge will bring safe and efficient connectivity across
the Ganga and particularly to Patna, the capial city of Bihar.
This will further help to enhance trade and other infrastructure
development projects.
7. Development There will be higher potential for development in this area due Development activity will be greatly hampered due to
Potential to improvement in access and consequent increase in inadequate connectivity.
economic activity. Essential community infrastructures like
drainage system, water supply, electricity, transportation etc.
will come as consequence of current development.
166
C. Alternative Alignments/Locations
382. As part of the feasibility study extensive field reconnaissance was conducted around
Kacchi Dargah, Raghopur and Bidupur, and its approaches by the engineering and safeguards
team. The team reviewed the maps (topographic, hydrological, watershed, land use) and
conducted site visits and consultations with the local people to select the best site for integrating
the proposed bridge with approach roads on both ends. Accordingly, the approach roads have
been planned to cater to city traffic in a manner to avoid further congestion by avoiding the
existing narrow road networks in the heart of the Patna city and adjoining areas.
383. During site visits, the technical team studied all existing road networks and junction
locations for overall improvement of the approach road connectivity and traffic circulation for
overall traffic. NH-30 lies on the southern end of the proposed bridge alignment. On the
northern side lies Mehnar road (SH-93) and NH-103, while there is a PMGSY network within the
Raghopur Island. There’s a temporary pontoon bridge connecting Raghopur island with Patna
city in lean season. In other seasons boats are the only means of transport.
384. After studying the course of river Ganga, by maps and field reconnaissance, prima facie,
three locations were identified as alternatives for bridge locations. These three alternative
alignments have been termed as Alternative–I, Alternative-II and Alternative–III (Shown in
Figure 74).
Figure 74: Project Alignment Options
385. The analysis has been carried out based on the approach connectivity, requirement of
land acquisition, environmental and socio-economic aspects. After careful consideration, the
Alternative IIIB option has been approved for by BSRDCL for improvement. The comparative
analysis was carried out based on various technical and socio-environmental factors as shown
in Table 72.
167
Table 72: Comparison of Alternative Alignments for Proposed 6-lane Ganga Bridge
Based on Bureau Study
SN Description
Alignment–I Alignment–II Alignment-III (A/B)
Distance from Existing Pontoon
1. 2500 M on U/S (upstream) 450 M on U/S (upstream) 1900 M D/S (downstream)
Bridge
South 1600 M 1100 M 800 M
Bridging length
North 3000 M 1550 M 1100 M
2. (Approximately)
Total 4600 M 2650 M 1900 M
Viaduct/Embankment on island 5000 M 7500 M 9000 M
Feasible Connections on Kachhi
3. 1100 M 2000 M 1800 M
Dargah (Approach length)
Feasible Connections on Bidupur
4. 5500 M 6000 M 8000 M/7300 M
(Approach length)
Type of land through which Through open / Built up / Through open / Built up / Through open / Built up /
5.
approaches to pass. cultivated land cultivated land cultivated land
Adverse impacts as it runs
Less adverse than option I
right over the western flood Least adverse impacts as it is
as it is a bit further away
plain which serves as breeding located furthest away from the
6. Ecological issues from the western flood plains
and feeding grounds for turtles, western floodplain area which
which serves as wildlife
migratory birds and other serves as wildlife habitat
habitat
reptile and bird species
• Least length on Island • Shorter Bridge length • Shorter Bridge length
• Less built-up area on Patna • Least built-up area on • Least built-up area on Patna
end and on Raghopur island island end
7. Strength • Closest to Ganga path • South channel stable • South and north channel
• Least approach length stable
• South channel stable • Less encroachment to river
ecology
• Longer bridge length • Longer viaduct on island • Very heavily built-up area on
• North channel erosion prone • More built-up area on North end and on island
• Heavily built-up area on Patna end • Longest approaches
North end • Further from Ganga path • Furthest from Ganga path
• Longer approaches • Inadequate water-way
8. Weakness
• Heavily built-up area on
north end
• North channel less erosion
prone
• Inadequate waterway
168
Based on Bureau Study

SN Description
Alignment–I Alignment–II Alignment-III (A/B)
Encroachment in prestigious river Yes, higher encroachment. Yes, medium encroachment Yes, lesser encroachment
9.
ecology
Yes (Low impacts on Flora. Yes (medium impacts on Yes (medium impacts on Flora.
Flora and fauna likely to be
10. High impacts on fauna) Flora and fauna) Less impacts on fauna)
impacted
Productive agricultural land likely

11. Yes, Lesser amount Yes, medium amount Yes, higher amount
to be impacted
Impact on Ganges river and other
12. High impacts Medium impacts Low impacts
surface water bodies
• Air – Low impacts • Air – Low impacts • Air – Low impacts
13. Environmental quality impacts • Water- High impacts • Water- Medium impacts • Water- Low impacts
• Noise – Medium impacts • Noise – Medium impacts • Noise – Medium impacts
14. Land availability Less requirements Less requirements High requirements
1. River / water body - High 1. River / water body - lower 1. River / water body - lowest
2. Diara/Island - Less 2. Diara/Island - higher 2. Diara/Island - highest
15. Land uses along the alignments 3. Residential - Less 3. Residential - highest 3. Residential - more
4. Commercial - Less 4. Commercial - Less 4. Commercial - more
5. Agriculture - Less 5. Agriculture - higher 5. Agriculture - highest
Residential / Commercial
16. Highest Lesser Lowest
structures Impacted
17. Utilities likely to be impacted Less Higher Higher
Common property resources likely
18. Less Higher Less
to be impacted
19. Religious structures affected Less Less Higher (only 3)
169
D. Engineering / Technological Alternatives
386. The formulation and analysis of engineering alternatives have been undertaken in terms
of alternative type of bridges, superstructure of bridges, type of piers, foundations, cross-
sections of approach road, highway-design principles (such as embankments for soil erosion
and slope protections, minimum width of road ride drainage, adequacy of roadway width at
cross drainage structures, minimum gradient, etc.), comparison between type of bridges i.e.
balanced cantilever, steel girder, extra dosed; flexible and rigid pavements (cement-concrete
built rigid pavement as being environmentally superior then traditional flexible pavement), and
selection of environmental friendly road/bridge/foundation construction methods.
387. Structure Options: The following structural options have been considered for the 6-lane
facility (main bridge) in this reach:
i. A bridge of 9500m length extending from km 1/530 on South bank (near Kacchi
Dargah) to km11/030 on North bank (Gopalpur ghat near Bidupur) with the entire
reach being treated as scourable and navigable. In this structural option the
following three types of structural configurations are feasible:
a. Steel truss super structure of 2 nos. 3-lane divided carriageway over RCC
pier and deep foundations.
b. PSC super structure (balanced cantilever type) 2 nos. 3-lane divided
carriageways over the RCC pier and deep foundations.
c. An Extra-dosed type (PSC super structure) of six lane carriageway over
the RCC pier and deep foundations.
ii. Two independent main bridges (with navigational clearance) over South bank (A-
1 to P-14) and North Bank (P-65 to A-2) with high embankment in the diarra with
openings for cross-drainage, vehicular, pedestrian, cattle crossings and minor
streams.
iii. Two independent main bridges (with navigational clearance) over South bank (A-
1 to P-14) and North Bank (P-65 to A-2) connected with viaduct spans (non-
navigational span and low height) in diara portion.
388. On the structural options, from the stability point of view against erosion and
sedimentation, the construction of an embankment over the diara will require continuous
protection as the island is very unstable. The diara has a history of being submerged, with its
average elevation 5 meters below the high flood level. The two bridges under option ii and iii
would require two guide bunds for each bridge. The guide bunds located on the island would
require longer length and heavier protection works, mainly due the likely instability of the island.
The abutments of the bridge on the diara will cause serious erosion downstream and will
increase the river flux during high flood flow due to flow constriction and may result to serious
changes in the river morphology. Therefore, the banks will require anti-erosion measures.
389. Constructing a single south bank to north bank bridge across the Ganga avoids the risk
from building an embankment over the unstable diara. However due to the high obliquity of the
bridge axis against the flow the Ganga particularly on the northern channel, the foundations
must be installed deeper to account for increase in scour. This single bridge maybe navigable
across the entire reach or a viaduct over the diara. This option has comparatively fewer
structural risks of erosion and scouring due to hydrological changes. Furthermore there will be
lesser ecological disturbance in the river and diara. Therefore the first structural option of a
continuous bank to bank bridge is recommended for the project.
170
390. Bridge Options: Within the first structural option the following three options have been
considered for the main bridge portion.
i. Balanced Cantilever Bridge,
ii. Steel Girder Bridge, and
iii. Extra-dosed Bridge.
391. Table 73 present the comparison of item wise cost of three superstructures for these
three bridge options.
392. Out of the three the most economical options are the Balanced Cantilever Bridge and
Extra dosed Bridge. Keeping in view the possibility of further economization based on
detailed design and planning the cost options offered by the Extra-dosed bridge option
is considered most feasible and hence recommended for the project.
393. The general arrangement drawing (GAD) and cross section for preferred option is shown
in Figure 75 and 76.
171
Table 73: Cost Comparison of 6-lane Bridge with Three Superstructure Options
172
Figure 75: General Arrangement Drawing of Preferred Option

173
Figure 76: Cross Section Detail of Preferred Option

174
VIII. PUBLIC CONSULTATIONS, INFORMATION DISCLOSURE AND GRIEVANCE

REDRESS MECHANISM
A. Public Consultations
394. In accordance with ADB’s Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS) 2009 and Environment
Impact Assessment Notification of GoI (2006), extensive consultations and public participations
are continuously being made by the BSRDC until the time of report writing. Consultations have
been undertaken with project beneficiaries, local/ government officials, community leaders, non-
government organizations (NGO’s), stakeholders in the corridor of impact and people likely to
be effected due to the project on various issues affecting them. Various measures have been
incorporated pertaining to environmental issues based on the responses from the people has
been incorporated in the project design.
1. Objectives of Consultations
395. The process of public participation/ consultations was taken up as an integral part of the
project in accordance with environmental assessment requirements. The objectives of these
consultations are:
 To inform and educate the common public, specially potentially impacted
communities/ individuals and stakeholders about the proposed project activities;
 To familiarize the people with technical, environmental, social and economic
issues of the project for better understanding;
 To solicit the opinion of the affected communities/ individuals on environmental
issues and assess the significance of impacts due to the proposed development;
 To foster co-operation among officers of BSRDCL, the communities and the
stakeholders to achieve a cordial working relationship for smooth implementation
of the project;
 To identify the environmental issues relating to the bridge and approach roads
construction work;
 Assess the views of the beneficiary communities and their willingness to
participate in the project in a bottom up planning and decision making process;
 To secure people’s inputs in respect of project planning, selection of mitigation
measures and monitoring strategies;
 To ensure lessening of public resistance to change by providing them a platform
in the decision making process;
 To inculcate the sense of belongingness among the public about the project.
2. Methodology used for Consultations
396. Both formal and informal modes of consultations were used in the public consultation
process for the project. Consultation with the stakeholders, beneficiaries, and community
leaders were carried out using standard structured questionnaires as well as unstructured
questionnaires. In addition, focused ground discussions (FGDs) and personal discussions with
officials, on-site discussion with project affected stakeholders, and reconnaissance visits have
also been made to the project area. Attempts were made to encourage participation in the
consultation process of the government officials from different departments that have relevance
to the project. Same way, local people from different socio economic backgrounds in the
villages as well as urban areas along the proposed approach road alignment, women, residents
near the proposed alignment, local commuters, and other concerned were also consulted.
175
3. Identification of Stakeholders
397. Stakeholders were identified to ensure as wide coverage as possible of the project area
as follows:
 Households in the project area including potential Project Affected Persons,
 Women groups,
 Local, regional and international voluntary organisations / non-government
organizations (NGOs),
 Government agencies, and
 Community leaders.
398. Questionnaire survey/ discussions were designed to obtain background information and
details of general environmental issues that concern people in the project area. Figure 77
shows typical roadside interview survey in the project area. In addition, environmental and
ecological issues were discussed with relevant organizations, government officials,
beneficiaries, community leaders, women groups and subject specific experts.
Figure 77: Photographs of Road Side Interviews with Affected People
399. In compliance with ADB’s SPS requirements consultations will be continued throughout
the detailed engineering design and implementation phases. The consultation process initiated
during preparation by initial environmental screening at feasibility study stage and followed by
consultations at preparation of detailed EIA study. The official consultation with the key
stakeholders started in the month of June 2013 during feasibility study as part of initial
environmental screening and continued till October 2015 as part of this detailed EIA study.
Consultations were undertaken at respective district offices and head quarter in Patna. Various
agencies consulted include Environment and Forest Department of Bihar, Zoology Department
of the University of Patna, SEIAA of Bihar, Bihar State Pollution Control Board, Zoological
Survey of India Regional Office in Patna, Inland Waterway Authority of India (Patna office),
Statistical and Revenue Departments; local, regional and international NGOs active in the
project areas, village Panchayets etc. Various issues discussed are:
 Applicability of various laws and regulations to the present bridge development
project;
 Applicability of EIA notification to the proposed project;
 Statistics of forests cover in the State and its legal status i.e. Reserved,
Protected, Unclassed;
 Protected area network of Bihar,
176
 Requirements of Forest and Wildlife Department to carryout project activities

across Ganga River;
 Benthic Flora and Fauna of the Ganges River;
 Flora and Fauna and endangered species in the State and project area in
particular;
 Threats and Conservation Activities for River Dolphins, turtles, gharials etc.
 Scope of the proposed road development, EIA and likely impacts on flora &
fauna;
 Major threats to flora & fauna in the state;
 Procedure to get clearance from forest department and NOC from pollution
control board;
 Environmental quality parameters i.e. air, water, noise quality in the State and
major sources of pollution;
 Institutional capacity of state authorities in pollution control and environmental
management;
 Socio-economic conditions and likely impacts on due to proposed bridge
development;
400. The experts emphasized the need to formulate appropriate action plan for conservation
of the Gangetic Dolphins, turtles and local / migratory birds in Diara Area. The list of officials/
people contacted along with the venue, issues raised, date of consultation is presented on
Table 74.
177
Table 74: Details of Stakeholder Consultations & Issues Discussed
S.N. Date / Venue Name of Officer Organization / Key Points Discussed

and Designation Institute
Government Agencies
1. 23 Oct 2015 / Dr. Gopal Gangetic Plains Key points discussed are:
Zoological Survey Sharma, Scientist Regional Centre,  Site specific data of flora and fauna in project area. No studies specific
of India Gangetic and In-charge Zoological Survey of to project area.
Plains Regional India, MOEFCC,  Presence of Dolphin and turtles in the project area,
Centre, Patna India  Gangetic dolphins do not migrate. Only disperse for 1-2 kms
 Project will affect aquatic system and it will also affect its habitat
permanently
 Dolphins creates its habitat near bridge piers
 Seasonal data on dolphins and other biota required at project site (5 km
corridor u/s and d/s each)
 Major vertebrates (cats, frogs, fishes, turtles, reptiles, insects diversity
etc.), benthic vertebrates
 Several local residents and migratory birds visit project area,
 ZSI has not done at work in the project area till now. It has expertise that
can be used to undertake ecological studies as part of the project.
 There are plan to declare Bhagalpur – Patna as protected area and also
to create community reserves
 Inland waterway 1 activities and dredging activities causing impacts.
Dredge material should be disposed off outside riverbed. Currently it is
being disposed on river bed itself which due to flood again coming back
to riverbed.
 Measures should include development of a permanent Research
Centre/Institute to monitor ongoing and planned activities for river
ecosystem in 10 km radius.
 All relevant stakeholders should be a part of this Research Centre with
forest department may take lead as nodal agency and other
departments as members.
 Project impacts on flora and fauna (including gangetic dolphins) should
be monitored seasonally
 Awareness campaigns should be an integral part of the project
 There are about 825 dolphins reported in main stream of ganga and
about 1214 in all streams (2012)
178

 Dolphin breed most of the time of year except monsoon.
 National Dolphin Survey is being planned. Project monitoring can be
linked to national survey if time coincides.
 A stakeholder meeting should be convened before taking decision on
measures / conservation plan for the project.
2. 24 Oct 2015 / Prof. R.K. Sinha Zoology Various issues such as presence and status of rare and endangered species
Dolphin (Dr.), HOD Department, Patna of flora and fauna in the project area, key habitats, ongoing conservation
Laboratory, University, Patna activities and programs, likely project impacts and threats to Gangetic
Zoology Dept. Dolphins and its habitat, possible measures and collaboration by project for
Patna University, the conservation of flora and fauna in the project areas. Key points discussed
Patna are:
 River ecosystem is being monitored for last three decades.
 Monthly monitoring of the water quality in Ganges river is being carried
out by the department and reports are being submitted to the
government. Disposal of untreated urban waste is one the key factors
responsible for poor water quality of the river.
 Decreasing flow in the river is also causing impacts on river ecosystem.
 Considering the time series data from last 3 decades there is positive
changes in the river water quality.
 Implementation of Ganga Action Plan is partly successful. It could have
been better.
 Conservation plan for Gangetic Dolphin is in place for entire Bihar State.
 Key species like Gangetic Dolphins, Hard and Soft Shell Turtles, Otters,
Gariyals are present in the river throughout the river. Specific data for
project site is not available.
 Habitats for these species keep changing with changing course and flow
of the river.
 Dolphins, Turtles, Otters are present in the project areas (also reported
by local fisherman’s) whereas Gariyals are mainly present in the
confluence of Gandhak (which is also close to project area) and
occasionally reported in the project areas.
 Soft shell turtles are more common
 Birds are also common in project areas. Some of them are migratory
birds.
179

 There is no Cargo/ship/vessel movement at present but in future it may
be there.
 Motorized boats are being used for local ferry services, transport of
materials, vegetables and laborers from Diera people.
 Dolphin’s do not migrate but they disperse and come back
 Breeding throughout year except monsoon season
 Bridge piers provide habitat for dolphins but some time at has adverse
impacts as well because it divided flow of river.
 Dolphins are sensitive to noise. Noise from construction activities may
affect Dolphins.
 Baseline data of biota system (including water quality, sediment, flora,
fauna) in the project area is required in order to understand existing river
ecosystem and to recommend measures to protect flora and fauna
 Seasonal data (about 3 month interval) will be required.
 A study areas should cover 5 km u/s and 5 km d/w of proposed bridge
location.
 Sampling should be done on flood plains also as they are key part of the
river ecosystem.
 Follow-up monitoring during project implementation in order to record
changes in the ecosystem due to project
 Prof. R.K. Sinha advised Ganga River Front Development Project on
river ecosystem in Patna under World Bank financing.
 Prof. R.K. Sinha and his department are ready to assist project on
developing and implementation of conservation plans for flora and fauna
including gangetic dolphins as part of the project.
 As part of project, project EA (BSRDCL) should request Prof. R.K. Sinha
for their assistance in developing and implementation of conservation
plan for flora and fauna.
 Prof. R.K. Sinha and his department can help BSRDCL PMU in day-to-
day monitoring of ecological aspects during project implementation
 Dolphins, Gariyal, Turtle are schedule 1 engendered animals
 The project should demonstrate that it is taking all possible measures to
protect these endangered species
 Working with locals is best conservation strategy (aware, train, teach
and educate them)
180

 Awareness about turtles, dolphins and gariyals
 Alternate livelihood earning programs for locals
 Ecotourism has good potential and government has shown interest in
river based ecotourism, particularly fresh water dolphin.
 Based on project DPR, strategy needs to be developed. Engineering
and ecological aspects should be considered together.
3. 26 Oct 2015 / Mr. Bharat Jyoti, Environment and Key points discussed are:
Aaranya Bhawan, Director (Ecology Forest Department,  Ecological concerns on both river flanks should be addressed
Patna and Environment) Government of  Dolphins and turtles are present in the river and their conservation
Bihar, Patna aspects should be addressed as part of the project. Prof. R.K. Sinha can
be contacted for conservation activities
 Mitigation measures should include both project specific as well as long
term conservation of ecosystem
 Small observation centres (may be on both banks of the river) shall be
established to research and monitor project related impacts during
construction stage and afterwards these observation centres can be
handed over to forest department. This will be an added measure to the
project towards conservation of ecological aspects
 A committee to monitor ecological conservation aspects may include
Zoology Department of Patna University, Zoological Survey of India,
Patna Office and Environment and Forest Department of Bihar.
 Wetlands in the project influence areas should be identified and if there
are any they can be conserved and or enhanced as part of the project.
State Wetland Authority may propose workable measures.
 Alternate livelihood activities for fisherman (on culture and capture
fisheries)
 The department is in the process of discussion to implement proposed
National Dolphin Research Centre in Patna. If project can help in this
project that would be a welcome step for the department. This need
coordination with government department level.
4. 26 Oct 2015 / Mr. L.P Singh, Environment and Key points discussed are:
Aaranya Bhawan, Conservator of Forest Department,  No notified forests in and around the proposed project site
Patna Forests (Wildlife) Government of  Nearest Protected area is Barela Bird Sanctuary in Vaishali district which
Bihar, Patna is about 20 km away from the end point of the project bridge site.
181

 Local and migratory birds are present in the project area
 In the project area three parties are active over land issues i.e. farmers,
fisherman and wildlife department
 In the ganges flood plain, only 700 ha has been notified as sanctuary
 Forest department carries inventory of flora and fauna only in notified
forests. There are no details available for project areas
 Prof. R.K. Sinha (Zoology Department of Patna University) can be
contacted for project impacts on river ecology
 Cantonment area where migratory birds are nesting is about 26 km
away from the proposed project bridge.
 Trees on private land can be cut by project proponent after paying
compensation to landowners. Forest department will undertake
evaluation of compensation towards trees to be cut. Cut trees shall be
transported to forest depot and forest department will auction the trees.
Revenue from auction will go to state government.
 As per state rule, compensatory rate for non-forest trees is 1:2
 Forest department is not associated with dredging, piling and bridge
activities in river
 If forest land involved, clearance shall be given by state forest
department for <5 ha forest land and by central government for >5 ha
forest land.
 State government has several schemes to promote forestation and tree
plantation. Increase in forest cover in the state has been observed in last
5 years.
5. 26 Oct 2015 / Mr. A.K. Singh, Inland Waterway Key points discussed are:
Inland Waterway Assistant Director Authority of India,  Movement of vessels and cargo ships in National Waterway No. 1 i.e.
Authority of India Office cum Terminal Allahabad-Haldia stretch of Ganga-Bhagirathi-Hoogli river
Office, Patna Complex, Gaighat,  Frequency of vessels and cargo is very less.
Patna  Departmental vessels undertake routine inspection on waterways to
guide cargo movement
 In Patna section movement of tourism vessels, cargo vessels and over
dimensional cargo is observed.
 These are used for ferrying tourists, transport of material and chips,
transport of laborers from one back to other etc.
182

 In the month of September movement of only 4 tourist vessels, 4 cargos
carrying material and chips, 3 empty cargoes, and 3 department (IWAI)
vessels were recorded.
 Vessels are moving from both the channels in project site i.e. north bank
and south bank of river ganges. It depend on availability of clear water
depth in the channels since depth keep changing.
 Impact of cargo/vessels movement on fishes and aquatic life is very
limited due to less movement.
 Small boats are operating near project site (about 5 km downstream) for
crossing river by local people.
 Dolphins and turtles are present in the river
 Zoological department can provide more details on flora and fauna of the
project area.
 Clearance will be required by BSRCDL from IWAI to construct bridge.
Non-Government Organizations (NGOs)

6. 26 July and 23 Dr. Preeti R. Centre for Key points discussed are:
Oct 2015 / By Kanuajia, Environment  Project background & possible impacts on Dolphin and other aquatic life
Phone and e-mail Regional Education  Ongoing work by CEE for dolphin conservation
Coordinator Northern Regional  Working areas and strategies for Dolphin protection
Cell (CEE North),  Implementation plans for community communication by the NGO and
Lucknow, India concerned individual for regional coordinator
 Working plan and profile of the NGO & work done in the project vicinity
 Issues and suggestions on measures for impact mitigation due to
development projects
 Possibilities to collaborate with project; if required as part of EMP during
different phases
7. 29 July 2015 / By Dr. Sujit P Bairagi, Dolphin Foundation, Key points discussed are:
Phone and e-mail PhD Guwahati, India  Project background & possible impacts on Dolphin and other aquatic life
Founder &  Working areas and strategies for Dolphin protection
Chairman  Limitation of NGO to work in Gangetic plains
 Action plans being taken to study Dolphin and other aquatic life
 Association with National level program on Dolphin conservation
183

different phases
8. 30 July 2015 / By Abdul Wakid, Aaranyak, Key points discussed are:

Phone and e-mail Programme Head, Guwahati, India  Project background & possible impacts on Dolphin and other aquatic life
Gangetic Dolphin  Working areas and strategies for Dolphin protection of the NGO
Research and  Ongoing work in Bihar/Patna for Dolphin Conservation
Conservation  Limitation of NGO to work in Gangetic plains
Programme  Action plans being taken to study Dolphin and other aquatic life
 Association with National level program on Dolphin conservation
different phases
9. 29 July and 23 Dr. Asghar WWF-India, Delhi Key points discussed are:
Oct 2015 / By Nawab,  Project background & possible impacts on Dolphin and other aquatic life
Phone and e-mail Senior Project  Various development projects and Dolphin conservation program by
Officer- WWF in India and Bihar
Freshwater &  Type of technologies being implemented for survey and action plans
Wetlands being taken to study Dolphin and other aquatic life
Programme,  National level program on Dolphin conservation
different phases
184
401. In order to document likely impacts on

affected persons, an interview survey has been
carried out. A sample of affected persons were
selected and interviewed through a designed
questionnaire. Precautions have been exercised
during the survey to ensure that the sample
interviewed is truly representative of the affected
groups and the questions are worded so as not
to generate a bias response. Image 8 below
shows one such interview survey. The
consultation is focussed on:
 General awareness in local
communities about environmental Image 8: View of Community Consultation
quality in terms of quality of water
in rivers, ground water, ambient air and noise quality and its sources.
 Presence of archaeological / historical sites, monuments in the project region and
likely impacts.
 Presence of endangered /rare species of flora and fauna and its locations in the
project region and in River Ganges at proposed alignment,
 Frequency of natural calamities / disasters in the region.
 Cultural places along the project alignment and likely impacts of proposed bridge
and approach road development, etc.
402. Besides interview surveys, focused group discussions (FGDs) were organized at key
locations along the project roads. In total thirteen (13) FGDs meetings involving 362 participates
from affected people, landowners, and village authorities, were organized. Specific emphasis
was given to the participants from vulnerable groups and women groups to ensure that gender
concerns are addressed in the project. Out of total participants, 54 participants were from
womens groups.
403. Summary of public consultations through focused ground discussions (FGDs) meeting
organized is presented in Table 75. Pictures and attendance sheets of the consultations are
presented in Annex 5.
Table 75: Summary of Public Consultations

Date Venue / Place Participants Remarks
19 May Village: Baans Tal 23 Participants (19 men and 04 women) All participants
2013 District: Patna from village community including village are aware
heads, teachers, housewife, business about project
owners, labours, farmers and students and all
supported the
project.
20 May Village: Fatehpur 20 Participants (19 men and 01 woman) - do -
2013 District: Patna from village community including village
housewife, business owners, labours, and
farmers.
29 May Village: Dilavarpur 16 Participants (14 men and 2 women) from - do -
2013 District: Patna village community including villages heads,
councilors, housewife, business owners,
labours, farmers and students
185
Date Venue / Place Participants Remarks

29 May Village: Mohanpur 26 Participants (24 men and 02 women) - do -
2013 District: Vaishali from village community including villages
heads, ward members, housewife, business
owners, labours, farmers and students
29 May Village: Shyamur 24 Participants (21 men and 03 women) - do -
2013 District: Vaishali from village community including villages
heads, housewife, business owners,
27 Village: Bishnupur 24 Participants (21 men and 03 women) All participants
November Telia from village community including village supported the
2014 District: Vaishali heads, housewife, business owners, project.
09 Village: Jamalpur 34 Participants (22 men and 12 women) - do -
December Chakshankar from village community including
2014 District: Vaishali government servants, housewife, business
29 Village: Kalyanpur 29 Participants (20 men and 09 women) - do -
November District: Vaishali from village community including
2014 government servants, housewife, business
04 Village: Karampur 28 Participants (24 men and 04 women) - do -
December District: Vaishali from village community including
30 Village: Khanpur 49 Participants (46 men and 03 women) - do -
November Pakri from village community including
23 Village: Nizampur- 23 Participants (21 men and 02 women) - do -
December Sabalpur from village community including
2014 District: Patna government servants, housewife, business
15 Village: 41 Participants (36 men and 05 women) - do -
December Rustampur from village community including
05 Village: Saifabad 25 Participants (21 men and 04 women) - do -
December District: Vaishali from village community including
4. Results of Consultations
404. Overall, the participants supports the projects as it promises better accessibility across
the Ganga than the existing Mahatma Gandhi Setu which is plagued with traffic jam and
deteriorating structural condition. The following findings were drawn from these consultations:
 High travel cost across the Ganga, as people resort to informal services for their
local travel need.
 High awareness of the proposed project from local leaders and mass media.
 People think that the selection of alignment is quite satisfactory.
186
 People in general expressed their willingness to pay toll in turns of a good quality
bridge in their locality.
 Due to land acquisition requirement for the project, people perceive that some
good quality agricultural land will be lost to the project and affect livelihoods of
some farmers. However, people are ready to sacrifice their land or house for this
project which will bring development to their locality.
 The major concerns of the people in terms of land acquisition are proper
compensation amount and timely payment of the compensation.
 No foreseen loss of major historical monuments or archeological sites due to the
project.
 A major concern is the assurance of government to build good quality road
bridge, safe road and transparency in payment of compensation
405. Key discussion points of the consultations carried out in 2014 which mainly focused on
the engineering design and environmental management plan is summarized in Table 76.
Figure 78: Photographs of Consultations with Stakeholders

Box 1: Discussion with villagers about the benefit of proposed bridge and the presence of man-
animal conflict in village. The villagers informed that their crops of maize, potato, wheat etc. are
being destroyed by the Neelgai and Wild Boar. One of the villagers narrated the story of how his
2-3 year old daughter was lifted by Striped Hyaena and thereafter killed. The existence of man-
animal conflict causing fears around the villages of Diara area. The villagers were happy about
the construction of bridge because that will give them proper connectivity with Patna and
Vaishali for day-to-day work.
187
Table 76: Summary findings of Public Consultation and Actions Taken

Issues Participants’ Opinion, Response to Questions Action Taken in Project
comments and Suggestions and Concerns
Any impact of the During construction and the Sufficient number of trees in several rows will Alignment is kept away from
project on the operational stage of the project, noise be planted and noise barriers will be provided sensitive receptors to the extent
sensitive sites and vibration will be experienced due to all locations exceeding noise standards. possible. Suitable measures
(mosque, to the movement of high volume of EMP will specifically cover the sanctities of including noise barriers are
graveyard, traffic; as a result devotees will be sensitive locations and training will be proposed in the EMP.
school, etc.)? facing disturbances in offering their provided to preserve them. Contractors will be
prayers in religious places. instructed to coordinate with community
leaders before scheduling any construction in
those locations.
Impact due to loss Affected people should be reassured Compensation will be paid as per government Possible livelihood restoration
of agricultural of help from the government by way of policies and rules. Possibilities for alternate measures are discussed in the
land? generating alternative sources of livelihood restoration schemes will be worked project RAP.
livelihood and employment. out. Social initiative for maintenance of
planted trees will generate alternative
employment. Borrow-pits could be potential
sites of aquaculture.
Impact of the By constructing the approach road, Necessary hydrological analysis has been Adequate cross-drainage
project on water local flood flows will be blocked. done to design the drainage structures. structures designed.
bodies, streams, Proper design will be required to avoid Sufficient number of cross-drainage measures
wetlands, drainage any localized flood. i.e. bridges, culverts, and underpasses are
system, etc. proposed in the approach roads.
Construction of Provide adequate measures and A greenbelt development plan has been EMP has provisions for green
approach roads minimize land take for approach proposed. belt development.
and other access roads. Provide adequate green belt
roads along the approach roads.
Compensation for A number of trees to be felled should Census of trees shall be undertaken and Provision for compensation and
trees to be felled be correctly counted and should be evaluated by forest department for compensatory afforestation by
during compensated accordingly. compensation. Trees will also be remunerated planting additional trees @ 1:2
construction of the by a NGO retained by BSRDC Ltd. as per state rule are made.
bridge. Compensation will be provided as per forest
department evaluation.
Does the proposed Noise, vibration and dust will be major Impact of the project upon ambient air, noise EMP includes provisions for
Project create any issues during construction. quality, soil quality, and water quality has monitoring of environmental
problem with been assessed through collection of primary parameters.
ambient air, noise baseline data. EMP will provide instructions
188

quality, soil limiting environmental qualities to comply with
quality, or water the standards and penalties for violations.
quality?
Impact of the Mostly affected will be the aquatic Survey of the ecosystem of the River Ganges Impact on aquatic environment
project on the flora and fauna. Migration and and surrounding areas has been carried out to assessed and planned to be,
aquatic spawning of Hilsa, ayer, ritha, and have key information on mitigating potential minimized or mitigated in the
environment variety of other fishes. The livelihood impacts. Key experts advise has been taken EMP. Project will continue
of the fishermen community should be and appropriate conservation measures are taking experts advise on
taken into consideration while incorporated in the project. conservation measures.
designing the bridge over the River
Ganges.
Do you have any Soil erosion and geo-hazards should Slope protection by designing retaining APs to be compensated for lost
critical issue or be considered while designing the structures, and vegetation in unstable batters land as per project RAP. Proper
concern regarding roads in the project areas. Land are considered in the engineering design. A design of cross-drainage
the proposed acquisition should be minimized and Resettlement Plan has been prepared in system.
project (e.g., proper compensation should be compliance with harmonized safeguard
flooding, Char considered. requirements. Proper compensation plan is
land, split of designed in the resettlement plan.
community, Floods of highest level so far should Quite a significant number of small bridges
sedimentation, be taken into account. The project and culverts have been proposed in the
siltation, erosion, needs to consider passage of water approach road design. Information has been
drainage, access through roads and embankments. obtained on specific locations with localized
road, damaged drainage congestion known to the community.
culvert etc.)?
Effect of Vegetation destruction will adversely An inventory of area specific vegetation and Detailed Inventorization of
construction on affect the habitats of rare species and rare species has been prepared. EMP will endangered and rare species in
watercourses, fish nesting grounds. Impact on fish provide for regeneration of the vegetation project area should be carried
migration, plants, migration and spawning. Impact on prone to destruction due to the project out as part of detailed
health and safety, workers’ health and safety, and on activities and conservation of the rare species. engineering design.
wildlife habitats. wildlife habitats. Provision of footpaths EMP has requisite provision toward protecting
along the bridge/ road. workers’ health and ensuring safety measures Occupational health safety
and for protection of wildlife habitats in the measures are incorporated in
project area. A total of 3.5m shoulder in each the EMP.
side is provided in the approach road.
Is this consultation Everybody was of the opinion that Consultation will be continued throughout the Regular consultations are being
useful? such consultations are first of its kind project detailed design, construction and organized.
189

and very useful as these are good operation phases.
channels for the affected community
to express their concern to BSRDC
Ltd., local administration and the
project team.
General perception Good support for the project. The engineering design team in the design EMP included construction
about the project Precautions to avoid adverse impact and layout of the main bridge and the other phase impacts
and the awareness during pre-construction, construction project components, e.g., the approach roads, comprehensively.
about the and operation stages of the project service areas, service roads, etc., considered
proposed project. and to ensure protection of the the anticipated adverse impacts. It will be
sensitive habitats. further updated at detailed design stage. EMP
covered specific measures to follow during the
construction process in protecting religious
and other sensitive locations.
Would you like to People would like to involve in tree- EMP has recommended possibility to employ Preference to local people in
be involved in the plantation program and also as local local people (especially PAPs as non-skilled) employment and supplier
implementation of contractors’ labourer. and businesses during construction and during construction.
the project (e.g., operation phases of the project.
construction
worker, local
contractor,
maintenance,
plantation etc.)?
190
406. In addition to discussions captured in table 76 an interview survey was been carried out
between 22-28 October 2015. It is envisaged from the interview survey that there is increased
environmental awareness among the people. It can also be seen from the table that more than
85% of the persons believes the existing environmental conditions of the area is good. Over
85% of the people agreed that the quality of air, water and noise in the area is good; whereas,
about 5% respondent feel that the environmental quality is being deteriorated. In case of
presence of archaeological / historical the responses are very few. In case of cultural and
historical sites, the response of the people is mixed. The area experiences natural disasters i.e.
floods, etc. as it also envisaged that 90% of respondent reported history of natural disaster
mostly floods. Over 86% people indicated that there are rare and endangered species of fauna
in the Ganges and its watershed (gangatic dolphin is one of them) in project area. Overall, the
general environmental conditions in the region are good and people have increased
environmental awareness. Table 78 shows the result of public opinion survey carried out in the
region.
Table 77: Peoples’ Perception about Environment Parameter in the Project Area
Sl. No. of people Positive Negative No response
Question asked about
No. interviewed response (%) response (%) (%)
1. Water quality of rivers,
24 72 24 04
ponds, wells, and canals
2. Noise quality of the area 24 86 04 10
3. Air quality of the area 24 92 03 5
4. Archaeological sites 24 21 72 07
5. Natural disaster 24 90 04 06
6. Rare species of animals 24
86 02 12
and birds
7. Cultural sites i.e. market, 24
42 50 02
melas
Note: Positive response shows that the overall environmental scenario in the area is good and wise
versa.
5. Interaction with Local/National and International NGOs
407. In order to get independent views on the likely impacts of the project, non-government
organizations at local, regional as well as international levels were consulted during the EIA
process. This includes World Wide Fund for Nature (WWF), India; Dolphin Foundation,
Guwahati, Assam; Aaranyak, Guwahati; Centre for Environment Education (CEE), Delhi;
Mandar Nature Club of Bhagalpur (Bihar), and local self-help groups. Table xx show details of
consultations with these NGOs.
408. The WWF-India is active in Bihar and it has ongoing Dolphin Conservation Programme
(established in year 2000) to the conservation of the Ganga river dolphin through scientific
research, community led field conservation projects, policy advocacy and communications &
outreach.
409. Aaranyak is based on North East India and is active in the field of Biodiversity
Conservation. It is implemented Gangatic Dolphin Research and Conservation Initiative, an
conservation program aimed at Conservation of Gangetic dolphin through research based
investigation and active participation of all concerned stakeholders.
191
410. Aspects such as conservation activities for Dolphins, presence of Dolphins in and
around project area, migratory routes, likely project impacts and possible mitigation measures
for Dolphin conservation were discussed and views and suggestions from these NGO’s were
incorporated in the EMP. Consultation will continue with these NGO’s during detailed
engineering design, and project implementation and operation.
B. Public Disclosure
411. The BSRDCL (as project EA) will be responsible for the disclosure of this EIA in
compliance to ADB’s Communication Policy 2011 and ADB SPS 2009. The draft Environmental
Impact Assessment Report will be disclosed in the English language in the office of BSRDC.
The report will also made available to interested parties on request from the office of the
BSRDCL. Since this is Category A project, the draft EIA report will be disclosed to the public
through the ADB website, 120 days before the approval of the project by ADB Board. The draft
EIA report will also be made available to all stakeholders as part of the consultation process
required under the SPS 2009. The final report will also be disclosed on ADB website.
C. Grievance Redress Mechanism
412. An integrated grievance and redress mechanism (GRM) for environmental and social
action plans is established for the project. The GRM provides a system for receiving, evaluating
and facilitating the resolution of affected people’s concerns, complaints, and grievances about
the project’s social and environmental performance. Due to the scale of the project with one
end of the bridge located in highly urbanized section of Patna City and adverse impacts are
anticipated, issues like poor legal records, voluminous titles and sometime conflicting holdings,
intensive construction activities located near communities, traffic from construction vehicles, and
conflict between migrant and host communities are expected.
413. Grievances related to the implementation of the project, will be acknowledged40,

evaluated, and responded to the complainant with corrective action proposed using
understandable and transparent processes that are gender responsive, culturally
appropriate, and readily accessible to all segments of the affected people. Records of
grievances received, corrective actions taken and their outcomes will be properly
maintained and form part of the semi-annual environmental monitoring report to ADB.
414. The nature and significance will be evaluated by the receiving party. Any complaint
which concerns project construction activity poses imminent serious risk to life and property or
will result to irreversible damage to wildlife (dolphin, migratory birds) will be immediately
forwarded to the PIU-Digha for action within 24-hour from receipt of complaint.
415. All other complaints will adhere to the following steps:

i) If the receiving party is not the PIU, then forward the filled-up intake form within
3-days from receipt of grievance.
ii) Grievances received at the PIU level will be discussed during the weekly meeting
with the Contractor, Project Management and Authority Engineer (PMAE) , and
BSRDCL-ESC. Actions that will be taken includes agreed mitigation measure to
be taken by the Contactor, monitoring schedule of the PMAE to confirm the
effectiveness, and issuance of letter to complainant describing the actions and
timelines.
40 Using the BSRDC’s Grievance Intake Form.

192
iii) For grievances that were not resolved at the PIU level within 30-days of receipt,
the PIU will elevate the case to the BSRDCL- General Manager. At this level, the
General Manager will make a determination if: a) the all feasible mitigation
measures have been implemented by the contractor, b) there is a need to
compensate residual impacts, or c) the grievance is frivolous or whimsical and no
further action is necessary. In case further mitigation measures can be
implemented, the BSRDCL-General Manager will return the complaint to the PIU
with the corresponding recommended measures to be implemented and feed-
back within 15 calendar days.
iv) For grievances that needs compensation due to unmitigated residual measures,
the BSRDCL-General Manager will elevate the case to the Grievance Redress
Committee (GRC) for resolution during its monthly regular meetings.
Complaints that were deemed frivolous or whimsical will be presented subject to
concurrence or appeal.
416. The GRC will chaired by the BSRDCL-Chief General Manager with comprise members
from the PMAE, contractor, local community, and local wildlife authority. The time for
addressing grievances received at the EA and GRC level will be dependent on the nature of
complaint received. However, all efforts will be made to respond to the grievances efficiently
with a corrective action plan and not take longer than 30 days from the receipt of grievance at
the respective level. Hence, to the extent possible corrective action plans along with clear
timeline will be communicated to the complainant within 30 days of the receipt of a
complaint within the respective level. Figure 79 present the GRM structure and process for
Bihar New Ganga Bridge Project.
193
Figure 79: Grievance Redress Mechanism

194
IX. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN AND INSTITUTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
A. Introduction
417. The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is the synthesis of all proposed mitigation
and monitoring actions, set to a time-frame with specific responsibility and budgetary needs and
sources assigned and follow-up actions defined. It contains all the information for the proponent,
the contractor and the regulatory agencies to implement environment safeguard measures
under the project within a specified time-frame.
418. The EMP consists of a set of mitigation, monitoring and institutional measures to be
taken for the project to avoid, minimize and mitigate adverse environmental impacts and
enhance positive impacts. The main objectives of the EMP are:
 To ensure the Project’s compliance with Asian Development Bank’s Safeguard
Policy Statement (SPS) and environment safeguards related regulatory
requirements of the Government of India and State of India;
 To serve as practical guide for avoidance, mitigation and compensation
measures for anticipated adverse environmental impacts during pre-construction,
construction and operation, and ensure that environmentally sound and
sustainable practices are adopted;
 To stipulate monitoring and institutional requirements for ensuring safeguard
compliance; and
B. Impacts and Mitigation Measures
419. The identified environmental issues and suggested mitigation measures with institutional
arrangements for implementation, supervision and monitoring have been provided in a matrix
format in Annex 6. The key environment issues and mitigation measures included in the EMP
matrix include two broad categories of impacts: impacts that are low to severe, but temporary
and localized; and impacts that are low, regional and permanent
420. Impacts that are low to severe but temporary and localized fall under the following
categories:
a) Encroachment on private lands and demolition of structures

b) Disruption of recreational and transport related activities across the Ganga River
including its immediate banks
c) Loss of vegetation
d) Disturbance of faunal habitat in Raghopur diara
e) Disturbance of Ichthyofauna and habitats
f) Impacts on endangered and protected faunal species
g) Deterioration of air quality
h) Increase in noise and disturbance
i) Deterioration of surface water quality
j) Deterioration of groundwater quality
k) Deterioration of soil and sediment quality
l) Disruption of road and rail traffic
m) Disruption of water traffic on the Ganga river
n) Hydrological, sedimentation and erosion risks
o) Health, safety and hygiene of construction workers
p) Landuse and social Impacts
195
q) Impacts related to road safety
421. Impacts that are low, regional and permanent. These are the long term impacts of air
pollution, GHG emissions and noise that will remain during project operation.
C. Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Program
422. Environmental monitoring is an essential tool for environmental management as it

provides the basic information for rational management decisions. To ensure the effective
implementation of mitigation measures and environmental management plan during
construction and operation phase of the bridge construction work, it is essential that an effective
Environmental Monitoring Plan be designed and followed.
423. Environmental monitoring program has the underlying objective to ensure that the
intended environmental mitigations are realized and these results in desired benefits to the
target population causing minimal deterioration to the environmental parameters. Such program
targets proper implementation of the EMP. The broad objectives are:
 To evaluate the performance of mitigation measures proposed in the EMP.
 To evaluate the adequacy of environmental assessment.
 To suggest ongoing improvements in management plan based on the monitoring
and to devise fresh monitoring on the basis of the improved EMP.
 To enhance environmental quality through proper implementation of suggested
mitigation measures.
 To meet the requirements of the existing environmental regulatory framework
and community obligations.
424. A detailed Environmental Monitoring Plan showing the frequency, location of monitoring
various environmental parameters including delineation of responsible parties is provided in
Annex 7.
1. Performance Indicators
425. The significant physical, biological and social components affecting the environment at
critical locations serve as wider/overall Performance Indicators. However, the following specific
environmental parameters can be quantitatively measured and compared over a period of time
and are, therefore, selected as specific Performance Indicators (PIs) for monitoring because of
their regulatory importance and the availability of standardized procedures and relevant
expertise.
 Air Quality with respect to PM2.5, PM10, CO, NOx and SO2 at selected location.
 Ground and Surface Water Quality with reference to DO, BOD, Oil and grease,
COD, Suspended Solids and Turbidity, Alkalinity at crossing points on
rivers/streams at selected points and also ground water samples.
 Noise levels at sensitive receptors (schools, hospitals, community/religious
places). Underwater Noise levels (Peak, SEL, and RMS)
 Vibration
 Monitoring of ecological aspects in Ganges river at project site. It will include
terrestrial fauna, aquatic flora and fauna, and avifauna. It will include number of
identified critical wildlife species (dolphins, turtles, and gharial). Dophin
movement in the project location will also be monitored.
196
 Survival rates of trees planted as compensatory plantation to compensate for lost

forestlands and compensatory plantation raised for removal of roadside trees.
 Accidents during construction and operation.
2. Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) Monitoring
426. Ambient air quality parameters recommended for monitoring road development projects
are PM2.5, PM10, Carbon Monoxide (CO), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and Sulphur Dioxide
(SO2). These are to be monitored, monthly during construction and seasonal during operation
at selected locations of plants and machinery, crushers on sites, excavation works etc. Data
should be generated once in a season excluding monsoon at the monitoring locations in
accordance with the revised National Ambient Air Quality Standards formulated by MoEF in
2009 (Annex 2).
3. Water Quality Monitoring
427. The physical and chemical parameters recommended for analysis of water quality
relevant to road development projects are pH, total solids, total dissolved solids, total
suspended solids, oil and grease, COD, Chloride, Lead, Zinc and Cadmium. The location,
duration and the pollution parameters to be monitored and the responsible institutional
arrangements are given in the Environmental Monitoring Plan. The monitoring of the water
quality is to be carried out monthly during construction and seasonal during operation at
locations identified along the project road during construction and operation phase. Weekly
monitoring shall be performed during work in channels. The Indian Standard Specifications –
IS10500: 1991 is given in Annex 3a.
4. Noise Level Monitoring
428. The measurements for monitoring noise levels would be carried out at sensitive
receptors and construction sites along the project road. The Ambient Noise Standards
formulated by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) in 1989 or the standards by State
Pollution Control Board of Manipur if such standards are stringent than those of the CPCB are
to be complied. The CPCB standards are given in Annex 3. Sound pressure levels would be
monitored on twenty-four hour basis. Noise should be recorded at “A” weighted frequency using
a “slow time response mode” of the measuring instrument.
5. Monitoring of Ecological Aspects
429. This will include monitoring the contractor’s implementation of measures to avoid,
mitigate and minimize impacts on the local biodiversity including the three protected species in
the project area: Gangetic dolphin, Ganges softshell turtle and the Gharial.
430. It will also cover implementation of the Biodiversity Conservation Plan (BCP) which
includes conduction of baseline biodiversity surveys; monitoring of biodiversity levels in
comparison to baseline and implementation of biodiversity conservation activities.
6. Success of Re-vegetation
431. The project involves construction of bridge and approach roads, hence these will require
felling of trees. Such lost vegetation will be required to be replaced by compensatory plantation.
As per policy of the Bihar Government rules two trees have to be planted for each tree
197
removed. These compensatory plantations will have to be monitored by the implementing

agency with the help of the Forest Department. Such monitoring will be conducted through
random samples. Such sampling should cover at least 5% of the area planted up.
D. Environmental Reporting System
432. The monitoring plan covering various performance indicators, frequency and institutional
arrangements of the project in the construction and operation stages, along with the estimated
cost, is summarized in Table 78.
433. The reporting system will operate linearly with the contractor who is at the lowest rank of
the implementation system reporting to the PMAE, who in turn shall report to the PIU. All
reporting by the contractor and PMAE shall be on a quarterly basis. The PIU shall be
responsible for preparing targets for each of the identified EMP activities.
434. The compliance monitoring and the progress reports on environmental components may
be clubbed together and submitted to the PIU quarterly during the implementation period. The
operation stage monitoring reports will be annual provided the Project Environmental
Completion Report shows that the implementation was satisfactory. Otherwise, the operation
stage monitoring reports will have to be prepared as specified in the said Project Environmental
Completion Report.
435. Responsibilities for overseeing will rest with the PMAE’s staff reporting to the PIU.
Capacity to quantitatively monitor relevant ecological parameters would be an advantage but
monitoring will primarily involve ensuring that actions taken are in accordance with contract and
specification clauses, and specified mitigation measures as per the EMP.
436. During the implementation period, a compliance report may include description of the
items of EMP, which were not complied with by any of the responsible agencies. It would also
report to the management about actions taken to enforce compliance. It may however, be noted
that certain items of the EMP might not be possibly complied with for a variety of reasons. The
intention of the compliance report is not to suppress these issues but to bring out the
circumstances and reasons for which compliance was not possible (such as jurisdictional
issues). This would help in reinforcing the implementation of the EMP.
437. Photographic records will also be established to provide useful environmental monitoring
tools. A full record will be kept as part of normal contract monitoring. Reporting and Monitoring
Systems for various stages of construction and related activities have been proposed to ensure
timely and effective implementation of the EMP.
438. The reporting system has been prepared for each of the stage of bridge and road
construction namely:
 Pre construction stage
 Construction Stage
 Post-construction and Operation Stage
439. This reporting shall be done through:

 Reporting by the Contractor to the PMAE
 Reporting by PMAE to PIU.
440. The stage-wise reporting system is detailed out in the following Table 78.
198
Table 78: Stage-wise Reporting System of PIU

Project Management and Project Implementation Unit
Contractor
Authority Engineer (PMAE) (PIU)
Format* Oversee /
Item Implementation Reporting to
No. Reporting Field
and Reporting Supervision Environment
to PIU Compliance
to PMAE Officer of PIU
Monitoring
C1 Monitoring of Before start - Quarterly - Quarterly
construction of work
site and
construction
camp
C2 Target sheet - As required After - After Monitoring
for Pollution Monitoring
Monitoring
C3 Target sheet - Monthly Quarterly Quarterly Bi-annual
for roadside
plantation
C4 Target sheet - Monthly Quarterly Quarterly Bi-annual
for monitoring
of cleaning
water bodies
C5 Target sheet - Monthly Quarterly Monthly Quarterly
for monitoring
of critical
wildlife species
O1 Target sheet - - - As per After Monitoring
for Pollution monitoring
Monitoring plan
O2 Target sheet - - - Quarterly After Monitoring
for survival
reporting of
roadside
plantation
for monitoring
of cleaning
water bodies
for monitoring
of critical
wildlife species
Note: Formats will be developed and provided by supervision consultant to the contractor.
E. Institutional Arrangement
441. BSRDCL is the Executing Agency (EA) for the project and will be responsible for
ensuring that all components of this EIA are complied with. BSRDC is headed by the Chief
General Manager (CGM). While BSRDCL implements a number of road and bridge projects,
there will be one Project Implementation Unit (PIU) specifically for the “Bihar New Ganga Bridge
Project”. The PIU will be headed by a Deputy General Manager (DGM) who will also be the
Project Director (PD) and will report to the CGM. Under the PIU there will be two Environmental
and Resettlement Officers for the northern and southern side of the bridge respectively who will
199
be responsible for project implementation on site and handling environment and resettlement
issues.
442. The Contractor which will be procured under the EPC modality will update, revise and
implement the EIA, EMP and EMOP as part of the civil works contract. The Project Monitoring
and Authority Engineer (PMAE) with the required environmental team (Environmental Specialist
and Biodiversity Expert) will be mobilized to monitor and supervise the contractor’s
implementation of these measures. An external monitor for environment safeguards or local
Non-Governmental Organization (NGO) will be recruited separately to: i) implement biodiversity
conservation activities targeted at conserving the Gangetic dolphin, turtles and other floral and
faunal species; and ii) provide impartial monitoring of implementation and supervision of the
EMP and EMOP by the contractor and PMAE respectively.
443. The organization structure of the proposed institutional arrangement for the
implementation of environment safeguards under the project is given in figure 80.
Responsibilities of various agencies involved in the project implementation are described in
subsequent paragraphs.
A. Roles and Responsibilities
1. BSRDCL as Executing Agency (EA)
444. As a Government of Bihar entity the BSRDC is authorized to “construct, execute,

carryout, improve, work, develop, administer, manage, control or maintain in Bihar and
elsewhere all types of roads, highways, bridges, works and conveniences, approach road, to all
departments of Government of Bihar or any other department, agency, organization or body
through Road Construction Department (RCD) or directly. 41 ” The Chief General Manager
handles the overall operation and supported by three General Managers: i) planning,
procurement and contract management (PPCM); ii) project management, and iii) headquarters.
445. The EA’s responsibilities will mainly be focused on addressing environment safeguard
issues that cannot be addressed at the PIU level. Specific responsible are the following:
 Ensuring that all environment safeguard requirements as given in ADB SPS
2009, and applicable laws and rules under MOEF are being complied with during
all stages of the project.
 Timely endorsement and signing of key documents and forwarding to the
respective agency such as those required for processing of environmental
clearance, forestry clearance etc. and disclosure of reports on ADB website.
 Taking proactive and timely measures to address any environment safeguards
related challenges such as delays in processing of clearances (during pre-
construction stage), significant grievances (during construction stage)
 Endorse environmental assessment and/or environmental monitoring reports
submitted by the PIU or PMAE and forward to ADB for disclosure on the ADB
website
 Coordinate and seek technical guidance and support from relevant government
agencies, institutions and NGOs to address environmental challenges within the
project when necessary
41
http://bsrdcl.bih.nic.in/
200
 Information dissemination, consultation, and public disclosure of Project related

information through the BSRDC website or local media or by convening public
meetings.
 Overall management of the grievance and redress mechanism
Figure 80: Institutional Arrangements for Environment Safeguards

BSRDCL ADB
External Monitoring
Agency (EMA) CGM Government Agencies
(DOEF, SPCB, ZSI, PU)
PIU
(DGM as Project Director)
PIU Level
Environmental and Environmental and
Resettlement Officer -North Resettlement Officers -South
PMAE- PMAE-
Environment Specialist Biodiversity Expert PMAE
Level
Contractor
EPC Contractor - EPC Contractor - Level
EHS Specialist Ecologist
2. Project Implementation Unit (PIU)
446. The PIU will be responsible for overseeing day to day management of physical
construction works on site and implementation of social and environmental safeguards. Specific
responsibilities of the PIU on environment safeguards are:
201
 Review and approve any environment safeguard documents prepared by the

contractor, PMAE or EMA and forward them to the CGM or Authorized officer at
BSRDC for endorsement
 Review and approve all sub-plans submitted by the contractor such as camp site
layout plan, compliance to regulatory requirement action plan, borrow area
management plan, traffic re-routing management plan, disposal management
plan, spill management plan, tree plantation management plan and others.
 Monitoring, inspection and evaluation of EMP implementation by the contractor
 Require the contractor to modify the EMP when necessary,
 Prepare forms, reports and all documents etc. for processing of environmental,
forestry clearances, tree cutting permits and other relevant clearance and permits
in a timely manner and submit for further review and signing to the CGM or
Authorized Officer at BSRDC
 If any problems or long delays are encountered when processing the clearance
documents, immediately alert the CGM or authorized officer at BSRDC and seek
ways resolve the problem at the soonest.
 Ensure that all necessary regulatory clearances are obtained prior to
commencing any civil work.
 Ensure that for Engineering Procurement and Construction (EPC) based
contracts updating of the EMP and EMOP based on detailed design and
implementation of the EMP is included under the contractor’s responsibilities.
 Ensure that the EMP which includes required mitigation measures and
monitoring requirements with defined Bill of Quantity (BOQ), forms part of bidding
document for the case of item rate based contracts.
 Ensure that contractors have access to the EIA report including EMP and EMOP
of the project.
 Ensure that contractor understand their responsibilities to mitigate environmental
problems associated with their construction activities.
 Ensure and monitor that all required permits, no objection certificates etc. are
obtained by the contractor for establishment and operation of equipment and
facilities as detailed in the EIA.
 With the support of the PMAE ensure that the contractor implements the EMP
including EMOP as given in the EIA report.
 In case of unanticipated environmental impacts during project implementation
stage immediately inform ADB to make a decision on whether additional studies
need to be carried out or updates need to be made to the EIA report or EMP
 In case of unanticipated impacts, depending on the decision made above,
instruct the PMAE or EMA to conduct additional studies or update the EIA and
EMP.
 Where necessary seek technical guidance from relevant government agencies
and institutions (such as Forestry Department, Patna University, Zoological
Survey of India)
 In case during project implementation project needs to be realigned, review the
environmental classification and revise accordingly, and identify whether
supplementary environmental studies are required. If required, prepare the TOR
for undertaking the studies and instruct the PMAE or EMA or hire another
environment consultant to carry out the study.
 Ensure that construction workers work under safe and healthy working
environment in accordance with the occupation health and safety requirements in
the EMP.
202
 Ensure effective implementation of Grievance Redress Mechanism to address

affected people’s concerns and complaints.
 Review the quarterly environmental monitoring reports on implementation of
environment safeguard requirements including the EMP and EMOP prepared by
the PMAE and forward it for endorsement to the CGM or Authorized officer in
BSRDC for further forwarding to ADB for disclosure on the ADB website
 Review reports prepared by the EMA and forward it for endorsement to the CGM
or Authorized officer in BSRDC for further forwarding to ADB for disclosure on
the ADB website
 Provide necessary support to ensure successful implementation of specific
programs concerning environment safeguards such as tree plantation and
biodiversity conservation that will be implemented by the external monitoring
agency in coordination with relevant government agencies and institutions
 Ensure proper disclosure of project related information to concerned parties
through the BSRDC website, public meetings, press conferences or other means
3. Project Management and Authority Engineer (PMAE)
447. BSRDCL will mobilize a Project Management and Authority Engineer (PMAE) for
supervision of implementation of civil works, including the EMP and EMOP. The PMAE’s
environment team will consist of an Environmental Specialist and a Biodiversity Specialist. The
PMAE Environment team will ensure strict and effective implementation of the EMP by the
Contractors. Specific responsibilities of the PMAE environmental team are the following:
 Support BSRDCL and the PIU on preparing documents and reports required for
securing clearances, permits related to project implementation
 Support BSRDCL and the PIU with all other measures to ensure relevant
statutory clearances are secured on time;
 Review the proposed final design and construction activities of the EPC
contractors to ensure that they avoid or minimize adverse environmental impacts
on the local biodiversity and specifically on the Gangetic Dolphin, Gharial and
Ganges Turtle
 Review the updated EIA report, EMP and any other supplementary
environmental assessments that will be conducted by the EPC contractor
 Review and approve all sub-plans submitted by the contractor such as camp site
layout plan, compliance to regulatory requirement action plan, borrow area
management plan, traffic re-routing management plan, disposal management
plan, spill management plan, tree plantation management plan and others and
recommend for their approval or improvements, to the Team Leader;
 Provide training to PIU, PMAE and Contractors’ staff on implementing
environmental safeguard measures;
 Conduct regular site inspections to examine environmental compliances and
suggest corrective actions;
 Conduct day-to-day supervision of implementation of stipulated safeguard
measures by the contractor to ensure accountability;
 In case of unanticipated environmental impacts during project implementation
stage immediately alert the PIU and provide recommendations on whether
additional studies need to be carried out or updates need to be made to the EIA
report or EMP
 In case of unanticipated impacts, depending on the decision made by the PIU
conduct additional studies or update the EIA and EMP.
203
 In case the project needs to be realigned during project implementation, advise

the PIU if there is a need to conduct supplementary environmental studies.
Depending on instructions of the PIU conduct the supplementary environmental
studies.
 Provide on-site technical guidance, advise or on the job training to contractors on
specific environment safeguard issues when necessary
 Ensure that the contractor follows requirements on location, timing and method of
construction activities to avoid or minimize adverse impacts on the local
biodiversity with special attention on critical and natural habitat and endangered
floral and faunal species such as the Gangetic Dolphin and Ganges turtle
 At times of emergencies concerning environment safeguards (example: having a
dolphin stranded on the project construction site; spillage of large quantities of
fuels in the Ganga river) immediately take necessary actions to resolve the issue
 In times of emergencies as stated above, where necessary coordinate with the
relevant government agencies or institutes for resolving the issue (example: seek
technical help from the local Forestry Department for freeing the stranded
dolphin; seek guidance from the State Pollution Control Board to resolve the
spillage issue)
 Ensure the smooth functioning of the Grievance Redress Mechanism and
facilitate the addressing of grievances from affected parties
 Maintain proper records of all grievances received and addressed under the
project
 Prepare quarterly Environmental Monitoring Reports on implementation of
environment safeguards and submit it for review and approval to the PIU
 Provide necessary support to the PIU to ensure proper disclosure of project
related information to concerned parties through the BSRDC website, public
meetings, press conferences or other means
4. External Monitoring Agency
448. The BSRDCL will employ an external monitoring agency (EMA) or a local Non-
Governmental Organization (NGO) to conduct third party monitoring of environment safeguards
implementation under the project and implement biodiversity conservation activities targeted at
conserving the local biodiversity in and around the project area. The EMA will comprise of an
environmental and ecological expert. Specific responsibilities of the EMA are:
 Review the proposed final design and construction activities of the EPC
contractors to ensure that they avoid or minimize adverse impacts on the local
biodiversity and specifically on the Gangetic Dolphin, Gharials and Ganges Turtle
 Review the updated EIA report, EMP and any other supplementary
environmental assessments that will be conducted by the EPC contractor
 Review the EMOP and ensure that the location and timing of checking/testing all
environmental parameters are in accordance with the site conditions. Assess the
results of ambient and emission/effluent monitoring and advice BSRDC on
adequacy of mitigation measures to ensure compliance to relevant standards.
 Review all sub-plans submitted by the contractor related to waste management,
construction camp site location and layout, occupational health and safety, traffic
management, tree plantation, borrow area management, spill management and
others to ensure that they avoid adverse environmental impacts such as
destruction of critical or natural habitat, contamination of water etc.
204
 Review specific measures proposed for mitigating and minimizing impacts on the
local biodiversity and targeted at specific species such as the Gangetic Dolphin,
Ganges Turtle and others. Provide feedback to ensure that the proposed
measures are adequate and effective
 Review the Biodiversity Conservation Program (BCP) proposed in the EIA report
and update it to include more site specific details, make the plan more effective
and account for any design updates within the project
 Implement the activities proposed under the BCP
 Coordinate and work closely with the other relevant agencies and institutions
(such as Patna University, Zoological Survey of India, Forestry Department) as
necessary for successful implementation of the BCP
 To facilitate easier monitoring and implementation of the biodiversity
conservation activities, identify and procure necessary equipment such as
camera traps, GPS tracking devices etc. and use them for monitoring during
project operations.
 Prepare semi-annual monitoring reports on implementation of the BCP and
findings of third party monitoring conducted on activities implemented by the
contractor and PMAE for submission to the PIU. These semi-annual reports will
be disclosed on the ADB website.
 After completion of the construction works continue monitoring the effectiveness
of the activities implemented under the BCP for 3 years during project
implementation.
 Based on the traffic data collected under the project, monitor the GHG emissions
generated from the traffic for a minimum of three years during project operation
following the approach used in the EIA report.
 After completion of the construction works, continue monitoring activities on an
annual basis for atleast 3 months (one month per year) during project
implementation to confirm no residual adverse impacts occur and ensure stability
of mitigation measures on slope stabilization, erosion control, effective borrow
area and waste disposal sites closure, survival of plantation, cleaning up of
camps and temporary storage, and restoration of affected utilities and community
properties that may have been affected during decommissioning.
 During project operation prepare annual monitoring reports on monitoring
conducted on the effectiveness of the BCP, GHG emissions, effectiveness of
mitigation measures implemented for submission to BSRDC and ADB.
5. Contractor
449. The contractor will be procured through engineering, procurement, and construction
(EPC) modality. The BSRDCL will impose that the Contractor will be compliant to ISO 14001
Environmental Management System, OHSAH 18000 (2007) related Occupational Health and
Safety (OHS) and SA 8000 (Social Accountability). The Contractor will provide a team of
ecologist and environmental and occupational health and safety specialist that will have
presence in all construction and camp sites and active construction fronts. The key
responsibilities of Environment and EHS Specialists of Contractor will include the following:
 Update the EIA report if necessary based on the final design of the project
facilities;
 Update EMP and EMOP based on the final design of the project facilities;
 Conduct additional environmental studies if necessary to ensure the final design
will have no adverse environmental impacts;
205
 Prepare all sub-plans required for environment safeguards such as the traffic
management plan, construction material and storage handling plan, waste
management plan, borrow area management plan, occupational health and
safety plan, tree plantation plan, camp layout plan, haul route management plan
and others;
 Implement the EMP and ensure the construction works comply with the EMP and
conditions of all environmental clearances and permits issued by respective
statutory bodies;
 Conduct monitoring of environmental quality parameters in accordance with
EMOP
 Conducting periodic environmental and safety training for contractor’s engineers,
supervisors and workers;
 Ensure that construction activities are carried out in a manner that avoids,
mitigates and minimizes adverse impacts on the local biodiversity as given in the
EIA report and EMP
 Preparing a registers for material sources, labour, pollution monitoring results,
public complaint and as may be directed by the PMAE;
 Preparing and submitting monthly reports to PMAE on status of implementation
environment safeguard measures.
6. ADB’s Responsibilities
450. As a funding agency ADB is responsible for the following:

 Review the EIA report including EMP and other supplementary environmental
assessment reports, provide feedback and disclose the reports on the ADB
website as required by the ADB SPS;
 Issue approval of projects and project components based on the approval of the
respective EIA or other environmental assessment reports;
 Provide assistance to BSRDCL, if required, in carrying out its responsibilities and
for building capacity for safeguard compliance;
 Monitor overall compliance of the project to EIA and EMP through review
missions;
 Review all environmental monitoring reports submitted by BSRDC, provide
feedback and disclose the reports on the ADB website as required by the ADB
SPS
 Provide guidance to the BSRDCL and PIU on issues related to inclusion of new
project components, changes in project design, occurrence of unanticipated
environmental impacts during project implementation, emergency situations and
others as necessary.
 Organize coordination and capacity building activities on environment safeguards
for BSRDC the PIU, PMAE and EMA as and when necessary
7. Other Partner Organizations
451. BSRDCL will partner and seek technical advice from relevant experts in the following
organizations (Table 79) to enhance the effectively of EMP implementation.
206
Table 79: List of Partner Organizations in Implementing the EMP

Name of Organization Role in EMP Implementation
Department of Ecology Gangetic Dolphin conservation and awareness
Zoological Survey of India Rescue of wildlife. Implementation of the BCP. General technical
guidance on biodiversity related issues under the project.
Patna University Technical guidance in addressing biodiversity related grievances
and issues.
District Magistrate and law and order and resolving the social disputes that may arise
Revenue Departments during construction activities
State Police Department Traffic management
Public Heath Engineering Disposal of domestic, sewage, and solid wastes
Department/ Municipal
Corporation
SPCB Monitoring of emissions and discharges from hot mix, crushing,
and cement batching plants
District Forest Department Cutting of trees and compensatory afforestation’s
NGOs Implementation of community awareness programs
2. Capacity Building
452. The following capacity building program will be implemented as part of the PMAE’s
scope of work for the PIU:
 Training Module 1: i) Environment Baseline of Ganga Bridge (1 dayx20pax), ii)
Environmental Management and Monitoring Plans for Ganga Bridge (1
dayx20pax);
 Training Module 2: Environmental inspection, monitoring and reporting
(2daysx20pax); and
 Training Module 3: Organizational arrangement, roles and responsibilities,
Organizing the grievance and redress mechanism (5daysx20).
453. Also part of the PMAE TOR is to ensure all contractors environment and health and
safety team undergo training on the following subjects:
 Orientation program on HIV/AIDS and sexually transmitted diseases;
 Orientation on best practices to control dust, noise, community health and safety,
camp hygiene, occupational health and safety;
 Orientation on the conservation of gangetic dolphin and migratory birds;
 Orientation on self-monitoring and self-reporting requirements; and
 On the job training on EMP implementation.
B. Environmental Safeguards Budget
454. An environmental management budget of US$ 1, 324, 413 or INR 83,438,000 has been
estimated for implementation of the environmental safeguards under the project. This budget
also includes cost of implementing the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and
Environmental Monitoring Plan (EMOP), Biodiversity Conservation Plan. The summary budget
table is provided in table 80 and the details of environmental management and monitoring
budget is given in Table 81.
207
Table 80: Summary of Environment Safeguards Budget

No. Environment Component Amount (US$) Remarks
1 Implementation of EMP and EMOP 46,413.00 Most avoidance and
mitigation measures either
do not incur costs or are
embedded in the civil works
costs
2 Budget for environment safeguards 334,000.00
personnel under the PMAE
3 External Monitoring Activities including 944,000.00
implementation of the Biodiversity
Conservation Plan
GRAND TOTAL 1,324,413 US$
83,438,000.00 INR
208
Table 81: Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan Cost Estimates

SL. No. ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT RATE AMOUNT RESPONSIBILITY
(Rs.) (Rs.)
A. Compensatory Afforestation
A.1 Compensatory afforestation and avenue plantation 900 No. 1,000 900,000 PIU through forest
@ 1:2 trees department
B Environmental Monitoring 0
B.1 Ambient air quality monitoring during construction 72 No. 8,000 576,000 PIU through Approved
and operations phases (During construction: 3 Monitoring Agency
seasons x 4 years x 4 locations. During operation:
2 seasons x 3 years x 4 locations)
B.2 Ambient noise level monitoring during construction 72 No. 3000 216,000
and operations phases (During construction: 3
seasons x 4 years x 4 locations. During operation:
2 seasons x 3 years x 4 locations)
B.3 Water quality monitoring of surface water during 48 No. 6000 288,000
construction (During construction: 3 seasons x 4
years x 4 locations)
B.4 Water quality monitoring of drinking water during 24 No. 6000 144,000
construction (During construction: 3 seasons x 4
years x 2 locations)
B.5 Soil quality monitoring during construction (3 36 No. 5,000 180,000
seasons x 4 years x 3 locations)
B.6 Monitoring survival rate of plantation (1/year x 3 3 No. 20,000 60,000
years)
C Noise Barriers
C.1 Provide the Noise barrier at sensitive areas like 80 Rm 7,000 560000 Contractor through BOQ
schools and hospitals. The noise barriers of hollow
brick wall/reinforced concrete panels with height of
3.5m. The design of the noise barrier shall be
approved by the engineer in charge.
Grand Total (INR) 2,924,000
Grand Total (US$) 46,412.00
209
X. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
455. The proposed project aimed at construction of a six-lane bridge over river Ganges at
Patna city of Bihar is classified as environment Category A as per ADB SPS requirements, due
to risks concerning the large scale of the project requiring significant quantities of civil works;
presence of the Ganges river dolphin (Platanista gangetica), Gharial (Gavialis gangeticus) and
the Ganges softshell turtle (Nilsoonia gangetica). Three species are all listed under schedule I
of the Wildlife Protection Act of India. Under IUCN the first is classified as endangered, the
second as crtically endangered and the third as vulnerable.
456. The Bihar State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA) has issued a letter
stating that the project requires an environmental clearance (EC). Accordingly the processing of
the EC is currently being undertaken by BSRDCL.
457. The proposed bridge is a green-field project that will involve the construction of: a 9.760
km main bridge structure across river Ganges and 10km of access roads on either side of the
bridge. Landuse in the project influence area of 10 km radius is mainly agricultural fields and
grasslands with some trees forming mostly modified and natural habitat. There are no forests or
protected areas in the project influence area. Detailed analysis on the habitat range of the three
protected species has shown that the project influence area is not critical habitat for any of
these three species.
458. Construction activities for pre-construction, construction and post-construction and

operation stages were identified. An analysis of interactions of the construction activities with
the environment identified two broad types of impacts. First: impacts that are low – severe,
temporary and localized and second: impacts that are low, permanent and regional.
459. Amongst the first type severe impacts are expected on the local biodiversity and the
three protected species; air quality through generation of dust and fugitive emissions and the
local hydrological regime. To address impacts on biodiversity and the protected species several
measures have been recommended for avoidance; mitigation, minimization and enhancement.
It includes implementation of a Biodiversity Conservation Plan (BCP) to ensure no “net loss” of
biodiversity. For mitigating and minimizing impacts of dust and fugitive emissions mitigation
measures such as water sprinkling, maintenance of minimum distances from existing
communities, proper maintenance of construction equipment and vehicles are proposed.
Additional hydrological studies have been recommended and further design of erosion
protection measures particularly in Raghopur diara will need to be carried out. Implementationof
recommended measures are expected to maintain the level of impacts to average – low,
temporary and localized.
460. Amongst the second type key impacts are air pollution, increase in GHG emissions and
noise levels due to generation of new traffic over the bridge. The bridge runs mainly over the
river and there are only 3 settlements along the approach roads and only 4 sensitive receptors
within 10m of the road edge. Projections made show that PM2.5 and PM10 exceeds WB-EHS
standards only in year 15 at 10m from the road edge. There will be no exceedances of GOI and
WB-EHS standards for noise levels due to construction of noise barrier, difference in height of
the elevated road and location of the sensitive receptors. Given these factors, the impacts are
expected to be low and minimal.
461. To ensure proper implementation of avoidance, mitigation, minimization and

environmental enhancement measures a strong institutional system will be established with
210
safeguards officers in the PIU and ecological experts under teams of the PMAE, contractor and
external monitor. The external monitor will conduct third party monitoring and implement the
BCP. Together with the strong institutional system adequate budget has been allocated to
ensure recruitment of required personnel and implementation of necessary monitoring and
conservation activities.
462. Further the following measures will be taken to ensure that the project will remain
complaint to the ADB SPS: declaration of key biodiversity areas as no-go zones; prohibition of
piling for construction of piers; prohibition of major dredging; implementation of good practice
guidelines; sourcing of construction material only from existing licensed quarries.
463. Recommendations. The EPC modality will be followed under the project. Therefore the
detailed design of the bridge and approach roads will be prepared by the contractor. Project
components that will be identified during the detailed design stage are: location of camp sites;
quarries; haul routes; all season access routes to the diara; borrow areas; disposal sites and
others. Considering these factors this EIA report and EMP will updated and revised during the
detailed design stage. Construction works of the main bridge and access roads will be allowed
on site upon approval of the revised EIA report and EMP. The contractor will be required to
allocate enough budget to implement all items under the EMP.
464. Conclusions. In light of the technical, institutional and budgetary measures

recommended it is expected that the project will avoid severe, permanent and regional impacts.
There will be no net loss in biodiversity. Tremendous social and economic benefits will be
generated in Bihar by the bridge creating a reliable, sustainable and safe access to Patna city
and connection between south and the lesser developed north Bihar.
211 Annex 1
ANNEX 1: RAPID ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT (REA) CHECKLIST
Rapid Environmental Assessment (REA) Checklist

Country/Project Title: India/ Bihar Ganga Bridge Project
Sector Division: SARD -SATC
Screening Questions Yes No Remarks

A. Project Siting
Is the project area adjacent to or within any of the
following environmentally sensitive areas?
 Cultural heritage site X It has been observed that no

archaeological site or monument and
cultural heritage site exists close to
highway.
 Protected Area X
 Wetland X
 Mangrove X
X At the middle of the project is the

 Estuarine
Raghopur Diara formed by the Ganga
River.
 Buffer zone of protected area X
 Special area for protecting biodiversity X
B. Potential Environmental Impacts

Will the Project cause…
 encroachment on historical/cultural areas; disfiguration X

of landscape by road embankments, cuts, fills, and
quarries?
 encroachment on precious ecology (e.g. sensitive or X The entire Ganga River is a known
protected areas)? habitat of the endangered Gangetic
Dolphin (Platanista gangetica ssp.
Gangetic)
About 450 trees will be cleared.

 alteration of surface water hydrology of waterways X There is potential risk to increase
crossed by roads, resulting in increased sediment in siltation and change in flow at the bridge
streams affected by increased soil erosion at foundations along the two streams of
construction site? the Ganga River and discharge points of
drainage canals leading to the Ganga
River.
 deterioration of surface water quality due to silt runoff X All wastewater from the construction
and sanitary wastes from worker-based camps and camps should be treated to meet
chemicals used in construction? surface water quality standards prior to
disposal.
 increased local air pollution due to rock crushing, X Short-term increase in dust from rock
cutting and filling works, and chemicals from asphalt crusher, materials handling and storage,
processing? and cement plants.
Annex 1 212

 risks and vulnerabilities related to occupational health X The scale of the work required will
and safety due to physical, chemical, biological, and expose a large number of workers to
radiological hazards during project construction and hazardous working conditions in terms
operation during project construction and operation? of noise, dust, and working on elevated
and confined spaces, handling hot
works, and co-location of heavy
equipment with work areas.
 noise and vibration due to blasting and other civil X No blasting is required but pile driving
works? will create substantial noise and
vibration.
At the plant site the sources of noise will

be: stone crushing, asphalt production
plant and batching plants, diesel
generators. At the work zones,
community residing near to the work
zones from temporary construction
activities.
 dislocation or involuntary resettlement of people? X As per the Land Acquisition Plan (LAP)
prepared for the project, 118.08
 dislocation and compulsory resettlement of people X hectares of land will be required for the
living in right-of-way? project.
 disproportionate impacts on the poor, women and X None expected.

children, Indigenous Peoples or other vulnerable
groups?
 other social concerns relating to inconveniences in X The alluvial soil is prone to re-
living conditions in the project areas that may trigger suspension from unpaved road travel
cases of upper respiratory problems and stress? and wind erosion. Adequate dust
suppression must be implemented.
 hazardous driving conditions where construction X The bridge approaches links to existing
interferes with pre-existing roads? roads of NH-30 (diverted) near
Didargunj, Patna-Mokana Road ROB,
and along NH-103 towards Hazipur and
Mehnar.
 poor sanitation and solid waste disposal in construction X Several construction camps will house
camps and work sites, and possible transmission of skilled workers increasing the risk of
communicable diseases (such as STI's and HIV/AIDS) communicable disease transmission.
from workers to local populations? The civil works contract will compel the
contractors to link with state health
programs to control diseases.
 creation of temporary breeding habitats for diseases X The nearness of the construction area
such as those transmitted by mosquitoes and rodents? to a major river and the need for
substantial borrow area increase the risk
of producing habitats for mosquitoes. In
compliance to FIDIC provision, the
contractors will be required to provide
sanitary and hygienic camps including
pest control as approved by local health
offices.
 accident risks associated with increased vehicular X As diverted traffic from the existing MG
traffic, leading to accidental spills of toxic materials? Bridge will use the new bridge, the risk
of accident and spills will also increase.
The project operators capacity to
respond to contingent events must be
enhanced.
213 Annex 1

 increased noise and air pollution resulting from traffic X During construction in Majlishpur a Girls
volume? Middle School is located very near the
project alignment will be vulnerable to
noise. Noise advisories, speed brakes,
and noise barriers will be required.
During operation stage, permanent
noise barriers may be required to be
constructed.
 increased risk of water pollution from oil, grease and X Discounting major accidents, oil and
fuel spills, and other materials from vehicles using the heavy metals discharges from road
road? users are minimal and in trace amounts.
 social conflicts if workers from other regions or X Sourcing of laborers within the city and
countries are hired? state will be prioritized to reduce the
number of migrant workers and the size
of construction camp.
 large population influx during project construction and X Not expected as only skilled workers will
operation that causes increased burden on social be brought by the contractor and
infrastructure and services (such as water supply and majority of the laborers will be sourced
sanitation systems)? from the City.
 risks to community health and safety due to the X Other than fuel and lubricants, there are
transport, storage, and use and/or disposal of materials hazardous materials that are needed in
such as explosives, fuel and other chemicals during the construction of the bridge.
construction and operation?
 community safety risks due to both accidental and X Accidental spots can be reduced by
natural causes, especially where the structural correcting the curves, improvement of
elements or components of the project are accessible to junctions, and complying with design
members of the affected community or where their standards for the ROB.
failure could result in injury to the community throughout
project construction, operation and decommissioning.
Annex 1 214
A Checklist for Preliminary Climate Risk Screening
Country/Project Title:
Sector :
Subsector:
Division/Department:
Screening Questions Score 1

Remarks
Location and Design of Is siting and/or routing of the project (or its 2 The preferred
project components) likely to be affected by climate alignment was
conditions including extreme weather related based, among
events such as floods, droughts, storms, others, on channel
landslides?
stability.
Would the project design (e.g. the clearance for 2 The embankment
bridges) need to consider any hydro- and bridge heights
meteorological parameters level, (e.g., sea- were based on
peak river flow, reliable water level, peak wind HFL and
speed etc)?
navigational
requirements.
Materials and Would weather, current and likely future 0 Predicted change
Maintenance climate conditions(e.g. prevailing humidity level, in climate based
temperature contrast between hot summer days on Climate Wizard
and cold winter days, exposure to wind and would not affect
humidity hydro-meteorological parameters
likely affect the selection of project inputs over construction
the life of project outputs (e.g. construction materials
material)? selection.
Would weather, current and likely future climate 1 Siltation of the two
conditions, and related extreme events likely channels will
affect the maintenance (scheduling and cost) increase
of project output(s) ? maintenance cost
for navigation. The
diara has history
of breaching.
Performance of project Would weather/climate conditions, and related 0 Unlikely
outputs extreme events likely affect the performance
(e.g. annual power production) of project
output(s) (e.g. hydro-power generation
facilities) throughout their design life time?
Options for answers and corresponding score are provided below:
Response Score
Not Likely 0
Likely 1
Very Likely 2
Responses when added that provide a score of 0 will be considered low risk project. If adding all
responses will result to a score of 1-4 and that no score of 2 was given to any single response,
the project will be assigned a medium risk category. A total score of 5 or more (which include
providing a score of 1 in all responses) or a 2 in any single response, will be categorized as high
risk project.
215 Annex 1
Result of Initial Screening (Low, Medium, High):_____HIGH____
Other
Comments:______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
Prepared by: ________________
1
If possible, provide details on the sensitivity of project components to climate conditions, such
as how climate parameters are considered in design standards for infrastructure components,
how changes in key climate parameters and sea level might affect the siting/routing of project, the
selection of construction material and/or scheduling, performances and/or the maintenance
cost/scheduling of project outputs.
Annex 2 216
ANNEX 2: COMPARISON OF WB AND GOI AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS
A comparison between the ambient air quality requirements between the World Bank (WB)
Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) guidelines and the National Ambient Air Quality
standards (NAAQS) under the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 of GOI as
given in table below shows that the NAAQS has requirements on three more parameters (Pb,
Co and NH3) in comparison to the WB EHS. The NAAQS has differentiated standards for two
types of areas: i) industrial, residential, rural and other areas and ii) ecologically sensitive areas.
The WB EHS has guidelines values which are the required standards but allows for gradual
compliance to the guideline values through staged interim targets. Most WB EHS guideline
requirements are more stringent than NAAQS except for the NO2 one year average in
ecologically sensitive areas where the NAAQS requirements are more stringent.
Table 1: Ambient Air Quality standards of WB EHS Vs. the GOI NAAQS
Ambient Air Averaging WB Guideline Value GOI Standards for GoI Ecologically
Quality Period Industrial, Sensitive Area
Parameter Residential, Rural (notified by Central
and Other Areas Government)
Sulfur dioxide 24-hr 125 (Interim target 1)
(SO2) (ug/m3) 50 (Interim target 2)
20 (guideline) 80 80
10 min 500 (guideline)
Annual None 50 20
Nitrogen 1 Year 40 (guideline) 40 30
dioxide (NO2) 24 Hour None 80 80
(ug/m3) 1 Hour 200 (guideline)
PM10 1 Year 70 (Interim target 1)
(ug/m3) 50 (Interim target 2)
30 (Interim target 3)
24-hr 150 (Interim target 1)
PM2.5 1 year 35 (Interim target 1)
(ug/m3) 25 (Interim target 2)
24-Hour 75 (Interim target 1)
37.5 (Interim target 3)
Ozone (O3) 8-hr daily max 160 (Interim target 1)
(ug/m3) 100 (guideline) 100 100
Lead (Pb) Annual 0.5 0.5
µg/m3) 24 hours 1.0 1.0
Carbon 8 hours 2000 2000
Monoxide
(CO) µg/m3 1 hour 4000 4000
Ammonia Annual 100 100
(NH3) µ/m3 24 hours 400 400
217 Annex 3
ANNEX 3: COMPARISON OF WB EHS AND GOI AMBIENT NOISE LEVEL STANDARDS
A comparison on noise level requirements between the WB EHS guidelines and the NAAQS
under the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 of GOI as given in table B shows
that the required levels are equal for residential, institutional and educational areas. The
NAAQS requirements for commercial areas are more stringent while the WB EHS requirement
for daytime noise in industrial area is more stringent.
Table 1: Ambient Noise level standards of WB EHS Vs. the GOI NAAQS
Receptor WB EHS GOI NAAQS
Daytime Nighttime Daytime Nighttime
7:00-22:00 22:00-7:00 6:00-22.00 22:00-6:00
Residential 55 45 55 45
Institutional; educational None None
Industrial 70 70 75 70
Commercial 65 55
Silence Zone None None 50 40
Annex 3a 218
ANNEX 3A. INDIAN STANDARD DRINKING WATER SPECIFICATION: IS 10500:1991
Sl. Permissible
Substance/ Characteristic Desirable Limit Remarks
No. limit
Extended to 25 if toxic
1 Colour, Hazen units, Max 5 25 substance are not suspected in
absence of alternate sources
2 Odour Unobjectionable a) Test cold and when heated
b) Test at several dilution
Test to be conducted only after
3 Taste Agreeable
safety has been established
4 Turbidity NTU, Max 5 10
5 pH value 6.5 to 8.5 No relaxation
Total Hardness (as CaCO3
6 600 600
mg/lit)
7 Iron (as Fe mg/lit, Max 0.3 1.0
8 Chlorides (as Cl mg/lit Max 250 1000
To be applicable only when
water is chlorinated. Treated at
Residual Free Chlorine, consumer end. When protection
9 0.2
mg/lit Max against viral infection is
required, it should be Min 0.5
mg/lit
10 Dissolved Solids mg/l, Max 500 2000
11 Calcium (as Ca) mg/l, Max 75 200
12 Copper (as Cu) mg/l, Max 0.05 1.5
13 Manganese (Mn) mg/l Max 0.1 0.3
May be extended up to 400
14 Sulphate (As SO4), Max 200 400 provided (as Mg) does not
exceed 30
15 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l, Max 45 100
16 Fluoride (as F) mg/l, Max 1.0 1.5
Phenolic Compounds (as
17 0.001 0.002
C6H6OH) mg/l Max
To be tested when pollution is
18 Arsenic (as As mg/l 0.05 No relaxation
suspected
19 Lead (as Pb) mg/l 0.05 No relaxation
Anionic Detergents (as
20 0.2 1.0
MBAS) mg/l
To be tested when pollution is
21 Chromium (as Cr) mg/l 0.05 1.0
suspected
22 Mineral Oil mg/l 0.01 0.03
23 Alkalinity mg/l 200 600
95% of the sample should not contain coliform in 100 ml. 10 coliform
24 Total Coliform
/100 ml
219 Annex 4
ANNEX 4: DETAILS OF TREES TO BE CUT
A: Details of Trees to be cut along Kachidargah-Bidupur Road (Left side)

Approx
Chainage (in Tree Name of
Sl.No Name of Village Girth Size Remarks
km.) No. species
(in Cm)
01 0+000 to 1+140 Sabalpur NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
02 1+140 to 2+900 Rustampur NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
03 2+900 to 4+700 Himatpur NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
Jamalpur Chak Shankar
04 4+700 to 5+800 Ganga Pd. Diara NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
05 5+800 to 6+200 Jafrabad Dih NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
06 6+200 to 7+100 Shaikahbad NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
07 7+100 to 9+000 Karampur NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
08 9+000 to 10+200 Jahagirpur Fulli NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
09 10+200 to 10+900 Madhurapur NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
10 10+900 to 11+200 Sultanpur chak farid NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
Vishunpur
Kishundas@Majlishpur
11 10+800 to 10+900 chak Gangadhar NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
12 10+900 to Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 1 Palm 150 Ganga River Water Area
13 Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 2 Palm 145
18 Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 7 Mango 75
19 Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 8 Shisham 90
22 Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 11 Khajoor 70
23 11+400 Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 12 Khajoor 65
Vishunpur Kisundas @
24 11+400 to Majlishpur 13 Shisham 65
25 Majlishpur 14 Shisham 60
26 Majlishpur 15 Palm 155
27 Majlishpur 16 Gular 100
28 Majlishpur 17 Mahua 90
30 11+500 Majlishpur 19 Shisham 55
Madhura Sultanpur
31 11+500 to Pachkatiya 20 Palm Tree 150
Madhura Sultanpur
32 Pachkatiya 21 Palm Tree 145
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
37 Madhura Sultanpur 26 Palm Tree 155
Annex 4 220
Approx
km.) No. species
(in Cm)
Pachkatiya
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
39 Pachkatiya 28 Shisham 55
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
43 11+900 Pachkatiya 32 Mango Tree 70
44 11+900 to Dilawalpur Gowardhan 33 Palm 155
45 Dilawalpur Gowardhan 34 Palm 160
46 Dilawalpur Gowardhan 35 Shisham 90
52 Dilawalpur Gowardhan 41 Khajoor 100
53 Dilawalpur Gowardhan 42 Mango 75
59 Dilawalpur Gowardhan 48 Simar 140
61 Dilawalpur Gowardhan 50 Simar 120
65 13+200 Dilawalpur Gowardhan 54 Palm 160
Mathura Sultanpur
66 13+200 to Pachkatiya 55 Palm 154
Mathura Sultanpur
67 Pachkatiya 56 Palm 152
Mathura Sultanpur
68 Pachkatiya 57 Palm 154
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
70 Pachkatiya 59 Mango 160
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
221 Annex 4
Approx
km.) No. species
(in Cm)
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
82 Pachkatiya 71 Barhal Tree 130
Mathura Sultanpur
83 Pachkatiya 72 kathal Tree 120
Mathura Sultanpur
84 Pachkatiya 73 kathal Tree 110
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
Mathura Sultanpur
88 15+800 Pachkatiya 77 Palm Tree 150
89 15+800 to Khanpur Pakari 78 Palm Tree 145
90 Khanpur Pakari 79 Barhal Tree 60
91 Khanpur Pakari 80 jalebi Tree 144
92 Khanpur Pakari 81 Palm Tree 160
101 Khanpur Pakari 90 Arjan Tree 100
110 Khanpur Pakari 99 Khajoor 60
117 16+700 Khanpur Pakari 106 Palm Tree 150
118 16+700 to Kalyanpur 107 Palm Tree 160
119 Kalyanpur 108 Palm Tree 154
Annex 4 222
Approx
km.) No. species
(in Cm)
125 Kalyanpur 114 Khajoor 100
128 Kalyanpur 117 Arjan Tree 40
139 Kalyanpur 128 Neem Tree 120
140 Kalyanpur 129 Mango 150
150 Kalyanpur 139 Shisham 38
151 Kalyanpur 140 Babul Tree 120
155 Kalyanpur 144 jalebi Tree 35
171 Kalyanpur 160 Simar Tree 135
172 Kalyanpur 161 kathal Tree 150
223 Annex 4
Approx
km.) No. species
(in Cm)
179 Kalyanpur 168 pipal Tree 150
196 19+000 Kalyanpur 185 Palm Tree 150
197 19+000 to Telia 186 Neem Tree 30
198 Telia 187 Shisham 30
199 Telia 188 Bair Tree 35
200 Telia 189 Simar Tree 120
201 Telia 190 Mango 160
203 Telia 192 Sirish Tree 110
212 Telia 201 Mahua 90
213 Telia 202 Palm Tree 140
Annex 4 224
Approx
km.) No. species
(in Cm)
237 19+680 Telia 226 Palm Tree 154
B. Details of Trees to be cut along Kachidargah-Bidupur Road (Right side)
Approx
Tre Girth
e Name of Size
Sl. No Chainage (km.) Name of Village No. species (Cm) Remarks
01 0+000 to 1+140 Sabalpur NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
02 1+140 to 2+900 Rustampur NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
03 2+900 to 4+700 Himatpur NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
Jamalpur Chak Shankar
04 4+700 to 5+800 Ganga Pd. Diara NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
05 5+800 to 6+200 Jafrabad Dih NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
06 6+200 to 7+100 Shaikahbad NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
07 7+100 to 9+000 Karampur NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
08 9+000 to 10+200 Jahagirpur Fulli NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
09 10+200 to 10+900 Madhurapur NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
10 10+900 to 11+200 Sultanpur chak farid NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
Vishunpur
Kishundas@Majlishpur
11 10+800 to 10+900 chak Gangadhar NIL NIL Ganga River Water Area
12 10+900 to Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 1 Palm Tree 145
13 Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 2 Palm Tree 146
22 Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 11 Khajoor 45
23 Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 12 Mango 90
24 Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 13 Arjan Tree 90
25 14+400 Chak Shaid Ali @ Darwa 14 Mahua 80
26 14+400 to Majlishpur 15 Shisham 60
30 Majlishpur 19 Palm Tree 150
34 Vishunpur Kisundas @ 23 Khajoor 110
225 Annex 4
Approx
Tre Girth
e Name of Size
Majlishpur
39 11+500 Majlishpur 28 Shisham 80
Madhura Sultanpur
40 11+500 to Pachkatiya 29 Shisham 65
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
43 Pachkatiya 32 Simar Tree 140
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
49 Pachkatiya 38 Simar Tree 150
Madhura Sultanpur
Madhura Sultanpur
51 11+900 Pachkatiya 40 Simar Tree 160
52 11+900 to Dilawalpur Gowardhan 41 Palm Tree 145
58 Dilawalpur Gowardhan 47 Palm Tree 150
63 Dilawalpur Gowardhan 52 kathal Tree 95
65 13+200 Dilawalpur Gowardhan 54 Palm Tree 145
66 13+200 to Sultanpur Pachkatiya 55 Palm Tree 150
67 Sultanpur Pachkatiya 56 Palm Tree 152
72 Sultanpur Pachkatiya 61 Khajoor 70
Annex 4 226
Approx
Tre Girth
e Name of Size
73 Sultanpur Pachkatiya 62 Khajoor 75
74 Sultanpur Pachkatiya 63 pipal Tree 200
78 15+800 Sultanpur Pachkatiya 67 Palm Tree 145
79 15+800 to Khanpur Pakari 68 Palm Tree 160
80 Khanpur Pakari 69 Mango 95
96 Khanpur Pakari 85 Shisham 38
97 Khanpur Pakari 86 Shisham 35
99 16+700 Khanpur Pakari 88 Mango 50
100 16+700 to Kalyanpur 89 Babul Tree 75
122 Kalyanpur 111 Sirish Tree 120
227 Annex 4
Approx
Tre Girth
e Name of Size
130 Kalyanpur 119 Neem Tree 58
132 Kalyanpur 121 Sirish Tree 125
146 Kalyanpur 135 Mahua 220
150 19+000 Kalyanpur 139 Mango 65
151 19+000 to Telia 140 Shisham 36
165 Telia 154 Bair Tree 105
180 Telia 169 Khajoor 80
182 Telia 171 Khajoor 100
Annex 4 228
Approx
Tre Girth
e Name of Size
193 Telia 182 Neem Tree 60
211 19+680 Telia 200 Shisham 35
229 Annex 5
ANNEX 5: RECORD OF PUBLIC CONSULTATIONS
A. Photolog of Consultation
Conduction of FGD at Baans Tal Village Conduction of FGD at Baans Tal Village
Conduction of FGD at Dilawarpur Village Conduction of FGD at Fatehpur Village
Conduction of FGD at Mohanpur Village Conduction of FGD at Shyampur Village

Annex 5 230
Conduction of FGD at Bishnupur-Telia Village Conduction of FGD at Jamalpur Chakshankar

Village
Conduction of FGD at Kalyanpur Village Conduction of FGD at Karampur Village
Conduction of FGD at Kanpur Pakri Village Conduction of FGD at Nizampur-Sabalpur

Village
231 Annex 5
Conduction of FGD at Rustampur Village Conduction of FGD at Saifabad Village

Annex 5 232
B. Attendance Sheets of FGDs
i. List of Participants in FGD at Baans Tal Village

233 Annex 5
Annex 5 234
ii. List of Participants in FGD at Diwalapur Village

235 Annex 5
iii. List of Participants in FGD at Fatehpur Village

Annex 5 236
iv. List of Participants in FGD at Mohanpur Village

237 Annex 5
Annex 5 238
v. List of Participants in FGD at Shyampur Village

239 Annex 5
Annex 5 240
vi. List of Participants in FGD at Bishnupur Telia

241 Annex 5
vii. List of Participants in FGD at Jamalpur Chakshankar

Annex 5 242
243 Annex 5
viii. List of Participants in FGD at Kalyanpur

Annex 5 244
245 Annex 5
ix. List of Participants in FGD at Karampur

Annex 5 246
247 Annex 5
x. List of Participants in FGD at Khanpur Pakri

Annex 5 248
249 Annex 5
xi. List of Participants in FGD at Nizampur-Sabalpur Village

Annex 5 250
xii. List of Participants in FGD at Rustampur Village

251 Annex 5
Annex 5 252
xiii. List of Participants in FGD at Saifabad

253 Annex 5
Annex 6 254
ANNEX 6: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
Environmental Avoidance/Mitigation/ Referenc Location Monitoring Monitoring Mitigation Institutional Responsibility

Issue/ Compensation Measures e to laws/ indicators Methods Costs Implementation Supervision
Component guideline (MI)/
Performance
Target (PT)
A. DESIGN AND PRE-CONSTRUCTION STAGE
1. Establishment of Contractors Environmental Management System
1.1 Establishment of Upon contract award, MI: No later Review the Part of Contractor BSRDCL
Environmental Contractors shall be than 60 days Contractors contractors
Management advised by BSRDCL on the from NTP Enviromenta costs
System EMP requirements. these l
activities shall Managemen
The Contractor, before the be initiated t System
start of physical works shall and
prepare an Environmental completed
Management System that before the
outlines the minimum start of
environmental management physical
requirements for the works on site.
implementation of the
Project. PT: CA clear
and robust
Contractor’s conduct Environment
monthly coordination Management
meetings on environment System
safeguards. Records on approved by
all such meetings will be PMAE and
systematically BSRDCL is in
maintained place atleast
2 months
On a weekly basis as a before the
minimum, environmental start of
communications shall be physical
delivered by the works on site
contractor to its workers
to present information on
the management of
environmental risks or
key site environmental
issues.
1.2 Conduction of Since the EPC contractor MI: Updated Review the Part of Contractor PMAE,
further studies and will prepare the detailed EIA report updated contractors BSRDCL
255 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
investigations design of the bridge and with further EIA and costs
approach roads and bridge details on Baseline
end facilities, the contractor exact location Biodiversity
will do the following: and size of study report
1) Update the EIA report construction
and EMP to include camps;
information on design quarries,
changes, further details borrow areas
of the design, and
additional information construction
such as on the exact material haul
location of the routes;
construction camps, access routes
quarry and borrow to the diara;
areas and construction additional
material haul routes, hydrology
access routes to the studies;
diara etc. findings of
2) Conduct further baseline
hydrological biodiversity
investigations to ensure study that will
accurate design of be prepared
bridge foundation, by the
stabilization and External
protection works on the Monitor for
diara (see item 5.1 Environment
below). Incorporate Safeguards
findings of such
investigations in the PT:
updated EMP Update EIA is
3) Incorporate findings of finalized and
the biodiversity approved by
baseline study that will the PMAE and
be conducted by the BSRDCL
External Monitor for before start of
Environment the
Safeguards in the EIA construction
report works for the
4) Reconfirm the number main bridge
and location of and approach
Annex 6 256

Performance
Target (PT)
sensitive receptor roads.
(school, religious
center, residential
building) for air
pollution and noise
levels and incase
where air quality and
noise level exceed
GOI, WB-EHS limits
design appropriate
mitigation measures
where feasible
5) Check the need for
chance find procedures
for important
archaeological or
historical artifacts and
sites
6) Conduct other studies
and investigations as
found necessary after
reviewing the EIA
report and site
conditions
7) Collect baseline (pre-
construction) data on
the air, water and soil
quality and noise levels
on the construction
camp sites,
construction sites and
approach roads
1.3 Contractor The Contractor shall MI Site Included in Contractor PMAE,
Personnel and appoint an on - and off-site Nomination of inspection Contractors BSRDCL
Resources environmental environmental and manpower
representative(s) and persons. discussion costs
alternates who shall be with
familiar EMP and Legal and PT contractors
Other Requirements. The Environment staff
Contractor appointed persons are
257 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
environmental present on all
representative shall ensure active
that the environmental construction
requirements set in this sites at all
document are adequate, times
relevant and understood by
the contractors
management team and
supervisors for effective
communication to
workgroups. He/she will be
responsible for
implementation and
monitoring compliance with,
the contractor
Environmental Management
Plan (EMP).
1.4 Contractors All personnel working for MI: Records of Review
training and or on behalf of the topics, records CRAW
awareness raising Contractor shall receive a of attendance report,
programs Project site induction and attendance
delivered by the Company presenter’s sheets,
Representative, including name certificate for
an environmental all ground
induction, prior to PT: CRAW, breaking
commencing work on site. site induction activity
and atleast
The Contractor must one health and
organize a Construction safety training
Risk Assessment Workshop conducted
(CRAW), detailing how before start of
specific environmental risks physical
associated with their Scope construction
of Work will be managed, works
legal compliance, inspection
and audits, and progress
tracking and reporting.
At the completion of the
CRAW, the contractor will
incorporate any additional
Annex 6 258

Performance
Target (PT)
environmental controls /
management requirements
identified into the EMP.
All personnel shall be

required to undergo a
Project site induction that
includes the environmental
requirements of the Project.
Contractor site
management, supervisors
and all environmental
persons including the
BSRDC Environment and
Resettlement Officers and
other nominated
environmental
representative shall
undergo a Health and
Safety (Leaders)
Awareness Course, which
details general
environmental awareness
and specific performance
requirements expected on
site.
All workers shall be

trained on spill response.
The contractor shall
maintain spill response
kits in all worksites.
1.5 Preparation of Before the start of physical MI: All required Review of Part of Contractor PMAE,
sub-plans works on site and subplans are subplans contractors BSRDCL
establishment of camps, ready and costs
the following sub-plans will available in the
be submitted by the campsite
contractor to the PMAE for
approval: PT: All
259 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
1) Camp layout and subplans are
management plan approved by
2) Borrow area PMAE and
management plan BSRDCL
(see annex 9 for before the start
guidance) of the
3) Traffic management respective
plan activity
4) Hauling route (Example:
management plan for Camp layout
transporting plan is
construction approved
materials from borrow before
areas and quarries establishment
5) Occupational Health of camp)
and safety plan
6) Emergency
management plan
(see annex 10 for
guidance)
7) Waste disposal and
management plan
(see annex 11 for
guidance)
8) Construction material
storage and handling
plan (see annex 12
for guidance)
9) Tree plantation plan
2. Design and Planning of Approach roads

2.1 Design of A viaduct type of design Design Approach MI: Final design Review of To be Contractor BSRDCL
approach road. with elevated road requirement roads on the that will be existing included in and PMAE
Design type (high supported by piers is northern adopted along preliminary EPC
embankment or recommended over a and with design, contractor’s
viaduct type or solid embankment type southern justifications conduction costs
others) can create design to avoid and side of main and rationale of field
problems of soil minimize problems of soil bridge behind selecting assessment
erosion, poor erosion, dust, road safety, the respective s and
Annex 6 260

Performance
Target (PT)
drainage, worsen drainage, creating barrier design preparation
flooding, road safety for agricultural activities, of detailed
issues, negatively people, domestic animals PT: Final design design
affect nearby and wildlife. will include
agricultural fields provisions for
and create a barrier mitigating
for people and issues of soil
domestic animals erosion,
and wildlife. drainage, road
safety and
minimizing
barrier effect for
agricultural
activities,
people,
domestic
animals and
wildlife
2.2 Land acquisition The road ROW must be The Right to Approach MI: Payment Check LA Included BSRDCL and BSRDCL,
and livelihood loss designed to meet the Fair road location of records; under Resettlement PMAE
to affected persons minimum standard Compensati in compensation design project NGO
requirements and avoid on and Kachhi and drawings vs budget for
unnecessary acquisition of Transparenc Dargah assistance to land plans; resettlemen
land. y in Land village DPs as per t
Acquisition, (southern RP Interview
Appropriate compensation Rehabilitatio side) and with
or lost land will be paid in n And Bidupur Number of affected
accordance with the Land Resettlemen village complaints/gri persons
Act of the GOI and the ADB t Act, 2013. (northern evances
SPS as provided in the and side) related to Check
Resettlement Plan ADB’s compensation status of
involuntary and employme
resettlemen resettlement nt given to
t policy. PT: Minimal local
number of people
Contract complaints/gri during
Clause for evances. All constructio
preference cases of n
to local resettlement
people and
261 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
during rehabilitation
employmen if any are
t. resolved at
GRC level.
No case
referred to
arbitrator or
court.
3. Design and planning of the main bridge
3.1 Land acquisition The access routes The Right to Raghopur MI: Payment of Check LA Included BSRDCL and BSRDCL,
and livelihood loss to connecting the road in the Fair diara compensation records; under implementing PMAE
affected persons in diara to the main bridge Compensati and assistance design project NGO
diara
must be designed to meet on and to DPs as per drawings vs budget for
the minimum standard Transparenc RP land plans; resettlemen
requirements and avoid y in Land t
unnecessary acquisition of Acquisition, Number of Interview
land. Rehabilitatio complaints/grie with affected
n And vances related persons
Appropriate compensation Resettlemen to
or lost land will be paid in t Act, 2013. compensation Check
accordance with the Land and and status of
Act of the GOI and the ADB ADB’s resettlement employmen
SPS as provided in the involuntary PT: Minimal t given to
Resettlement Plan resettlemen number of local
t policy. complaints/grie people
vances. All during
cases of constructio
resettlement n
and
rehabilitation if
any are
resolved at
GRC level. No
case referred
to arbitrator or
court.
3.2 Impacts on The bridge design must Bridge MI: Final Review of: To be
wildlife – Gangetic consider having none or alignment in design of the design of the included in Contractor PMAE,
Dolphin, Gangetic minimal impacts on the the Ganga bridge. bridge the EPC BSRDCL,
Annex 6 262

Performance
Target (PT)
turtle, Gharial and local biodiversity. river and Number of substructure contractor’s External
other mammals, Raghopur bridge piers and costs Monitor
migratory birds, Location and spacing of diara falling inside superstructu Ecology
fishes, reptiles and bridge piers must be key habitat re;
benthic organisms designed in a manner to sites. Schedule construction
avoid key habitat areas of construction method
such as breeding and activities. planned and
feeding grounds, migration Construction list of
routes etc. of key method and equipment to
biodiversity species found type of be used;
in the project area such as equipment that wildlife
dolphins, migratory birds, will be used. sighting plan
reptiles and others. Management
plan for wildlife
The schedule or time of sighting.
construction of the piers
and main bridge must PT: None of
avoid to the extent the piers
possible key seasonal should be
wildlife activities such as located in key
migration and breeding of habitat areas.
the Gangetic Dolphin, There will be
Gangetic Turtle, Gharial, minimal or no
and migratory birds, overlaps in
reptiles and mammals. timing of
constructionan
Decisions on method of d key seasonal
construction and type of wildlife
technology and activities.
equipment to be used Noise and
must consider the noise vibration levels
and vibration levels and generated by
extent of siltation being construction
generated. Noise and method/equip
vibration levels must be ment will be far
far below levels that can below levels
cause injury to dolphins that can cause
and other wildlife. injury to
Construction of piers must dolphins and
include measures to other
263 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
contain the siltation to a endangered
minimum area within the species. There
river as excess siltation will be a clear
can hamper wildlife and
activities. comprehensive
management
Appropriate protocols and plan for wildlife
procedures must be sighting.
prepared for sighting of
dolphins and other
endangered wildlife
species (migratory birds,
reptiles etc.) in the
construction zone. The
objective of the protocols
and procedures must be
aimed at having no or
minimal impacts on the
respective wildlife species.
4. Design of Road Safety Features

4.1 The new bridge The design must provide IRC SP:44- Main MI: Presence Review of Part of Contractor PMAE
and access roads proper, safe and easy 1996: bridge, of road safety road safety contractors and
may become a new access for the local access features in the features and costs BSRDCL
Highways
safety hazard and people, vehicles and cattle roads and design of the access
accident zone if to move from one side of Safety Code junctions main bridge routes for
adequate safety the access roads to with NH30 and access local traffic
features are not another. It must also have IRC SP: 88- and NH103 roads. Easy and
included in the safe pedestrian paths on 2010: and safe pedestrians
design the bridge. Appropriate Manual on access in project
signages and spead Road Safety facilities design
control measures must be provided for
Audit
provided on the bridge local people
and access roads in IRC SP: 30- living on either
accordance with relevant side of the
IRC requirements as 1968: approach
provided in the next Standard roads
column Letters and
 Numerals of PT: Road
Annex 6 264

Performance
Target (PT)
Different safety features
Heights for included in a
maner to
Use on
minimize
Highways interactions
between the
IRC SP: 35- new bridge
1997: Road traffic and local
Markings traffic and
pedestrians
IRC SP:
103-1988:
Guidelines
for
Pedestrian
Facilities
IRC SP: 67-

2001: Code
of Practice
for Road
Signs
5. Construction camps and yards – a number of construction camps and yards will need to be established under the project for housing the
contractor’s staff and workers; storage of construction material and equipment, having equipment repair and maintenance and other
purposes.
5.1 The location and Camps must be located at Design Construction MI: Distance Review of To be Contractor PMAE,
sanitation and waste least 500m away from Requirement camp and of the camps constructi included BSRDCL
management of the settlement areas and The Water yard and yards on camp in the
(Prevention
construction camps water bodies. locations in from layout EPC
and Control
and yards may result of Pollution) the northern settlements plan contractor’
in problems of noise, There should be no Act,1974and and and water s costs
dust, air pollution, construction camp in its southern bodies.
erosion, siltation and designated “no-go” zones amendments side of the
pollution of water as stated in the EIA, thereof main bridge PT: The
bodies nearby chapter V, section E, para distance
339 (ie. western end of The Building should be a
Raghopur diara, river and Other minimum of
265 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
banks/edges) to avoid Construction 500m. No
impacts on migratory workers construction
birds, reptiles and other (Regulation of camp in “no-
Employment
wildlife species. go” zones
and
Conditions o
A camp layout plan must service) Act
be prepared and 1996
submitted to the PMAE for
their review and approval
before starting
establishment of the camp
sites.
Contractors shall clearly
delineate the boundary of
their lay down areas on-
site and install sufficient
contractor signage to
indicate responsibility for
such areas.
5.2 Livelihood The construction camps The Right to Selected MI: Budget Check LA For land BSRDCL and BSRDCL,
impacts on local and yards must be sited Fair areas for amount set records, land acquisition: resettlement PMAE
people due to need and planned in a manner to Compensati establishing aside for plans versus NGO for land
for acquiring or meet minimum on and construction payment of camp layout Included acquisition
leasing land requirements and avoid Transparenc camps and compensation plan; under
unnecessary acquisition or y in Land yards in the and assistance project Contractor for
leasing of land. Acquisition, northern or lease rent Interview budget for land leasing
Rehabilitatio and with affected resettlement
Budget for appropriate n And southern Total area of persons
compensation or rental will Resettlemen side of the camps and For land
be set aside to meet t Act, 2013. main bridge yards. leasing:
requirements of relevant and Must be
acts and regulations of the ADB’s Lease included in
GOI and the ADB SPS as involuntary agreement. the EPC
provided in the resettlement contractor’s
Resettlement Plan. policy. Number of costs
complaints/grie
Proper lease agreements . vances related
with clear terms and to
conditions must be signed compensation
Annex 6 266

Performance
Target (PT)
between the contractor and and
respective land owners. resettlement or
leasing of land
PT: Minimal
number of
complaints/grie
vances. All
cases of
resettlement
and
rehabilitation
and leasing of
land if any are
resolved at
GRC level. No
case referred
to arbitrator or
court.
6. Managing hydrology, sedimentation and erosion risks – protection works will be required in the north and south channel and the diara area in
order to ensure the stability of the bridge foundation and piers
6.1 Impacts on the Soil stabilization works on Bridge pier MI: Expected Review of To be Contractor PMAE,
hydrology, the edges of the two north foundation changes in additional included in BSRDCL
sedimentation and and south channels and in in and piers hydrological hydrological the EPC
erosion patterns of the diara must consider in the river behavior of studies, contractor’s
the river changes in hydrological river design of costs
flow, current and behavior Raghopur soil
of the river and must be diara PT: Design of stabilization
done in a manner to avoid bridge works, and
new problems such as foundation and design of
changes in the course of piers should be bridge
the river, changes in able to foundation
erosion patterns and accomodate
inundation pattern of the future changes
diara etc. in hydrological
behavior of
Therefore the contractor river. The
must conduct further design should
hydrological studies on also have least
267 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
expected hydrological impact on
patterns of the river and changing
accordingly design the the hydrological,
bridge foundation, piers sedimention
and stabilization works and erosion
particularly. See para 257 patterns of the
– 263 of the EIA report. river
7. Climate Change Risks

7.1 Future climate Recommendations of the Bridge and MI: climate Review of To be Contractor PMAE,
changes may cause climate risk assessment approach risks bridge and included in BSRDCL
damage to the section of the roads considered in access EPC
bridge and approach Environmental Impact location bridge and roads contractor’s
roads Assessment report must road design design costs
be incorporated in the
design of the bridge and PT:
approach roads. Recommenda
tion of EIA
Further climate change incorporate
studies maybe carried out and additional
as necessary studies
carried out as
necessary
8. Biodiversity Conservation Plan
8.1 The local The draft biodiversity Project MI: BCP Review of To be External PMAE,
biodiversity including conservation plan (BCP) influence the BCD included Monitor for BSRDCL,
the endangered given in the EIA report area PT: under Environment External
Gangetic dolphin, (see Chapter V, section E) Comprehensi project Safeguards or Monitor
Gharial, Gangetic must be revised and made ve and clear costs for Biodiversity Ecology,
turtle and other elaborated. The BCP must BCP with Biodiversity NGO Local
migratory birds, help to enhance the local activities NGO and Biodiversit
reptiles and biodiversity and protect targeted at external y Experts
mammals will be the endangered species conserving monitoring
affected by the on a long term sustainable endangered agencies.
project basis to result in in no “net species in the
loss” of biodiversity in the project area.
project area due to the
project.
Annex 6 268

Performance
Target (PT)
9. Cutting of trees
9.1 Need for cutting  Geometric Forest Throughout MI: Budget Check To be Tree cutting PMAE,
of trees. adjustments made to Conservatio the project amount budget covered by maybe done BSRDCL,
minimize tree cutting. n Act, 1980 area allocated for provision contractor by contractor Local
 Obtain tree cutting Total compensatory for under technical Biodiversit
permission from forest number of afforestation compensat guidance of y Experts
department affected and additional ory the local
 Provision for trees=426 plantation afforestatio Forestry
mandatory Plantation n and Department
compensatory sites along PT: Budget additional
afforestation (1:2) for approach allocation is plantation.
deposit of payment to roads and adequate,
Forestry Department other areas
 Provision for
additional
compensatory
plantation on 1: 8
basis to be
implemented by
contractor
10. Shifting of Utilities
10.1 Disruption of  All telephone and Project Along the MI: Number Project Contractor in PMAE,
utility services to electrical poles/wires requirement approach of complaints Interaction costs for collaboration BSRDCL
local community and underground roads on from local with utility with BSRDCL
cables should be the northern people, concerned shifting
shifted before start of and number, utility
construction southern timing and authorities
 Necessary permission side of the type of and local
and payments should bridge notifications public
be made to relevant location issued to
utility service agencies local people,
to allow quick shifting time taken to
and restoration of utility shift utilities
services PT: No. of
 Local people must be complaints
informed through should be 0.
appropriate means Effective and
about the time of timely
shifting of utility notification.
structures and potential Minimal time
269 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
disruption of services if for utility
any shifting
B. CONSTRUCTION STAGE
11. Air Quality
11.1 Dust Generation  Transport, loading and MORTH Crushing MI: PM10 level Standards Included in Contractor PMAE,
due to construction unloading of loose and Specification plant sites, measurements CPCB civil works BSRDCL
activities and fine materials through s for Road approach Complaints methods cost
transport, storage covered vehicles. and Bridge road areas, from locals due Observatio
and handling of  Paved approach roads. works borrow to dust ns
construction  Storage areas to be Air (P and material Public
materials located downwind of CP) Act storage PT: PM10 consultatio
the habitation area. 1974 and areas level< 50 n
3
 Water spraying on Central ug/m Number
earthworks, unpaved Motor and of complaints Review of
haulage roads and Vehicle Act should be 0. monitoring
other dust prone areas. 1988 data
 Provision of PPEs to maintained
workers. by
 Storage of construction contractor
materials to be carried
out in accordance with
the construction
material storage and
handling plan
 Storage areas should
be atleast 500m from
communities
11.2 Emission of air  Regular maintenance The Air Asphalt MI: Levels of Standards Included in Contractor PMAE,
pollutants (PM10, of machinery and (Prevention mixing HC, SO2, CPCB civil works BSRDCL
PM2.5, equipment. and Control plants, NO2, and CO. methods cost
HC,SO2,NOX,COe  Batching, asphalt of Pollution) crushers, Status of PUC
tc) from vehicles mixing plants and Act, 1981 DG sets certificates Review of
due to traffic crushers at downwind (Amended locations monitoring
congestion and (1km) direction from 1987) and PT: SO2 and data
use of equipment the nearest settlement. Rules 1982 NO2 levels are maintained
and machinery  Only crushers licensed both less than by
3
by the PCB shall be 80ug/m . PUC contractor
used certificate of
 DG sets with stacks of equipment and
Annex 6 270

Performance
Target (PT)
adequate height and machinery is
use of low sulphur upto date
diesel as fuel.
 LPG should be used as
fuel source in
construction camps
instead of wood
 Ambient air quality
monitoring
 Contractor to prepare
traffic management and
dust suppression plan
12. Noise
12.1 Disturbance to  All equipment to be Legal Throughout MI: day and As per Included in Contractor PMAE,
local residents and timely serviced and requirement project area night Noise Noise rule, civil works BSRDCL
sensitive receptors properly maintained. Noise especially levels. 2000 costs
due to excessive  Construction Pollution at Number of
noise from equipment and (Regulation construction complaints Consultatio
construction activities machinery to be and sites, from local n with local
and operation of fitted with silencers Control) residential people people
equipment and and maintained Rules, 2000 and
machinery properly. and identified PT: Zero Review of
 Only IS approved amendment sensitive complaints or noise level
equipment shall be s locations. no repeated monitoring
used for construction thereof complaints by data
activities. + local people. maintained
 Timing of noisy Clause No Average day by
construction activities 501.8.6. and night time contractor
shall be done during MORT&H noise levels
night time and Specificatio are within Observatio
weekends near ns for permissible n of
schools, Road and limits for work constructio
 Implement noisy Bridge zone areas n site
operations works
intermittently to
reduce the total noise
generated
 Manage existing
traffic to avoid traffic
271 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
jams and
accumulation of noise
beyond standards.
 Restrict construction
near residential, built
up and forest areas
construction to
daylight hours.
 Initiation of multi-
layered plantation ,to
serve as mitigation
option for operation
phase
 Honking restrictions
near sensitive areas
 PPEs to workers
 Noise monitoring as
per EMoP.
13. Landuse and Soil
13.1 Landuse  Non-agricultural areas Project Approach MI: Borrow pit Review Included in Contractor PMAE,
Change and Loss to be used as borrow requirement roads and locations borrow civil works BSRDCL
of areas to the extent construction area plan, cost
productive/topsoil possible. camps and Top soil site visits
 If using agricultural yards storage area
land, top soil to be
preserved and laid PT: Zero
over either on the complaints or
embankment slope for disputes
growing vegetation to registered
protect soil erosion. against
 Land for temporary contractor by
facilities like land owner
construction camp,
storage areas etc.
shall be brought back
to its original landuse
 No waste dumping
should take place in
borrow areas
Annex 6 272

Performance
Target (PT)
13.2 Soil erosion  Bio-turfing of IRC: 56 - Throughout MI: Review of Included in Design PMAE,
due to embankments to 1974 the entire Occurrence of design civil works consultant and BSRDCL
Construction protect slopes. recommend project road slope failure or documents cost Contractor,
activities,  Slope protection by ed practice erosion issues and site
earthwork, and cut providing frames, dry for observation
and fill, stockpiles stone pitching, treatment of PT: No slope
etc. masonry retaining embankme failures.
walls, planting of nt slopes Minimal
grass and trees. for erosion erosion issues
 Side slopes of all cut control
and fill areas will be Clause No.
graded and covered 306 and
with stone pitching, 305.2.2
grass and shrub as MORT&H
per design Specificatio
specifications. Care ns for Road
should be taken that and Bridge
the slope gradient works
shall not be greater Guidelines
than 2:1. IX for Soil
 The earth stock piles erosion
to be provided with
gentle slopes to soil
erosion.
13.3 Borrow area  Obtain EC from IRC Borrow MI: Existence Review of Included Contractor PMAE,
management SEIAA before opening Guidelines sites of borrow design in civil BSRDCL
any new borrow area. on borrow location areas in document works
 Comply to EC areas and inappropriate s and site cost
conditions for quarries unauthorized observatio
 Non-productive, (Environme locations. ns
barren lands, ntal Poor borrow
upland shall be used protection area Compare
for borrowing earth Act and management site
with the necessary Rules,1986; practices. conditions
permissions/consents. Water Act, Number of with EC
 Depths of borrow pits Air Act)+ accidents. conditions
to be regulated and Clause Complaints by SEIAA
sides not steeper than 305.2.2MO from local
273 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
25%. RTH people.
 Topsoil to be Specificatio
stockpiled and ns for Road PT: No case
protected for use at and Bridge of non-
the rehabilitation works compliance to
stage. Guidelines conditions
 Transportation of for Borrow stipulated by
earth materials Areas SEIAA in
through covered manageme clearance
vehicles. nt letter. Zero
 Follow IRC accidents.
recommended Zero
practice for borrow complaints.
pits (IRC 10: 1961) for
identification of
location, its operation
and rehabilitation
 Borrow areas not to
be dug continuously.
 To the extent borrow
areas shall be sited
away from
settlements. Borrow
areas shall be leveled
with salvaged material
or other filling
materials which do not
pose contamination of
soil. Else, it shall be
converted into fish
pond.
13.4 Quarry  Aggregates will be Clause Quarry MI: Existence Review of Included Contractor BSRDCL
Operations sourced from existing No.111.3M area of licenses for design in civil
licensed quarries. ORT&H locations all quarry document works
 Copies of consent/ Specificati areas from s, cost
approval / ons for which contractor
rehabilitation plan for Road and materials are document
a new quarry or use of Bridge being s and site
existing source will be works sourced observatio
Annex 6 274

Performance
Target (PT)
submitted to Guidelines n
BSRDCL. VI for Existence of
 The contractor will Quarry a quarry Complian
develop a Quarry Areas redevelopme ce to EC
Redevelopment plan, Managem nt plan conditions
as per the Mining ent in case of
Rules of the state and Environme PT: Quarry opening
submit a copy of ntal license is new
the approval to EA. Protection valid.: No quarries
 Obtain environmental Rules case of non-
clearance from SEIAA compliance to
in case of opening consent
new quarry /permit
conditions
and air
quality meets
the
prescribed
limit
13.5 Compaction of  Construction vehicles, Design Parking MI: Location Site Included Contractor BSRDCL
soil and impact on machinery, and requireme areas, of approach observatio in civil
quarry haul roads equipment to be nt Haulage and haulage n works
due to movement of stationed in the roads and roads cost
vehicles and designated ROW to constructio Presence of
equipment avoid compaction. n yards. destroyed/
 Approach compacted
roads/haulage roads agricultural
shall be designed land or land
along the barren and which has not
hard soil area to be restored to
reduce the its original
compaction. condition
 Transportation of
quarry material to the PT: Zero
dumping site through occurrence of
heavy vehicles shall destroyed/co
be done through mpacted land
existing major roads and
to the extent possible undestroyed
land
275 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
to restrict wear and
tear to the
village/minor roads.
 Land taken for
construction camp
and other temporary
facility shall be
restored to its original
conditions
13.6 Contamination  Construction vehicles Design Fuelling MI: Quality of Site Included Contractor PMAE,
of soil due to and equipment requireme station, soil near observation in civil BSRDCL
leakage/ spillage of will be maintained and nt constructio storage area work
oil, bituminous and refueled in such a n sites, Presence of cost.
non bituminous fashion that oil/diesel and spilled oil or
debris generated spillage does not constructio bitumen in
from demolition and contaminate the soil. n camps project area
road construction  Fuel storage and and
refueling sites to be disposal
kept away from location. PT: Soil test
drainage channels. conforming to
 Unusable debris no –
shall be contaminatio
dumped in ditches n. No sighting
and low lying areas. of spilled oil
 To avoid soil or bitumen in
contamination Oil- construction
Interceptors shall be site or camp
provided at wash site
down and refueling
areas.
 Waste oil and oil
soaked cotton/ cloth
shall be stored in
containers labeled
‘Waste Oil’ and
‘Hazardous’ sold off to
MOEFCC/SPCB
authorized vendors
 Non-bituminous
Annex 6 276

Performance
Target (PT)
wastes to be dumped
in borrow pits with the
concurrence of
landowner and
covered with a layer
of topsoil conserved
from opening the pit.
 Bituminous wastes
will be disposed off in
an identified dumping
site approved by the
State Pollution
Control Board
14. Water Resources
14.1 Sourcing of  Requisite permission Central Throughout MI: Approval Checking Included Contractor PMAE,
water during shall be obtained for Ground the Project from of in civil BSRDCL
Construction abstraction of Water section competent document works
groundwater from Authority authority ation cost
Central Groundwater Guidelines Check Dam Complaints
Authority. at suitable from local
 Arrangements shall locations people on Talk to
be made by contractor water local
that the water availability people
availability and supply
to nearby PT: Valid
communities remain approval from
unaffected. competent
 Water intensive authority.
activities not to be Zero
undertaken during complaints
summer season. from local
 Provision of water people.
harvesting structure to
augment groundwater
condition in the area
 Construction activities
should maintain a
distance of atleast
100m from existing
277 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
wells. If any existing
wells are affected
(contaminated or
destroyed) by the
project construction,
alternate
arrangements will be
made to restore the
water quality or well or
supply water from
another well.
14.2 Disposal of  Provisions shall be ClauseNo. Throughou MI: Condition Standards Included Contractor PMAE,
water during made to connect 1010EPAct t the of drainage methods in civil BSRDCL
construction roadside drains with 1986 Project system in Site works
existing nearby MORT&H section construction observatio cost
natural drains. Specificati site. n and
ons for review of
Road and Presence/abs document
Bridge ence of water s
works logging in
project area.
PT: Existence
of proper
drainage
system. No
water logging
in project area
14.3 Alteration in  Existing drainage Design Near all MI: Proper Review of Included Contractor PMAE,
surface water system to be requireme drainage flow of water design in civil BSRDCL
hydrology maintained and nt, Clause channels, in existing document works
further enhanced. No river/nallah streams and s cost
 Provision shall be 501.8.6. crossings rivers
made for adequate MORT&H etc. Site
size and number of Specificati PT: No observatio
cross drainage ons complain of n
Annex 6 278

Performance
Target (PT)
structures esp. in the water
areas where land is for Road shortage by
sloping towards road and Bridge downstream
alignment. communities.
 Road level shall be No record of
raised above HFL overtopping/
level wherever road water logging
level is lesser than
HFL.
 Culverts
reconstruction shall
be done during lean
flow period. In some
cases these minor
channels may be
diverted for a very
short period (15-30
days) and will be bring
back to its original
course immediately
after construction.
14.4 Siltation in  Embankment slopes Design Near all MI: Field Included Contractor PMAE,
water bodies due to to be modified suitably requiremen water Presence/abs observatio in civil BSRDCL
construction to restrict the soil t, bodies/ ence of n works
activities/earthwork debris entering water Clause waterway siltation in cost
bodies. No rivers,
 Provision of Silt 501.8.6. streams,
fencing shall be made MORT&H ponds and
at water bodies. Specific other water
 Silt/sediment should ations bodies in
be collected and for project area.
stockpiled for possible Road Turbidity test
reuse as surfacing of and levels
slopes where they Bridgew
have to be re- orks PT: No
vegetated. records of
 Earthworks and stone Worldwid siltation due
works to be e best to project
prevented from practices activities.
279 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
impeding natural flow Surface water
of rivers, streams and quality tests
water canals or confirm to
existing drainage turbidity and
system. TSS limit
 Retaining walls at
water bodies /ponds
to avoid siltation near
ponds
14.5 Deterioration  No vehicles or The Water Water MI: Water Conductio Included Contractor PMAE,
in Surface water equipment should be (Prevention bodies, quality of n of water in BSRDCL
quality due to parked or refueled and refueling ponds, quality civil works
leakage from near water-bodies, so Control of stations, streams, rivers tests as cost
vehicles and as to avoid Pollution) constructio and other per the
equipment and contamination from Act, 1974 n camps. water bodies in monitoring
waste from fuel and lubricants. and project plan
construction  Oil and grease traps amendmen
camps. and fuelling platforms ts thereof. Presence of oil Field
to be provided at re- floating in observatio
fuelling locations. water bodies in n
 All chemicals and oil project area
shall be stored away
from water and PT: Surface
concreted platform water quality
with catchment pit for meets
spills collection. freshwater
 All equipment quality
operators, drivers, standards
and warehouse prescribed by
personnel will be CPCB
trained in immediate
response for spill
containment and
eventual clean-up.
Readily available,
simple to understand
and preferably written
in the local language
emergency response
Annex 6 280

Performance
Target (PT)
procedure, including
reporting, will be
provided by the
contractors
 Construction camp to
be sited away from
water bodies.
 Wastes must be
collected, stored and
taken to approve
disposal site only.
 Water quality shall be
monitored
15. Flora and Fauna
15.1 Vegetation loss  Restrict tree cutting Forest Throughou MI: ROW Review of Mandator Mandatory PMAE,
due to site upto toe line Conservati t project width relevant y Compensator BSRDCL
preparation and considering safety to on Act corridor Number of document Compens y plantation
construction road users. 1980 trees for s – tree atory by forest
activities and  Roadside trees to be + Estimated felling cutting afforestati Department
removed with prior IRCSP:21 No. of Compensator permit, on cost is and
approval of competent and affected y plantation compensa included Additional
authority. IRCSP:66 tree=2457 plan tory in project plantation by
 Mandatory Number of plantation costs contractor in
compensatory Additional trees plan. under partnership
plantation at 1:2 basis Plantation replanted. Meeting BSRDCL. with
to be done by near with JFM Additional respective
Forestry Department Sensitive PT: Additional Committe compens local JFM
 Additional receptors, compensatory e atory Committee
compensatory river afforestation members afforestati
plantation 1:8 as per banks, done on a 1:2 on costs
the IRC guidelines to borrow basis by Field included
be carried out by areas contractor observatio in civil
contractor in through JFM. ns works
partnership with Number of costs
respective village JFM trees planted
Committee. Local is double the
villagers to be number of
employed for trees
afforestation activities. removed.
281 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
Employment Tree survival
preference to be given rate is at least
to women 70%.
 Regular maintenance
of all trees planted.
 Provision of LPG in
construction camp as
fuel source to avoid
tree cutting.
 Plantation of trees on
both sides of the road
where technically
feasible.
 Integrate vegetation
management (IVM)
with the carriage
way completely clear
of vegetation.
 Additional
plantation near
sensitive receptors,
river banks to
minimize noise & air
pollution, and to
check erosion.
 Controlled use of
pesticides/ fertilizers
16. Construction Camps and yards
16.1 Impact All camps should be Design All MI: Location On site Included Contractor PMAE,
associated with established with prior Requiremen constructio of campsites observation in civil and EO BSRDCL
location permission from PCB. t n camps and distance works
Camps to maintain The Water from Interaction cost
minimum distance from (Preventio habitation, with
following: n and forest areas, workers
# 500 m from habitation Control of water bodies, and local
# 500 m from forest areas Pollution)A through traffic community
where possible ct,1974and route and
# 500 m from water bodies its construction
where possible amendmen camps
Annex 6 282

Performance
Target (PT)
# 500 m from through traffic ts PT: Distance
route thereof of campsite is
less than
500m from
listed
locations
16.2 Worker’s Health  The location, layout The All MI: Camp Camp Part of the Contractor PMAE,
in construction and basic facility Building construction health records civil works BSRDCL
camp provision of each labor and Other camps records costs
camp will be submitted Constructi Site
for approval by the on workers Existence of observatio
PMAE and BSRDCL. (Regulatio proper first n
The contractor will n of aid kit in
maintain necessary Employme camp site Consultati
living accommodation nt and on with
and ancillary facilities in Conditions Complaints contractor
functional and hygienic o service) from workers. workers
manner. Act 1996 and local
 Adequate water and and PT: No people
sanitary latrines with The Water record of living
septic tanks with soak (Preventio illness due to nearby
pits shall be provided. n and unhygienic
 Preventive medical Control of conditions or
care facilities in camp. Pollution) vectors. Zero
 Waste disposal Act,1974 cases of STD.
facilities such as dust and Clean and
bins must be provided amendmen tidy camp site
in the camps and ts conditions.
regular disposal of thereof
waste must be carried
out .
 The Contractor will take
all precautions to
protect the workers
from insect and pest to
reduce the risk to
health. This includes
the use of insecticides
which should comply
283 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
with local regulations.
 No alcoholic liquor or
prohibited drugs will be
imported to, sell, give
and barter to the
workers of host
community.
 Awareness raising to
immigrant workers/local
community on
communicable and
sexually transmitted
diseases.
17. Management of Construction Waste/Debris
17.1 Selection of Unproductive/wastelan Design At all MI: Location Field Included Contractor. PMAE,
Dumping Sites ds shall be selected Requireme Dumping of dumping survey in civil BSRDCL
for dumping sites away nt and Sites sites and works
from residential areas MORT&H Number of interaction cost.
and water bodies guidelines public with local
 Dumping sites must be complaints. people.
having adequate Review of
capacity equal to the PT: No public consent
amount of debris complaints. letter
generated. Consent
 Public perception and letters for all
consent from the dumping sites
village Panchayats has available with
to be obtained before contractor
finalizing the location.
 Develop waste
management plan for
various specific waste
streams (e.g., reusable
waste,
 flammable waste,
construction debris,
food waste etc.) prior to
commencing of
 construction and
Annex 6 284

Performance
Target (PT)
submit to BBA for
approval.
 Organize disposal of all
wastes generated
during construction in
an environmentally
acceptable manner.
This will include
consideration of the
nature and location of
disposal site, so as to
cause less
environmental impact.
 Minimize the
production of waste
materials by 3R
(Reduce, Recycle and
Reuse) approach.
 Segregate and reuse
or recycle all the
wastes, wherever
practical.
 Prohibit burning of solid
waste
 Collect and transport
non-hazardous wastes
to all the approved
disposal sites. Vehicles
transporting solid waste
shall be covered with
tarps or nets to prevent
spilling waste along
the route
 Train and instruct all
personnel in waste
management practices
and procedures as a
component of the
environmental
induction process.
285 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
 Provide refuse
containers at each
worksite.
 Request suppliers to
minimize packaging
where practicable.
 Place a high emphasis
on good housekeeping
practices.
Maintain all construction
sites in a cleaner, tidy and
safe condition and provide
and maintain appropriate
facilities as temporary
storage of all wastes before
transportation and final
disposal.
17.2 Reuse and  The existing bitumen MORT&H Throughout MI: Percentage Contractor Included in Contractor. PMAE,
disposal of surface shall be utilized guidelines the project of reuse of records civil works BSRDCL
construction and for paving of cross corridor existing surface cost.
dismantled roads, access roads, material Field
waste and paving works in observatio
construction sites Method and n
and camps, location of
temporary traffic disposal site of Interaction
diversions, and construction with local
haulage routes. debris people
 All excavated materials Contractor
from roadway, records
shoulders, verges,
drains, cross drainage PT: No public
will be used for complaint and
backfilling consent letters
embankments, filling for all dumping
pits, and landscaping. sites available
 Unusable and non- with contractor
bituminous debris or PMAE
materials should be
suitably disposed off at
pre-designated
Annex 6 286

Performance
Target (PT)
disposal locations, with
approval of the
concerned authority.
The bituminous wastes
shall be disposed in
secure landfill sites
only in environmentally
accepted manner. For
removal of debris,
wastes and its disposal
MOSRTH guidelines
should be followed.
 Unusable and surplus
materials, as
determined by the
Project Engineer, will
be removed and
disposed off-site.
18. Traffic Management and Safety
18.1 Management  Temporary traffic Design Throughout MI: Traffic Review Included Contractor PMAE,
of existing diversion shall be requirement the project management traffic in civil BSRDCL
traffic and planned by the and corridor plan. managem works
safety contractor and IRC: SP: 27 especially Presence/ ent plan cost.
approved by the - at absence of Field
‘Engineer’. 1984,Repor intersection safety signs, observatio
 The traffic control plans t Containing s. clear traffic n of traffic
shall contain details of Recommen demarcations, managem
diversions; traffic safety dation of flag men etc. ent and
arrangements during IRC on site. safety
construction; safety Regional Complaints system
measures for night time Workshops from road
traffic and precautions on Highway users. Interaction
for transportation Safety Number of with
of hazardous IRC:SP: 32 traffic people in
materials. Traffic -1988 Road accidents vehicles
control plans shall be Safety for using the
prepared in line with Children (5-12 YearsPT:
Old)No road
requirements of IRC’s IRC:SP: 44 complaints.
SP 55 document’. -1994 No accidents
287 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
 The Contractor will Highway due to poor
ensure that the Safety traffic
diversion/detour is Code IRC: management.
always maintained in SP: 55 - Traffic signs,
running condition, 2001Guideli demarcation
particularly during the nes for lines etc.
monsoon to avoid Safety in Construction
present
Zones
in
disruption to traffic flow. The appropriate
 On stretches where it is Building and locations on
not possible to pass the other site
traffic on the part width Constructio
of existing carriageway, n workers
temporary paved Act 1996
diversions will be and Cess
constructed. Act of 1996
 Restriction of Factories
construction activity to Act 1948
only one side of the
existing road.
 The contractor shall
inform local community
of changes to traffic
routes, and pedestrian
access arrangements
with assistance from
“Engineer”.
 Use of adequate
signages to ensure
traffic management
and safety. Conduct
of regular safety audit
on safety measures.
18.2 Safety of  Contractors to adopt Same as Constructio MI: Availability Site Included Obligation of PMAE,
Workers and and maintain safe above n sites of Safety observatio in civil Contractor BSRDCL
accident risk from working practices. gears to n works
construction  Usage of fluorescent workers cost
activities and retro refectory Review
signage, in local Safety records on
language at the signage safety
construction sites Training training
Annex 6 288

Performance
Target (PT)
 Training to workers on records on and
safety procedures and safety accidents
precautions.
 Mandatory Number of Interact
appointment of safety safety related with
officer. accidents constructio
 All regulations n workers
regarding safe PT: Zero fatal
scaffolding, ladders, accidents.
working Zero or minor
platforms, gangway, non-fatal
stairwells, excavations, accidents.
trenches and safe
means of entry and
egress shall be
complied with.
 Provision of PPEs to
workers.
 Provision of a readily
available first aid unit
including an adequate
supply of dressing
materials.
 Thecontractorwillnote
mployanypersonbelow
theageof18years
 Use of hazardous
material should be
minimized and/or
restricted.
 Emergency plan (to
be approved by
engineer) shall be
prepared to respond
to any accidents or
emergencies.
 Accident Prevention
Officer must be
appointed by the
contractor.
289 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
18.3  Temporary access and Same as Near MI: Presence/ Field Included Contractor PMAE,
Pedestrian, diversion, with proper above habitation absence of observation in civil BSRDCL
animal drainage facilities. on both access routes Interaction works
movement  Access to the schools, sides of for with local cost.
temples and other schools, pedestrians. people
public places must be temples, Road signage
maintained when hospitals, Number of
construction takes graveyards, complaints
place near them. construction from local
 Fencing wherever sites, people
cattle movement is haulage
expected. roads, PT: Easy
 Large number of box diversion access to
culverts with has been sites. schools,
proposed. .All temples and
structures having public places.
vertical clearance Zero
above 3m and not complaints
catering to perennial
flow of water may serve
as underpass for
animals
18.4 Accident risk  Restrict access to Same as Constructio MI: Safety Site Included Contractor PMAE,
to local construction sites only above n sites signs and inspection in civil BSRDCL
community to authorized their location works
personnel. Consultati cost
 Physical separation Incidents of on with
must be provided for accidents local
movement of people
vehicular and human Complaints
traffic. from local
 Adequate signage people
must be provided for PT: Zero
safe traffic movement incident of
 Provision of accidents.
temporary diversions Zero
and awareness to complaints.
locals before opening
new construction
fronts.
Annex 6 290

Performance
Target (PT)
19. Site restoration and rehabilitation

19.1 Clean-up  Contractor will prepare Project Throughout MI: Condition Site Included Contractor PMAE,
Operations, site restoration plans, requiremen the project of camp sites, observatio in civil BSRDCL
Restoration which will be approved t corridor, construction n works
and by the ‘Engineer’. constructio sites and cost.
Rehabilitation  The clean-up and n camp borrow areas. Interaction
restoration operations sites and Presence/abs with locals
are to be implemented borrow ence of
by the contractor prior to areas construction Issue
demobilization. material/debri completion
 All construction zones s after certificate
including river-beds, completion of after
culverts, road-side construction restoration
areas, camps, hot mix works on of all sites
plant sites, crushers, construction are found
batching plant sites site. satisfactor
and any other area y
used/affected by the PT: Clean
project will be left clean and tidy sites.
and tidy, to the No trash or
satisfaction of the debris left on
Environmental officer. site. Site
 All the opened borrow restored and
areas will be leveled.
rehabilitated and
‘Engineer’ will certify
C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE STAGE

20. Biodiversity conservation
20.1 Implementation Project At identified MI: Monitoring Site Included BSRDCL BSRDCL
of biodiversity Requireme locations in reports on Observatio in field offices/
conservation plan nt project implementatio n Operation Forest
(BCP) influence n of BCP / Department
area. Review of Maintena
PT: Semi- BCP nce cost
annual monitoring
monitoring reports.
reports on
291 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
BCP Discussion
implmentation with local
prepared on a People
timely basis. and local
BCP Forestry
implementatio Departme
n is on track. nt and
Biodiversit
y Experts
1. 21. Air Quality
21.1 Air pollution  Roadside tree Environmen Throughout MI: Ambient As per Included Contractor BSRDCL
due to due to plantations and tal the air quality CPCB in for
vehicular plantation near toll Protection Corridor (PM10, requireme Operation maintenance
movement plaza shall be Act, 1986; CO,SO2 nts / related wor
maintained. The Air NO2) Maintena BSRDCL
 Regular maintenance (Prevention nce cost External
of the road will be and Control PT: Levels Site Monitor for
done to ensure good of Pollution) are equal to inspection ambient air
surface condition Act, 1981 or below quality
 Ambient air quality baseline monitoring
monitoring. If levels given in and GHG
monitored parameters the EIA report estimation
exceeds prescribed
limit, suitable control
measures must be
taken.
 Signages shall be
provided reminding
them to properly
maintain their vehicles
to economize on fuel
consumption.
 Enforcement of
vehicle emission rules
in coordination with
transport department
or installing emission
checking equipment
 Greenhouse gas
Annex 6 292

Performance
Target (PT)
emissions will be
estimated based on
traffic volumes for
atleast 3 years during
project operation
22. Land and Soil
22.1 Soil erosion  Periodic checking to Project At bridge MI: Existence On site Included BSRDCL BSRDCL
at embankment be carried to assess requireme locations of soil erosion observatio in
during heavy the effectiveness of nt and sites n Operation
rainfall. the stabilization embankm Number of /
measures viz. turfing, ent slopes soil erosion Maintena
stone pitching, river and other sites nce cost
training structures etc. probable
 Necessary measures soil PT: Zero or
to be followed erosion minimal
wherever there are areas. occurrences
failures of soil erosion
23. Water resources/Flooding and Inundation

23.1 Siltation  Regular checks shall Project Near MI: Water Site Include BSRDCL BSRDCL
be made for soil requirement surface quality observatio d in
erosion and turfing Water n Operati
conditions of river bodies PT: No on/
training structures for turbidity of Mainten
its effective surface water ance
maintenance. bodies due to cost
the road
23.2 Water logging  Regular visual checks Project Near MI: Presence/ Site Include BSRDCL BSRDCL
due to blockage of and cleaning of drains requirement surface absence of observatio d in
drains, culverts or shallbedonealongtheali Water water logging n Operati
streams gnmenttoensurethatflo bodies along the on/Main
wofwaterismaintainedt road tenance
hroughcrossdrainsand cost
otherchannels/streams PT: No record
. of
 Monitoring of water overtopping/
borne diseases due to Water logging
stagnant water bodies
24. Flora
293 Annex 6

Performance
Target (PT)
24.1 Vegetation  Planted trees, shrubs, Forest Project tree MI: Tree/plants Records and Operatio BSRDCL/ BSRDCL
and grasses to be Conservati plantation survival rate field n/ Forest
properly maintained. on Act sites observations Maintena Department
 The tree survival audit 1980 PT: Minimum . Information nce Cost
to be conducted at rate of 70% tree from
least once in a year to survival Forestry
assess the Department
effectiveness
25. Maintenance of Right of Way and Safety

25.1 Accident Risk  Efforts shall be made Project Throughout MI: Presence Visual Include BSRDCL BSRDCL
due to uncontrolled to make shoulder requirement the Project and extent of inspection d in
growth of completely clear of route vegetation operatio
vegetation vegetation. growth on either Check n/Maint
 Regular maintenance side of road. accident enance
of plantation along the Number of records cost
roadside accidents.
 No invasive plantation
near the road. PT: No
accidents due to
vegetation
growth
25.2 Accident risks  All safety features IRC:SP:55 Throughout MI: Number of Review of Include BSRDCL BSRDCL
associated with provided in the main the Project accidents accident d in
traffic movement. bridge and approach route Conditions and records. operatio
roads such as guide existence of n
rails, speed bumps, safety signs, Site /Mainte
sign boards, rumble strips inspection to nance
underpasses for etc. on the road check cost
pedestrians, cattle and Presence/absen condition of
vehicles etc. will be ce of sensitive road safety
maintained and kept in receptor features.
good condition.Traffic structures inside Talk to the
control measures, the stipulated local people
including speed limits, planning line as who use the
will been forced per relevant bridge and
strictly. local law cross over
 Further encroachment the access
of squatters within the PT: No fatal roads
Annex 6 294

Performance
Target (PT)
ROW will be accidents. Other
prevented. accidents are
 No school or hospital minimal
will be allowed to be
established beyond
the stipulated planning
line as per relevant
local law
 Monitor/ensurethatalls
afetyprovisionsinclude
dindesignandconstructi
onphaseareproperlym
aintained
 Highway patrol
unit(s)for round the
clock patrolling. Phone
booth for accidental
reporting and
ambulance services
with minimum
response time for
rescue of any accident
victims, if possible.
 Tow-way facility for the
breakdown vehicles if
possible.
25.3.Transport  Existence of spill - Throughout MI: Status of Review of Include BSRDCL BSRDCL
of Dangerous prevention and control the project emergency spill d in
Goods and emergency stretch system – prevention operatio
responsive system whether and n/Maint
 Emergency plan for operational or emergency enance
vehicles carrying not response cost.
hazardous material plan
PT: Fully Spill
functional accident
emergency records
system
295 Annex 7
ANNEX 7: ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION PHASES
Parameter Location Means of Monitoring Frequency Responsible Agency Est. Cost

Implem’tn. Supv’n. (US$’000)
A. Construction Phase
1. Depth of top At all project sites Top soil of 0.5 m depth should be Beginning of earth Contractor BSRDC / PMAE Part of civil work
Soil including construction excavated and stored properly as filling cost
yards, approach provided in the borrow area works and every 6
roads, borrow areas, management plan months
bridge end
facilities, etc The stored top soils will be used
for bio-engineering or filling
materials
2. Soil Pollution At all project sites Ensure no contaminated effluent is Every 3 months Contractor BSRDC / PMAE $1/
including construction leaving from the filling area to the discharge point/
yards, approach roads, nearby agricultural lands. sampling
bridge end facilities.
Water quality sampling of all
effluent prior to discharge
3. Erosion Streambank erosion Visual inspection of erosion Monthly Contractor BSRDC / PMAE $10/month
along the upstream of prevention measures and
Diara, side slopes of the occurrence of erosion
embankments and
material storage sites
4. Hydrocarbon Construction camps Visual Inspection of storage Monthly Contractor BSRDC / PMAE $1/ sampling
and facilities. Water quality sampling of point/ sampling
chemical all effluent from storage are for oil
storage and grease
5. Local Roads Approach Roads Visual inspection to ensure local Monthly Contractor BSRDC / PMAE Part of civil works
roads are not damaged.
Grievance and redress
6. Traffic Safety Haul and all affected As identified in the management Daily Contractor BSRDC / PMAE As estimated in
and roads as identified in plan the management
Management the traffic management plan
plan
7. Air Quality Construction sites Visual inspection to ensure good Daily(visual) Contractor BSRDC / PMAE $0.5/ sampling
(dust, standard equipment are in use point/
smoke) and dust suppression measures Monthly for dust Sample
Dust monitoring in and around

(receptor) construction camp and
all active construction camps
(spraying of waters) are in place.

Annex 7 296

Asphalt Plant Visual inspection to ensure quarterly Monthly BSRDC / PMAE
asphalt
plant is located >500 m from
residential areas
Material storage sites Visual inspection to ensure dust Monthly Contractor BSRDC / PMAE
suppression work plan is being
implemented
8. Air Quality On both the banks of Air quality monitoring Monthly Contractor BSRDC / PMAE $0.5/ sampling
(PM10, Ganga including Diara, through a point/sample
PM2.5, SPM, construction camp sites nationally
SO2, and access roads recognized
NOx, Pb) laboratory
9. Noise Construction sites, Visual inspection to ensure good Weekly Contractor BSRDC / PMAE Part of civil works
construction camp sites, standard equipment are in use
on both banks of the
Ganga river including Visual inspection to ensure use of Daily
the Diara PPEs on work areas with elevated
noise.
Ensure work restriction between Daily

21:00-06:00 close to the sensitive
locations
Hourly, day and night time noise Monthly Contractor $1/ sampling site/
levels (dB) monitoring using noise through a sample
meters nationally
recognized
laboratory
10. Underwater At a distance of 50m, Noise levels on decibels (dB) Quarterly during Contractor BSRDC / $75 (lump sum)
noise 250m and 500m from scale bridge pier through a External
pier construction over a range of frequencies which construction nationally Monitor
locations (as directed by the level is measured (1μP a2 /Hz recognized
PMAE) for Peak, SEL and RMS noise laboratory
levels using hydrophones
11. Surface 15 sites covering bridge Sampling and analysis of surface Quarterly Contractor BSRDC/ $0.75/ sampling
water site, other surface water quality through a External point/
quality waters located near the nationally Monitor sample
(Turbidity, construction sites recognized
TSS, pH, (including those laboratory
TDS, TSS, locations where
EC, Cl, NH3- baseline water quality
297 Annex 7

N, Fe, As, monitoring was carried
DO, out)
BOD, COD,
TC,
FC, Oil and
Grease)
12. Groundwater Drinking water wells Depth of tube well should be more During drilling of wells Contractor $0.5/ sampling
quality (As, established by than 300m. Test water for heavy through a PMAE site/ sample
Mn, Fe, contractor for metals, iron and manganese nationally External
and construction workers before installing of casing. If the recognized Monitor
coliforms) quality is found not suitable further laboratory
deepening will be done.
13. Waste Construction camps and Visual inspection that solid waste Weekly Contractor BSRDC / PMAE Part of civil works
Management construction sites is
disposed at designated site
14. Drinking In construction yards Ensure the construction workers Weekly Contactor BSRDC / PMAE Part of civil works
water and and construction are provided with safe water and
sanitation camps sanitation facilities in the site
15. Wildlife Near all the Ensure the adherence of the Monthly Contractor External $15/ month/site
Monitoring construction sites mitigation measures proposed in Monitor for (excluding BCP
BCP. Environment Implementation
And other sites Safeguards estimated cost of
identified in the U$500,000)
biodiversity
conservation plan
(BCP)
16. Floral Project area Tree survival of Plantation Site Monthly Contractor External $5/mo
Monitoring through NGO Monitor
17. Gangetic Project area Counting number, occurrence Seasonal (2x Year) Contractor BSRDC, $500 Lump Sum
Dolphin assessment, and presence of External
Monitoring infants will be monitored within 2 Monitor for
km buffer area from bridge Environment
location. Safeguards
B. During Operation and Maintenance
18. Air quality At toll plaza and diara 24 hours air quality monitoring of quarterly External BSRDCL $0.5/ sampling
PM10, PM2.5, SPM, SO2, NOx, Monitor SPCB point/ sample
Pb.
19. Greenhouse From traffic plying on CO2, PM annually External BSRDCL Included under
gas the new bridge and Monitor SPCB EMES costs
approach roads
20. Noise Quality Toll plaza, bridge end Hourly, day and night time noise Quarterly External BSRDCL $0.5/ sampling
Annex 7 298

points, diara levels (dB) monitoring using noise Monitor SPCB point/ sample
meters
21. Gangetic Within 2 km buffer Part of the faunal monitoring Annual External BSRDCL Included under
Dolphin area from bridge Gangetic Dolphin will also be Monitor State Wildlife EMES costs
monitoring location monitored once in a year. Board
Counting
number, occurrence assessment,
and presence of infants will be
monitored within 2 km buffer area
299 Annex 8
ANNEX 8 : TREE PLANTATION AND MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES
Preparation of the Plantation Area: For plantation in new areas it always economical and
comfortable to plant trees in blocks. The open areas near the AH-2 and AH-48 road will be
identified and selected. During the selection of the block plantation sites, the availability of the
water in nearby areas will be taken into consideration as the survival of the tree saplings
depends on the availability of water or watering facilities.
Preparation of Pits and Sapling Transplantation: The location of each plantation pit will be
marked according to the design and distance of the plantation. The size of the plantation pit
varies depending upon the species of the plants, height of the saplings. Trees will be planted on
the alternate rows in a straight line for the prevention of the horizontal dispersion of the
pollutants. Hence the pit will be dig accordingly. During the time of placing the tree saplings the
roots will be freed from plastic or any type of cover which is normally use for the transplantation
of the tree saplings from the seed bed to the tree plantation pits. This exercise will help the root
hairs to reach the soil.
Spacing: For the survivability of the tree species planted spacing between the saplings should
be maintained. Spacing which are usually used for teak planting are 2 x 2 m2, 3 x 1 m2, 3 x 3 m2,
4 x 2 m2 and 4 x 4 m2, depending on site condition. However, wider spacing of 6 x 1 m 2 can also
be adopted sometimes where the survivability is high. Closer spacing is used for straight timber
of good quality.
Time of Plantation: As per the normal practices followed under the silvicultural guidelines
plantation of the tree sapling to be done only after the first shower during the rainy season. The
best time for plantation is after 15 days from the day of first shower during rainy season.
Protection of Tree saplings: Circular tree guard should be placed after the plantation of the
saplings for the protection of these young plants from the ravages of cattle, sheep and goat and
other animals. If tree saplings died or damage occur after placing the circular tree guard, timely
replacements of damaged plant and thereafter care is important.
Selection of Tree Species: The selection of the tree species to be planted plays a crucial role
for higher survivability rate. This is always better to choose the local and Vulnerable, endemic
species.
Maintenance (include thinning) : Weeding: Low pruning at 6 months, Thinning: Thinning will
start after the stand is 3-4 years old and repeated every 4 years until the stand is 15 years old.
Between 15-25 years old, thinning should be conducted every 5 years and after 25 years old,
thinning will be done after every 10 years. When the canopy closes, at about 6 years, 30-40% of
the stems will be thinned to selectively remove suppressed, diseased and badly formed trees.
Survivability: Periodic assessment will be carried for survivability of the trees. Minimum 70%
survival rate will be achieved.
Records:
The following records will be maintained:
1. Record of Tree plantation

2. Record of Survivability rate
Annex 8 300
Reporting:
The tree plantation and survivability report will be sent to EA six monthly
Responsibility:
Prime Responsibility: PIU through contractor or Forest Department Contractor will be

responsible for tree cutting or plantation
Supervisory Responsibility: Supervision Consultant to check compliance of above

guidelines.
301 Annex 9
ANNEX 9: GUIDELINES FOR BORROW AREA MANAGEMENT
Selection and Rehabilitation of Borrow Pits: Guidelines for selection of borrow pits, amount that
can be borrowed and its rehabilitation in line with The Indian Road Congress (IRC):10-1961 will
be followed and are as follows:
 Contractor must identify the borrow areas before start of construction and submit
these details with rehabilitation plan.
 Borrow areas will not be located on cultivable lands. However, if it becomes
necessary to borrow earth from temporarily acquired cultivated lands, their depth
will not exceed 45 cm. The topsoil to a depth of 15cm will be stripped and set
aside. Thereafter, soil may be dug out to a further depth not exceeding 30 cm
and used in forming the embankment.
 A 15 cm topsoil will be stripped off from the borrow pit and this will be stored in
stockpiles in a designated area for height not exceeding 2m and side slopes not
steeper than 1:2 (Vertical: Horizontal).
 Ridges of not less than 8m widths will be left at intervals not exceeding 300m.
Small drains will be cut through the ridges, if necessary, to facilitate drainage.
The slope of the edges will be maintained not steeper than 1:4 (vertical:
Horizontal).
 Borrow pit will be selected from wasteland ;
 Priority will be given to the borrowing from humps above the general ground level
within the road land;
 Priority will be given to the borrowing by excavating/enlarging existing tanks;
 Borrowing will be from land acquired temporarily and located at least 500m away
from the road;
 Borrowing will be from mounds resulting from the digging of well and lowering of
agricultural fields in vicinity of the road;
 Borrow area near to any surface water body will be at least at a distance of 15m
from the toe of the bank or high flood level, whichever is maximum.
 In case of settlements, borrow pits will not be selected within a distance 800 m
from towns or villages. If unavoidable, earth excavation will not exceed 30cm in
depth;
 The haulage distance from site will not be too far.
 Redevelopment plan will be prepared by the contractor before the start of work
which should be duly agreed upon by land owner.
 Borrow pits will be backfilled with rejected construction wastes and covered with
vegetation.
 Borrow areas might be used for aquaculture in case landowner wants such
development.
 Borrow pits located near habitat areas will be re-developed immediately after
borrowing is completed. If spoils are dumped, that will be covered with a layers
of stockpiled topsoil in accordance with compliance requirements with respect
MOEF/SPCB guidelines.
 Prohibit dumping of waste except inert construction rubble
Records: The following records will be maintained:

Annex 9 302
1. List of Borrow areas identification with capacity and rehabilitation plan

2. Agreement with land owners where applicable
3. Details of Earth excavated
4. Closure report of rehabilitated borrow pits.
Reporting:
The Borrow area opening, earth borrowed and borrow area rehabilitation details will form part of
half yearly report
Responsibility:
 Prime Responsibility: Contractor will be responsible for borrow area management
and reporting
 Supervisory Responsibility: Project Management and Authority Engineer will
check compliance with the above guidelines.
303 Annex 10
ANNEX 10: GUIDELINES FOR EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Many emergencies can occur in construction sites and will need to be effectively handled.
The environmental and occupational health and safety aspects and related emergency can
includes incidence such as Collapse / subsidence of soil / Fire / Explosion / Gas Leak,
Collapse of Building / Equipment and other Occupational Accidents. On site and off site
emergency management plan will be developed to effectively handle them. The following
guidelines will be used to develop these plans
Guidelines:
Availability of ‘On-Site Emergency Management Plan’
 The contractor will have a written on site emergency management plan. The
contractor should submit a copy of this plan to BSRDCL and the Project
Management and Authority Engineer before the start of the work.
 Contractor will develop the onsite emergency plan considering the potential
environmental, occupational health and safety emergency situation at site.
 Contractor will include a list of potential emergency situations in the
emergency management plan including potential Environmental and
Occupational Health and Safety Emergency Situations during construction,
operation and maintenance stages.
Examples of potential emergency situations have been defined below for guidance purposes.
The contractors may follow refer to this for developing site specific on site emergency
preparedness plan.
Emergency conditions / Sources

situations
Collapse / subsidence of  Civil structures
soil and structures  Heavy construction machinery
Bulk spillage  Hazardous substance / inflammable liquid storage
 Vehicular movement on highway
Fire and explosion  Inflammable Storage Areas
 Gas Cylinder Storage Areas
 Electrical Circuits
 Isolated Gas Cylinders (LPG / DA)
 Welding / Gas Cutting Activity
Flooding  Heavy monsoons
 Upstream activities of irrigation or damming
 Glacial lake outburst Flood at the source of the river
Electrical Shock  HT line
 LT distribution
 Electrically Operated Machines / Equipment / Hand Tools /
Electrical Cables
Gaseous Leakage  Gas Cylinder Storage Areas
 Gas Cylinder used in Gas Cutting / Welding Purposes
Annex 10 304
Emergency conditions / Sources

situations
Accidents due to Vehicles  Heavy Earth Moving Machinery
 Cranes
 Fork Lifts
 Trucks
 Workman Transport Vehicles (cars / scooters / motor
cycles / cycles)
 Collapse, toppling or collision of transport equipment
Slips & Falls  Work at Height (Roof Work, Steel Erection, Scaffold, Repair
(Man & Material) & Maintenance, Erection of equipment, Excavation etc.)
 Slips (Watery surfaces due to rain)
 Lifting tools & Tackles (Electric Hoist & Forklifts)
 Falling into the river and drowning
Collision with stationary /  Vehicular movement on highway
moving objects
Other Hazards  Cuts & Wounds
 Confined Space (under & inside machinery etc.)
 Hot Burns
 Pressure Impacts (Plant contains several Pressure Vessels
& pipefitting containing CO2, Air, Water, product & Steam,
which can cause accidents & injuries to person around.)
Design of ‘On-Site Emergency Plan’

The ‘On-site emergency plan’ to be prepared by contractor will include a minimum of the
following information :
 Name & Address of Contractor
 Updation sheet
 Project Location
 Name, Designation & Contact Numbers of the organization, nearby hospitals,
fire agencies etc. and key personnel including their assigned responsibilities
in case of an emergency.
 The roles and responsibilities of executing personnel
 Site Layout Diagram
 Identification of Potential Emergencies Situations/ preventive measures /
control & response measures
 Location of Emergency Control Centre (or designated area for emergency
control / coordination) with requisite facilities.
 Medical services / first aid
 List of emergency equipment including fire extinguishers, fire suits etc.
Emergency Control Centre

The emergency control centre will be equipped with following facilities
 Copy of current on-site emergency plan
 Display of the name of site emergency controller
 Appropriate numbers of artificial respiratory sets
 Appropriate numbers of Stretchers
 Vehicle/ambulances on each construction site for 24 hours
305 Annex 10
 Adequate and reliable communication facilities (phone, handset etc.)

 Site layout diagram with entry and exit routes / Assembly points
 Directory of internal / external emergency phone Numbers
 Fire extinguishers (DCP type / Foam Type / CO2) on all construction camps
and yards
 List of fire extinguishers installed in the construction sites and yards including
maintenance records
 A set of personal protective equipment (PPE) for each and every member of
the construction team
 First-aid boxes with prescribed first-aid medicines in every construction camp
site and yard
 List of competent first-aiders
 List of fire trained personnel
 Appropriate numbers of blankets, rescue ropes and high beam torches
 Drinking water
 Gas leak detectors
 Life boats & jackets
Records:
The following records will be maintained:
1. Record of emergency preparedness plan with emergency contact numbers

2. Mock drill/emergency preparedness exercise records
3. Corrective preventive action record after emergency is occurred
Reporting:
The accident and incident records and emergency preparedness drill reports will form
part of quarterly report to BSRDCL and the Project Management and Authority
Engineer
Responsibility:
Prime Responsibility: Contractor will be responsible for implementing the Emergency

plan and reporting
Supervisory Responsibility: The Project Management and Authority Engineer

Supervision will check compliance of the contractor with the above guidelines
Annex 11 306
ANNEX 11: GUIDELINES FOR WASTE DISPOSAL AND MANAGEMENT
A Waste disposal and management plan will be prepared by the contractor before start of
construction works and submitted to BSRDCL and the Project Management and Authority
Engineer for their review and approval. The management plan will follow the guidelines as given
below:
(i) The debris disposal site should be identified which are preferably barren or low-
lying areas away from settlements.
(ii) Prior concurrence will be taken from concerned Govt. Authorities or land owner
(iii) Due care should be taken during site clearance and disposal of debris so that
public/ private properties are not damage or effected, no traffic are interrupted.
(iv) All efforts should be made to use debris in road construction or any other public
utilities.
(v) The debris should be stored at site ensuring that existing water bodies and drains
within or adjacent to the site are kept safe and free and no blocking of drains
occurs.
(vi) All dust prone material should be transported in a covered truck.
(vii) All liquid waste like oils and paint waste should be stored at identified locations
and preferably on a cemented floor. Provision of spill collection pit will be made in
the floor to collect the spilled oil or paint. These should be sold off to authorized
recyclers.
(viii) All domestic waste generated at construction camp preferably be composted in
portable mechanized composter. The composted material will be used as
manure. In case composting is not feasible, the material will either be disposed
off though municipal waste disposal system or disposed of through land burial.
The dump site must be covered up with at least six inch thick layer of soil.
(ix) Only appropriately design and compliant landfills will be used for disposing waste
(x) All efforts should be made that no chemical/ oily waste spill over to ground or
water bodies.
(xi) All precautions should be followed for emergency preparedness and
occupational health & safety during construction and handling a waste.
(xii) Provision of fire extinguishers will be made at the storage area
(xiii) Adequate traffic control signals and barriers should be used in case traffic is to
be diverted during debris disposal. All efforts should be made to ensure
avoidance of traffic jam, which otherwise results in air pollution, noise pollution
and public unrest.
Records: The following records will be maintained

 Generation and disposal quantity with location of disposal
 Recyclables waste generation and disposal
 Domestic waste disposal locations details
Reporting:
The waste generation and disposal details will form part of quarterly report to BSRDCL
Responsibility:
Prime Responsibility: Contractor will be responsible for waste management and
reporting
307 Annex 11
Supervisory Responsibility: Project Management and Authority Engineer will check the
contractor’s adherence to the above guidelines
Annex 12 308
ANNEX 12: DETAILS OF TRANSECT WALKS CONDUCTED IN THE PROJECT INFLUENCE AREA
S Area of transect No. of Seas Date `Status of Remarks

N walk Transect on Flora Fauna
Walk
1 Didarganj & 1 Dry 04.02.2015 Agricultural Reptiles, birds – common Found in local
Sabalpur Crops crows, rock pigeon, Red old buildings,
Agricultural fields, vented Bulbul, Common trees & grass
Patna (Length Myna. land.
Travel 2200Meter) 1 Wet 31.07.2015 -do- -do- -do-
2 Didarganj & 1 Dry 04.02.2015 Agricultural Birds, fishes-Catla, Rohu, Found in local
Sabalpur crops Calbasu, Kalabans, fish market.
along the Ganga Tengara, Ponthia etc.
river bank (South) 1 Wet 31.07.2015 -do- Found local Fishes -do-
South Channel, Mrigal-Crirrhina mrigala
Patna(Length Catla-Catla catla
Travel 1600Meter) Tengra-Mystus tengara
Ponthia-Mystus tengra
Singhi-Heyeropneustus
fossilis
3 Kachhi Dargah – 1 Dry 05.02.2015 Agricultural Dolphin sited in Ganga Walk through
Didarganj Ganga crops – Water mechanized
Ghat to Rustampur Trees - Boat along bank
Diara (Length of Ganga
Travel 1000 Meter)
Kachhi Dargah – 1 Wet 01.08.2015 Agricultural Dolphin sited in Ganga Walk through
Didarganj Ganga crops – Water mechanized
Ghat to Rustampur Trees - Boat along bank
Diara( length of Ganga
travel1500 meter)
4 Jafrabad Dih 1 Dry 05.02.2015 Agricultural Birds-Common crow, Habitat mostly in
Village crops & Cuckoo, House sparrow, trees &
Vishali Diara Area trees,Peepal, Cattle Egret, Spotted settlements,
(Distance Bargad, Sissoo, dove, Bank Myna grass land &
3000meter) Jamnu, Neem, shrubs
Sal, Mango,
309 Annex 12

Walk
Jackfruit
1 Wet 01.08.2015
5 Saifabad Village 1 Dry 05.02.2015 Agricultural Birds-Common crow, Habitat mostly in
Diara Area crops & Cuckoo, House sparrow, trees &
Vaishali trees,Peepal, Cattle Egret, Spotted settlements,
(Distance covered Bargad, Sissoo, dove, Bank Myna grass land &
2500meter) Jamnu, Neem, Reptiles – Rat snakes shrubs
Sal, Mango, (Ptyas mucosus),
Jackfruit, Common Krait (Bugarus
Jalebi, Palm, caerulens), Indian cobra
Arjan (Naja Naja) etc
Saifabad Village 1 Wet 01.08.2015 Paddy crops & Reptiles – House Geiko & Collecting
Diara Area trees Garden Lizard are feedback from
Vaishali(Distance directly sighted during local people.
covered primary visit.
2500meter)
6 Samaspur Village, 1 Dry 06.02.2015 Agricultural Terrestrial fauna – No Consultation
Vaishali(Distance crops – wild animals sited during with community
covered Mustered, the field surveys but local
2000meter) Wheat plant people and secondary
growing in data shows reported
fields. some of the animals
found. However, avifauna
with higher diversity are
common crows, Indian
roller.
Samaspur Village, 1 Wet 04.08.2015 Agricultural Avifauna & Terrestrial
Vaishali(Distance crops – rice fauna
covered 1800 fields (Dhaan)
meter)
7 Bishunpur 1 Dry 07.02.2015 Agricultural Terrestrial fauna – Consultation
Kishundas crops Neelgai, wild boar with community
( Distance covered
Annex 12 310

Walk
1500 meter)
Majlishpur Chak 1 Wet 28.08.2015 Grasses along Mammals- Blue cow, Due to heavy
(Distance covered the banks, trees reptiles, Fishes, Gangatic water flow in
2800 meter) are fruit, flower Dolphin Ganga no
and seed chance to take
bearing, photographs of
Banana Dolphins
Through boat
8 Khanpur Pakri 1 Dry 07.02.2015 Agricultural Terrestrial fauna – No Focusing
Village Viashali crops – wild animals sited during Feeding habitat
(Distance covered Mustered, the field surveys but local
2200 meter) Wheat plant people and secondary
growing in data shows reported
fields. some of the animals
found. However, avifauna
with higher diversity are
common crows, Indian
roller.
1 Wet 29.08.2015 Agricultural
crops – Maize,
vegetables etc.
9 Kalyanpur Village 1 Dry 07.02.2015 Agricultural Terrestrial Fauna
Vaishali (Distance crops
covered 1500 1 Wet 29.08.2015 Agricultural Reptiles, aves, mammals,
meter) crops-Paddy, insects
Vegetables,
Maize
10 Madhurapur 1 Dry 08.02.2015 Agricultural Avian fauna – Eagle,
(Distance covered crops, fruit tree great white pelican
2200 meter) – Mango, Reptiles – Karait, Indian
Jackfruit, Cobra
Jalebi, Neem, Garden Lizard commonly
Sissoo etc. seen.
311 Annex 12

Walk
1 Wet 06.09.2015 Agricultural Avian fauna – Common
crops, crow, Myna, Eagle,
vegetables & sparrow, Babbler, pigeon,
natural growing Cattle Egrets, Red
trees Vented bulbul, Drongo.
11 Jahangirpur Fuli 1 Wet 07.09.2015 Agricultural Avian fauna – House
(Distance covered crops, sparrow, Rose ringed
1400 meter) vegetables parakeet, Bank Myna
TOTAL 22
Note –
1. There is no notified forest in the study area.
2. Agricultural crops of various types are grown in the study area.
3. Resident in the project are very happy about the construction of bridge.
Annex 13 312
ANNEX 13: SOIL, WATER, AIR, AND NOISE QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS ALONG THE PROJECT ALIGNMENT
(A: Air sampling location, S: Soil sampling location, N: Noise sampling location, GW: Ground Water, SW: Surface Water)
313 Annex 14
ANNEX 14: COPY OF ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE FOR THE PROJECT

Annex 14 314
315 Annex 14
Annex 14 316
317 Annex 14

Project Report 3

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Project Report 3

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Environmental Impact Assessment (Draft)

IND: Bihar New Ganga Bridge Project

WEIGHTS AND MEASURES

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .................................................................................. I

2. The project is classified as environment Category A Project as per ADB SPS

B. Description of the Project

Table 1: Project Components

C. Description of the Environment

i) Gangetic dolphin (Platanista gangetica)

D. Consultation, Disclosure and Grievance Mechanism

E. Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

22. Construction activities for pre-construction, construction and post-construction and

F. Conclusions and Recommendations

27. Conclusions. In light of the technical, institutional and budgetary measures

Figure 1: Map of the Project Site

Figure 2: Connectivity of Proposed Bridge to the Regional Road Network

C. Environment Category and Scope of the EIA Study

Table 2: Project Categorization

Figure 3: EIA Study Area

D. Methodology Adopted for the EIA Study

1. Primary data collection

2. Secondary data collection

E. Structure of the Report

 Chapter 7 - Analysis of Alternatives: This section covers analysis of various

II. POLICY, LEGAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORKS

A. National (India) Environmental Policy Framework

Table 3: Applicable Environmental National and State Requirements

Sl. Activity Statute Requirement Competent Responsible Time

Sl. Activity Statute Requirement Competent Responsible Time

iii) Plants, discharge of sewage from construction camps requires No Objection

B. Social Regulatory Requirements of India and State

C. International Treaties and Relevance to the Project

 Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate

 Convention Concerning the Protection of the World Cultural and Natural

 Convention on Biological Diversity (Rectified by India in 1994): It is an

 Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna

 Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals

 Ramsar Convention on Wetlands of International Importance (Ratified by

D. ADB Safeguard Policy Statement Requirements

category 'B' level & also

Figure 4: Environmental Legal Administrative Framework in India

Figure 5: Environmental Clearance Process in India

34. Key Steps in EC Process:

1) Submission of application along with Form-I, Pre-feasibility report and other

Table 4: Key Steps in Tree Cutting Permission Process:

III. PROJECT DESCRIPTION

35. The proposed project is a greenfield project aimed at development of connectivity

Table 5: Details of the Project

B. Location and Features of the Proposed Project

Figure 6: Location Map of the Project Site on Google earth Image

Figure 7: Location of the Project Site on SOI Topographic Map

C. Engineering Surveys and Investigations

D. Projected Traffic for the Design

Table 6. Projected Traffic for the Project

E. Components of the Project

43. The project consists of the following key components:

Figure 8: General Arrangement Drawing of Proposed Bridge

Figure 9: Cross Section Detail of Proposed bridge and Foundation

F. Proposed Alignment and Conceptual Plan of Project Components

Figure 12. Section 2: Conceptual Plan of the Rail-Over-Bridge across Patna -

c. Section 3: Old NH-30/Loknayak Ganga Path interchange - A 6-lane divided

Figure 14. Section 4: Conceptual Plan of the Bakhtiyarpur-Patna Toll Post

h. Section 8: Junction Arrangement at Mehnar Road - Mehnar road intersection will